OMM Scania

Complete
English
Driver's Manual
Copying, revision, translation and distribution of this work and all other instances of driver’s
information irrespective of form or method is forbidden without written consent from Scania
CV AB. All statutory rights are reserved by Scania CV AB.
The driver's manual contains relevant information to enable you to operate the vehicle safely
and correctly. In addition, it tells you how to use the equipment included in your vehicle. (In
certain cases, it may also contain information on equipment not included in the vehicle.) Scania
assumes that every person driving a Scania vehicle has familiarised themselves with the content
of the associated Driver's Manual and (if applicable) agreed to the rights that Scania has
reserved. Scania employs a policy of continual development, and we must therefore reserve the
right to make changes to equipment and technology supplied with the vehicle. For this reason,
the information contained in this driver's manual cannot be called on to support claims resulting
from any such change.
When you drive or in any other way handle your Scania vehicle, various forms of data can be
generated in the vehicle or in connected Scania systems that can constitute personal data. Such
data may be processed by Scania or others within Scania's sales network or circle of partners.
This is either for the provision of an ordered service for the relevant vehicle or you as a driver,
or for Scania's own purposes. Under the privacy policy at www.scania.com and your national
Scania website, you can read more in-depth information about what type of processing this
regards, how it is performed and for what purposes it is carried out etc. It also states where to
turn to with your questions, views and wishes regarding Scania's processing of data.
When we use the term Scania workshop, we normally mean an Authorised Scania Workshop.
An Authorised Scania Workshop has been approved by DOS (Scania's dealer and workshop
standard), which covers a number of different customer services. An authorised workshop is
responsible for carrying out repairs under warranty in accordance with Scania's warranty
stipulations. An Authorised Scania Workshop possesses the training, tools and equipment
necessary to diagnose faults and carry out common repairs on Scania vehicles. When a
workshop for some reason is not able to realise its commitments, it is possible to obtain help
from Scania Assistance and the responsible distributor. Many other workshops also possess the
ability to carry out repairs on Scania vehicles and Scania will oblige by supplying any
documentation, training and tools that are necessary in return for a fee. Scania is not able to
assess the competence of these workshops or support them if repairs are not carried out in a
proper manner. Scania does not accept responsibility for repairs carried out by these workshops.
Open source (Open Source Notice)
Parts of this software contains files which include open source (open source) licences, which
may require additional rights and obligations for the recipient. These files are supplied as found.
A list of applicable open source (open source) licenses is shown below. During a three year
period after receiving this product you can obtain a copy of the open source of these files by
sending a request to Scania at the following address:[email protected].
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Complete
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share
and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered
by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can
get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect
making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Complete
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from
the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a
copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty
(or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work
based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or
with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this License.
Complete
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do
one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who
have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on
the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
Complete
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-
free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in
other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to
the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the
rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program
under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the
Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving
the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
Complete
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS
IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN

WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public,
the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and
change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have
at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year>
<name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program;
if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
Complete
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the
General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than
`show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your
program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign
a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which
makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
RADIO TYPE APPROVAL INFORMATION
Model / FCC ID: L2C0051TR IC: 3432A-0051TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the
radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Note: This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20
cm between the radiator and the body of any persons, user or bystander.
Refer to www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information-dis for additional information.
Complete
SIMPLIFIED EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The radio equipment fitted in the vehicle conforms with the 2014/53/EU Directive. Refer to
the complete text of the EU Declaration of Conformity, which can be found on the following
website: www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information
Model / FCC ID: 2AHV8-C31859
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's
body in normal use position.
Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The original text in this FCC approval is in English. In case of discrepancies between the
original English text and the translation, the English text applies.
Model / FCC ID: 2AHV8-C31859
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment conforms with the FCC limit for the radiation exposure stated for an
uncontrolled environment and fulfils FCC’s guidelines for radio frequency (RF) radiation
exposure. This equipment must be installed and operated with the radiating part of the
equipment at a distance of at least 20 cm away from the body of the user in normal using
positions.
Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or used together with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Complete
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
In accordance with Contran 711/17, Scania supplies a basic road safety manual (Manual Básico
de Segurança no Trânsito) on the website https://www.scania.com/br/pt/home/products-and-
services.html
Complete
Table of contents
About the Driver’s Manual............................................. 1

Read this first................................................................................ 1
Feedback to Scania........................................................................ 1
Captions in the driver’s manual.................................................... 2
Driver’s Manual in digital format................................................. 3
Safety............................................................................... 4
Safety during vehicle maintenance............................................... 4
Danger of fire and explosion........................................................ 4
Vehicle gas (CNG) and safety....................................................... 5
Vehicle gas (LNG) and safety....................................................... 9
Safety belt.................................................................................... 13
Airbag in the steering wheel....................................................... 17
Curtain airbag............................................................................. 18
Fire extinguisher......................................................................... 20
Smoke detector........................................................................... 23
ADR............................................................................................. 25
Environment.................................................................. 29
Roof air deflector........................................................................ 29
Economical driving..................................................................... 31
Checking nitrogen oxides........................................................... 37
White smoke limiter................................................................... 40
Handling hazardous substances.................................................. 41
Isocyanates................................................................................... 41
Vehicle information instruments.................................. 43

Instrument cluster....................................................................... 43
Menus in the instrument cluster display.................................... 48
Indicator lamps and symbols....................................................... 53
Complete
Table of contents
Symbols that are not chapter specific......................................... 54

Bodywork symbols...................................................................... 59
Distance to empty and remaining engine running time............ 67
Tachograph.................................................................................. 68
Tachograph.................................................................................. 77
Tachograph Remote Download.................................................. 78
ID button..................................................................................... 81
IVD.............................................................................................. 83
Tyre pressure monitoring........................................................... 86
Driving time and rest time support............................................ 92
Hour counter............................................................................... 97
Driver environment....................................................... 98
Steering wheel............................................................................. 98
Windscreen wipers, windscreen washers and headlamp washers
................................................................................................... 101
Adjusting the collapsible gear lever in the cab......................... 103
Ergonomics............................................................................... 104
Fixed seat................................................................................... 106
Seat, Basic.................................................................................. 107
Seat, medium............................................................................. 108
Seat, premium........................................................................... 110
Folding seat............................................................................... 111
Reclining seat............................................................................ 112
Seat heating............................................................................... 113
Seats in the crew area................................................................ 113
Extendable ladder...................................................................... 114
Fixed bed................................................................................... 114
Upper bed.................................................................................. 115
Refrigerator............................................................................... 117
Microwave oven........................................................................ 122
Coffee maker............................................................................. 126
Complete
Table of contents
TV preparation......................................................................... 127
Electrical socket in cab.............................................................. 129
Climate system.......................................................................... 132
Compressed air horn................................................................. 143
Sound level control for reverse alarm....................................... 144
Mirrors...................................................................................... 145
Rear view mirror heating.......................................................... 148
Window winders....................................................................... 149
Electrically heated windscreen................................................. 153
Roof hatch................................................................................. 153
Roof hatch................................................................................. 155
Auxiliary heater......................................................................... 155
App for the remote control of auxiliary heater......................... 165
Electric cab heater..................................................................... 166
Storage compartments.............................................................. 167
Accessories................................................................................. 169
Driver assistance system.............................................. 170

Kickdown.................................................................................. 170
Acceleration control.................................................................. 170
Cruise control........................................................................... 172
Cruise control with active prediction....................................... 174
Eco-roll..................................................................................... 176
Advanced emergency braking (AEB)........................................ 178
Adaptive cruise control............................................................. 184
Platooning................................................................................. 194
Calibrating the distance sensor................................................. 200
Lane departure warning (LDW).............................................. 201
Scania Driver Support.............................................................. 205
Attention support...................................................................... 212
Zone management.................................................................... 215
Complete
Table of contents
Engine.......................................................................... 221
Hand throttle............................................................................ 221
Idling speed adjustment............................................................ 223
Adaptive idling.......................................................................... 226
Raised idling speed.................................................................... 226
Hybrid....................................................................................... 227
Electric mode............................................................................ 233
Idle stop and start...................................................................... 238
Electrical engine heater............................................................ 240
Engine air cleaner..................................................................... 241
Radiator blind............................................................................ 243
Road holding............................................................... 246

Air suspension........................................................................... 246
Alternative vehicle levels........................................................... 248
Tag axle lift................................................................................ 251
Displaying vehicle weights........................................................ 253
Axle weight regulation, tag axle................................................ 256
Operation unit for air suspension............................................. 258
Manual level control................................................................. 261
Mobility........................................................................ 265
Selectable front wheel drive...................................................... 265
Differential lock........................................................................ 267
Low gear in transfer gearbox.................................................... 272
Drive wheel disengagement...................................................... 273
ESP............................................................................................ 276
Traction Control (TC).............................................................. 278
EST........................................................................................... 285
Complete
Table of contents
Gear changing and braking........................................ 287

Gear changing........................................................................... 287
Clutch monitoring.................................................................... 297
Collapsible gear lever................................................................ 299
Opticruise.................................................................................. 300
Opticruise.................................................................................. 316
Exhaust brake............................................................................ 334
Retarder..................................................................................... 339
Downhill speed control............................................................. 343
Downhill speed control with offset.......................................... 346
Parking brake............................................................................ 348
Parking brake............................................................................ 354
Filling air in the trailer’s brake circuit...................................... 362
Trailer brake.............................................................................. 362
Interlock valve........................................................................... 366
Hill hold.................................................................................... 368
Hill start aid.............................................................................. 370
Automatic neutral position....................................................... 372
ABS............................................................................................ 372
EBS............................................................................................ 376
Lighting........................................................................ 383
Main beam, dipped beam and direction indicators.................. 383
Standard lighting....................................................................... 384
Lighting in the cab.................................................................... 393
Rotating beacon........................................................................ 407
Locks and alarm........................................................... 409

Central locking.......................................................................... 409
Central locking and alarm........................................................ 414
Starter lock................................................................................ 427
Complete
Table of contents
Immobiliser............................................................................... 429
Infotainment system................................................... 432

Infotainment system.................................................................. 432
Camera...................................................................................... 447
Loading and unloading............................................... 449

Tail lift....................................................................................... 449
Towing unit............................................................................... 451
Remote controlled trailer coupling.......................................... 454
Trailer socket............................................................................. 457
Compressed air, trailer connection........................................... 461
Fifth wheel................................................................................. 463
Fifth wheel................................................................................. 467
Fifth wheel................................................................................. 471
Fifth wheel................................................................................. 476
Fifth wheel, sliding.................................................................... 480
Fifth wheel, sliding.................................................................... 485
Securing the vehicle during transport...................................... 488
Checks.......................................................................... 489
Check points.............................................................................. 489
Check the brake system for leakages........................................ 492
Checking brake chamber stroke length.................................... 493
Maintenance................................................................ 494
Maintenance programme.......................................................... 494
Tool kit...................................................................................... 494
Front grille panel...................................................................... 496
Cab tilting................................................................................. 497
External ladder.......................................................................... 509
Complete
Table of contents
Lamps........................................................................................ 510
Wiper blade............................................................................... 522
Water separating fuel filter....................................................... 523
Snow protection air intake........................................................ 527
Particulate filter regeneration................................................... 528
Draining the compressed air tanks........................................... 532
Disc brake.................................................................................. 533
Fifth wheel................................................................................. 536
Internal cleaning....................................................................... 541
External cleaning....................................................................... 543
Tyres and rims........................................................................... 547
Wheel change............................................................................ 551
Paintwork damage..................................................................... 558
Waxing and polishing................................................................ 559
Wheel chocks............................................................................ 559
Emergencies................................................................. 561
Emergency exit.......................................................................... 561
Emergency kit........................................................................... 562
Warning triangle....................................................................... 562
Towing and recovery................................................................. 563
Shunting.................................................................................... 576
Detaching the propeller shaft................................................... 578
Release the parking brake without compressed air.................. 583
Chassis lifting points................................................................. 585
Spare wheel............................................................................... 588
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit...................................... 590
Electrical system........................................................... 593

Fuses and relays......................................................................... 593
Batteries..................................................................................... 618
Batteries..................................................................................... 626
Complete
Table of contents
Battery master switch................................................................ 633

Battery charger.......................................................................... 637
Adaptive battery charging......................................................... 638
Jump starting............................................................................. 639
Jump starting............................................................................. 643
Jump socket............................................................................... 648
Bodywork..................................................................... 650
EG power take-off.................................................................... 650
EK power take-off..................................................................... 654
ED power take-off.................................................................... 657
Bodybuilding and conversions.................................................. 658
Wet kit....................................................................................... 660
EXT switch............................................................................... 661
Operating the platform............................................................. 662
Operating the platform............................................................. 666
Box truck bodywork.................................................................. 669
Oils and fluids.............................................................. 676

Engine oil.................................................................................. 676
Hydraulic oil............................................................................. 678
Checking and filling engine oil................................................. 679
Power steering oil..................................................................... 683
Automatic chassis lubrication................................................... 685
Reductant.................................................................................. 688
Filling clutch fluid..................................................................... 695
Coolant...................................................................................... 699
Washer fluid.............................................................................. 703
Fuels............................................................................. 705
Biodiesel.................................................................................... 705
Complete
Table of contents
Vehicle gas (CNG).................................................................... 709

Vehicle gas (LNG).................................................................... 715
Ethanol fuel............................................................................... 728
Fuel heater................................................................................. 732
Fuel system................................................................................ 735
Bleed the fuel system................................................................. 736
Contaminants in the fuel.......................................................... 746
Technical data.............................................................. 749

Type plate.................................................................................. 749
Materials with extremely hazardous substances....................... 753
Pressure in brake system........................................................... 754
Tyre pressure............................................................................. 755
Certifications............................................................................. 759
Complete
Table of contents
Complete
About the Driver’s Manual

Read this first
Read the entire Driver’s Manual thoroughly before driving the
vehicle.
Always follow the admonitions and instructions given. The
Driver's Manual tells you what you need to know about the
vehicle to be able to drive it without risking damage to the
vehicle or injury to yourself or others.
The vehicle settings described in the Driver's Manual may
differ from the settings in your vehicle.
It also covers vehicle maintenance and how to carry out minor
repairs. For more information on repairs, refer to Scania’s
workshop literature.
Feedback to Scania
Contact your dealer if you have views on the content of this
Driver's Manual.
The dealer can help you make a report to the Scania factory.
Scania is thankful for all suggestions regarding improvements,
as we continuously strive to make the Driver's Manual as user-
friendly as possible.
Complete
1
Captions in the driver’s manual

The captions that appear in the Driver’s Manual are Warning,
Important, Note, Environment and Ergonomics.
WARNING!
This caption is used when there is a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT!
This caption is used when there is a risk of material damage
to the vehicle or other property.
Note!
This caption is used for certain important procedures.
ENVIRONMENT
This prompt is used when there is information which will
affect the environment.
2 Complete
ERGONOMICS
This prompt is used when there is information which will
affect the ergonomics.
Driver’s Manual in digital format
Driver’s Manual as an app

The Driver's Manual can also be read in an app.
The Driver's Manual is available in digital format as an app,
Driver's guide. The app is initially available for Android and
only for certain markets. Several markets will be added
afterwards.
b410840
Complete
3
Safety
Safety
Safety during vehicle maintenance
Work on the vehicle must be performed with a good safety
margin, which requires the person carrying out the job to have a
very good understanding of the work involved.
Work on the vehicle, such as checks and service or repairs, must
be carried out by someone who has a very good understanding
of the work involved. This is to avoid any risk of personal injury
or damage to property and the environment. If in doubt,
contact your Scania workshop.
When working indoors with the engine running, provide
adequate ventilation or use an exhaust extraction unit.
Always have a margin of safety when danger is involved. Protect
yourself as well as others. Don't take risks!
Danger of fire and explosion

Things to consider to avoid danger of fire and explosion.
Avoid open fires, welding and similar in proximity to
combustible and explosive substances such as oil and diesel.
Flammable material
Avoid contact with flammable materials and hot surfaces.
4 Complete
Safety
If your load consists of flammable material which can come into

contact with hot parts of the vehicle during loading and
unloading, you must remove any spillage before driving off.
Clean thoroughly to reduce the risk of fire.
The following vehicle parts normally become hot during
driving: exhaust pipe, exhaust manifold, exhaust tailpipe,
turbocharger and silencer.
Examples of flammable materials are wood chips, bark,
shredded paper and grain.
Vehicle gas (CNG) and safety
WARNING!
In the event of fire, switch off the engine and immediately
notify the fire brigade that the vehicle contains vehicle gas
and what type of gas it is.
WARNING!
Switch off the engine immediately if you smell gas.
Complete
5
Safety
WARNING!
The fuel system contains vehicle gas under a high pressure
of up to 230 bar, and should only be repaired by qualified
personnel. If the system is opened in an uncontrolled
manner, there is a risk of injury and of damage to the fuel
system.
Action in the event of fire

In the event of fire, you must immediately switch off the engine
and notify the fire and rescue service.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Notify the fire and rescue service that the vehicle
contains CNG (compressed natural gas) vehicle gas.
Each gas tank has 2 safety valves, one temperature controlled

and one pressure controlled. The temperature controlled safety
valve opens when the gas temperature exceeds 110°C and the
pressure controlled one opens when the pressure in the tank
exceeds 340 bar. The safety valves release the gas in a controlled
manner and prevent the gas tank from exploding.
Vehicle gas can only ignite with a mixture of 5–15% vehicle gas
and the remaining percentage air.
6 Complete
Safety
Actions in the event of a damaged gas tank

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and apply the
parking brake.
2. Switch off the engine and evacuate the vehicle.
3. Call the local emergency number.
Actions in the event of gas odour

The solenoid valves of the gas tanks close automatically.
2. Close all manual taps.
3. Contact a Scania workshop.
Park the vehicle outdoors as long as there is leakage.
4. Tow the vehicle if the vehicle is to be taken to a
workshop.
Symbol for gas leakage lights up red

b212311
The symbol lights up red.
The pressure in the fuel system has reduced and a leakage may
have occurred.
1. Visit a Scania workshop to repair the fuel system.
Complete
7
Safety
A gas leakage warning can also be displayed due to:

• a manual tap has been opened.
• manual cocks being closed while the engine consumes
gas.
• trying to start the engine while manual cocks are closed.
• filling fuel while the engine is running.
• fitting external components that are not compatible with
Scania’s systems.
If the warning is displayed after any of the operations above

have been performed:
1. Turn the starter key to the lock position and wait for
more than 20 seconds so that the vehicle is switched off
completely and then try to start it again.
If the fuel system is fault-free, the warning should no
longer be shown.
Safety valves for pressure drop in the fuel

system
If the fuel system rapidly loses pressure, for example when a fuel
pipe breaks, the safety valves operate, which immediately
switches off the flow of fuel from the gas tanks. Tow the vehicle
to a Scania workshop to have the fuel system repaired if this
occurs.
8 Complete
Safety
Requirements from authorities for vehicle

gas, CNG
Detecting gas leakage in a gas-fuelled vehicle is a requirement
from the authorities that is stated in ECE R110.
The purpose of the requirement is to prevent safety-critical
situations as far as possible. Gas leakage is detected by using 2
characteristics in the gas fuel system: gas pressure and mass flow
rate. If a leakage occurs, the pressure will drop and the system
will warn for a leakage.
Vehicle gas (LNG) and safety
WARNING!
In the event of fire, switch off the engine and immediately
notify the fire brigade that the vehicle contains vehicle gas
and what type of gas it is.
WARNING!
The fuel system contains vehicle gas and must only be
repaired by qualified personnel. If the system is opened in
an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury and of
damage to the fuel system.
Complete
9
Safety
WARNING!
Vehicle gas (LNG) is natural gas or biogas that is cooled
down to be converted to liquid form. The temperature is
-130°C, which means that LNG causes frostbite damage if
it comes into contact with the skin. The gas is colourless
and odourless.
Action in the event of fire

In the event of fire, you must immediately switch off the engine
and notify the fire and rescue service.
2. Notify the fire and rescue service that the vehicle
contains LNG (liquefied natural gas) vehicle gas.
Each gas tank has safety valves that open when the pressure in
the tank gets too high. The safety valves release the gas in a
controlled manner and prevent the gas tank from exploding.
Vehicle gas can only ignite with a mixture of 5–15% vehicle gas
and the remaining percentage air.
Actions in the event of a damaged gas tank

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and apply the
parking brake.
2. Switch off the engine and evacuate the vehicle.
10 Complete
Safety
3. Call the local emergency number.
Actions in the event of damaged gas tank

outer casing
If only the outer casing of the gas tank has been damaged, LNG
may evaporate more quickly than expected.
The insulation ability around the gas tank may have
deteriorated and LNG may evaporate faster than
expected.
Actions in the event of gas leakage

The solenoid valves of the gas tanks close automatically.
2. Close the manual tap.
Park the vehicle outdoors as long as there is leakage.
Tow the vehicle if the vehicle is to be taken to a workshop.
Symbol for gas leakage lights up red

b212311
Complete
11
Safety
The pressure in the fuel system has reduced and a leakage may
have occurred.
1. Visit a Scania workshop to repair the fuel system.
The gas leakage warning can appear after the manual tap is
opened.
1. Turn the starter key to the lock position and wait for
more than 10 seconds so that the vehicle is switched off
completely and then try to start it again.
If the fuel system is fault-free, the warning should no
longer be shown.
Safety valves for pressure drop in the fuel

system
If the fuel system rapidly loses pressure, for example when a fuel
pipe breaks, the safety valves operate, which immediately
switches off the flow of fuel from the gas tanks. Tow the vehicle
to a Scania workshop to have the fuel system repaired if this
occurs.
12 Complete
Safety
Safety belt
WARNING!
If safety belts, belt pretensioners and other constituent
components are not checked after a collision, there is a
danger that their functionality will be impaired. This
reduces the level of protection afforded to the driver.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of injury in a collision, the driver and
passengers should always use safety belts when in motion.
WARNING!
If the seatbelt used by a pregnant woman is not fastened
correctly, sudden breaking or a collision could potentially
cause the seatbelt to dig into the stomach. This may result
in serious injury to both the mother and the unborn child.
Note!
Scania’s passenger seats are not tested for child or baby car
seats. The use of a child or baby car seat is therefore done
at your own risk.
Complete
13
Safety
Use the safety belts correctly

In order to ensure that the belt provides the best possible
protection, you must use it correctly.
The protection provided by the belt is best if the waist strap is
worn low over the hips. The diagonal strap should be
positioned as far in on the shoulder as possible without coming
too close to your neck. Check the belt is not twisted or chafing
against any sharp edges.
The belt must not be slack at any point. Check especially
thoroughly if you are wearing bulky clothes.
The symbol for safety belt lights up red
The symbol lights up red, with or without acoustic

b374041
signal.
The driver’s safety belt is not fastened.

1. Tighten the safety belt.
Safety belt and children

When a child is travelling in the vehicle, particular
consideration must be given to the use of safety belts and child
seats.
14 Complete
Safety
A child must always wear its own safety belt. Without its own
safety belt, the risk increases for the child to receive serious
injuries in connection with heavy braking or collision.
Children shorter than 135 cm must use a child seat. Without a
child seat, the risk of serious injuries increases in the event of
harsh brake application or collision. Baby car seats must be used
for children who are not able to sit upright on their own.
Safety belts and pregnancy

In the case of pregnant women, the lap strap and shoulder strap
must be positioned in accordance with specific guidelines.
• The lap strap must be worn as low as possible, below the
stomach.
• The shoulder strap must go over the chest. It must not
be worn across the stomach.
Belt pretensioner
The safety belt is equipped with a belt pretensioner in order to
increase protection for the driver.
The belt pretensioner is always activated in the event of a heavy
frontal collision and reduces forward body movement. The belt
pretensioner also releases if the vehicle rolls over, but not if it is
hit from the side or in the case of minor collisions.
Complete
15
Safety
Safety belt after a collision

The safety belt, belt pretensioner and other constituent parts
must be inspected after each collision.
Even safety belts and components that are not used in the
collision must be inspected and renewed if they show signs of
damage or other defects.
Scania recommends renewing all component parts of the safety
belts that have been used in a collision. Renewal is not necessary
after a minor collision when a Scania workshop cannot find any
damage and considers the function to be fault-free.
The symbol for belt pretensioner lights up

yellow
The symbol for the belt pretensioner may be displayed for two
reasons. In the event of a fault, it must be checked by a Scania
workshop.
b374042
The symbol lights up yellow.
The symbol may be displayed if the belt pretensioner has been

deployed.
When the symbol lights up while you are driving, a fault has
occurred. This fault may mean that the belt pretensioner will
not be activated in a collision.
16 Complete
Safety
1. Contact a Scania workshop if the symbol comes on

during driving. The belt pretensioner must be checked
immediately.
The normal safety belt function will work even if the
symbol is displayed.
Belt pretensioner fault codes

If there is a fault on the belt pretensioner, fault codes are
generated. For more information on how to view the fault
codes, refer to the IVD section
Airbag in the steering wheel
WARNING!
It is especially important to use the safety belt when the
vehicle is equipped with an airbag. This is to ensure you
have the correct sitting position if the airbag is activated.
The airbag activates in the event of a head-on collision to

protect the driver.
The crash safety system detects

when the vehicle crashes and
b357973
activates the airbag.
Complete
17
Safety
The symbol for airbag fault lights up yellow
b374042
A fault has occurred in the system. The fault may mean that the
airbag does not activate in the event of a collision.
1. Contact a Scania workshop for check and to ensure that
the airbag will deploy in the event of a collision.
Curtain airbag
WARNING!
It is especially important to use the safety belt when the
vehicle is equipped with curtain airbags. This is to ensure
you have the correct sitting position if the curtain airbag is
activated.
18 Complete
Safety
WARNING!
No equipment should be fitted to the ceiling of the vehicle
or to door pillars or side panels. This can lead to impaired
protection.
The curtain airbags prevent you from falling out of the cab or
hitting your head during a collision or when overturning,
among other things.
b376010
The curtain airbags are located behind the panel above the door
and activate if the vehicle is involved in a head-on collision or
overturns.
Complete
19
Safety
The symbol for curtain airbag lights up

yellow
b374042
A fault has occurred in the system. The fault may mean that the
curtain airbag does not activate in the event of a collision.
1. Contact a Scania workshop to check the curtain airbag.
Fire extinguisher
Safety precautions for fire extinguisher

It is important that you handle the fire extinguisher correctly so
that it functions as intended should you need to use it.
Read through these safety precautions carefully before you
install the fire extinguisher or use it for the first time.
Information on how to use the fire extinguisher is found on the
fire extinguisher’s label.
• The fire extinguisher must be turned every three months
so that the powder in the fire extinguisher does not
shrink.
• The fire extinguisher should only be used as a fire
extinguisher container.
• Do not expose the fire extinguisher to direct sunlight or
to the effects of the sun.
20 Complete
Safety
• Keep the fire extinguisher clean. Clean with a damp

cleaning cloth. Do not use strong detergents.
• If possible, provide users with information about how to
use the fire extinguisher and explain the risks of misuse.
• Keep children away from fire extinguishers.
• Do not aim the jet of fire extinguishing medium directly
at someone. Keep a safety distance of at least 1 metre
when extinguishing burning clothes on a person.
• It is not permitted to make any modifications, e.g.
welding or soldering, to the fire extinguisher.
• Do not expose the fire extinguisher to external forces
and try not to open it by force. The fire extinguisher
may be pressurised.
• Only skilled service technicians trained in accordance
with local legislation may open and carry out
maintenance on the fire extinguisher.
• Allow a skilled service engineer to depressurise damaged
or rusty fire extinguishers or tank pick-up units. This
must be done before the fire extinguisher is taken to a
waste disposal company.
• Always secure the fire extinguisher properly in the
vehicle. It must be secured in special holders so that it
cannot be damaged by the vehicle's vibrations and
movement, or fall out of its holders.
• Never hand over the fire extinguisher to third parties
without giving them these instructions.
Complete
21
Safety
Data on operational use of the fire

extinguisher including fire extinguishing
medium (user data)
The information stated on the fire extinguisher label
concerning operating range, nominal operating pressure,
quantity of fire extinguishing medium and propellant gas
pressure applies to a fully operational fire extinguisher including
fire extinguishing medium.
The label may be located on the fire extinguisher or in the
Driver's information folder.
Operating temperature range refer to instructions on the

(related to fire extinguishing fire extinguisher label
medium):
Nominal operating pressure refer to instructions on the

(continuous pressure fire extinguisher label
extinguisher) at 20°C:
22 Complete
Safety
Smoke detector
IMPORTANT!
The external environment affects the service life of the
smoke detector.
The smoke detector is triggered when it detects smoke

particles.
b337990
Smoke detector
The smoke detector is located above the door on the driver’s

side or in the roof on the driver’s side.
The button flashes at 45 second intervals during normal
operation. In the event of an alarm, an audible signal starts at a
lower sound level and increases after approximately 50 seconds
to a higher sound level.
The smoke detector can react to particles in cigarette smoke
and, to some extent, to dust.
If the alarm goes off for no reason, this may be due to the
smoke detector being dirty. The smoke detector must then be
replaced.
Complete
23
Safety
Check the smoke detector

Check that the smoke detector is working at least once a week
and always after holidays or any other extended period of
absence.
1. Keep the button on the smoke detector pressed for 5-10
seconds.
If the smoke detector is working, the alarm will sound
and the button will flash for as long as the button is
pressed.
After the check, the smoke detector automatically
switches to timer mode.
The smoke detector should always be checked during workshop

maintenance.
Deactivating the smoke detector temporarily

You can temporarily deactivate the smoke detector.
The smoke detector can be deployed by things other than fire
smoke, such as particles in cigarette smoke and, in some cases,
dust. There is therefore a timer function that allows the driver
to disable the smoke detector temporarily.
The timer function can be used when the driver is smoking. It
can also be used when the alarm is sounding in order to
temporarily stop the sound.
1. A quick press of the button will turn the smoke detector
off for 10 minutes.
24 Complete
Safety
The button flashes at 10 second intervals when in timer

mode.
Changing the battery in a smoke detector

When the battery needs to be changed, the button will start
flashing and the smoke detector will bleep at 45-second
intervals. The alarm signal will be triggered approximately one
month before the battery is completely flat. The battery lasts
for 1-2 years depending on the number of alarms and periods of
high temperatures.
The smoke detector takes a 9-volt battery, type 6R61, 6LR61 or
1604 A.
ADR
Scania delivers chassis that are certified according to ADR. The
certification is an approval for the basic vehicle, i.e. that the
chassis or the tractor meets the requirements for ADR vehicles.
Your vehicle is equipped with ADR from the factory according
to international ADR requirements.
The general agent or the dealer will carry out national ADR
modification of the vehicle. For information about national
requirements, contact your Scania importer or relevant
authority in the respective country.
The certificate number for the basic vehicle is displayed on a
special approval plate which can be found next to the vehicle
type plate. The certificate does not include the current
Complete
25
Safety
bodywork, such as a tank, semi-trailer or full trailer, which are

approved after an individual statutory inspection.
ADR modification includes the following:
• Safety switch for battery master switch in the cab.

• Heavy duty electrical system behind the cab.
• Shielding of hot surfaces.
• Auxiliary brake which meets the ADR requirements.
• Auxiliary heater which is ADR adapted.
• Electrical connection for trailer.
• Tachograph which is ADR adapted with a special fuse.
Vehicle adaptations, ADR

Adaptations of electrical sockets for trailers, areas around hot
surfaces and auxiliary brake.
Electrical socket
• ADR equipped vehicles have insulated electrical sockets

for connection to trailer.
Shielding of hot surfaces
• The vehicle is equipped with heat shields above the

exhaust pipes.
• On vehicles with short cabs, the engine is also shielded at
the rear. This is to minimise the risk of the load
contacting hot surfaces.
26 Complete
Safety
Auxiliary brake
• The vehicle auxiliary brake meet applicable retarder

requirements in ADR.
• According to ADR, the maximum road train gross
weight for a specific vehicle can be limited by engine
type, exhaust brake, retarder, gearbox, rear axle gear
ratio and wheel dimension.
Equipment, ADR
ADR vehicles must be equipped with fire fighting equipment,
wheel chocks and lamps with orange lights.
Fire extinguishing equipment
• There must be at least one portable fire extinguisher for

extinguishing e.g. a fire in the engine compartment. In
addition, unless otherwise specified, you must have at
least one portable fire extinguisher for extinguishing a
fire in the load area.
Wheel chocks
• According to international ADR requirements ADR

vehicles must be equipped with at least 1 wheel chock.
Wheel chocks are not supplied as standard from the
factory, but they can be ordered as spare parts.
Lamps with orange light
• There must be 2 lamps with orange light which cannot

cause fire.
Complete
27
Safety
Safety regulations, ADR

Specific rules apply to passengers and smoking in connection
with ADR vehicles.
Passengers are not allowed
• It is prohibited to carry passengers apart from the vehicle

crew.
Smoking is prohibited
• It is prohibited to smoke near the vehicle during loading

and unloading and inside the cab.
28 Complete
Environment
Environment
Roof air deflector
Note!
An incorrectly adjusted roof air deflector has an
exceptionally negative effect on the fuel consumption.
Scania recommends that you contact your Scania workshop
for help with the optimal setting.
Roof air deflector crank

The roof air deflector is adjusted with a crank.
Crank for adjusting roof air

b383958
deflector.
Roof air deflector switch

The roof air deflector is adjusted using a switch.
Complete
29
Environment
b383957
Adjustment of roof air deflector.
Adjustment of roof air deflector

An optimum setting of the roof air deflector is important as it
has a great effect on the fuel consumption.
If a Scania workshop cannot help with the optimum adjustment,
a temporary adjustment of the roof air deflector can be made.
This can e.g. apply to tractors that change semi-trailers several
times a week. A temporary adjustment should only be made in
exceptional cases due to the negative effect on the fuel
consumption,
Rules of thumb for temporary adjustment of the roof air

deflector:
• If possible, get the assistance of an extra person for

simpler adjustments.
• Aim to get the air flowing from the roof air deflector to
flow a little above the front edge of the trailer or
bodywork.
• It is better to set the roof air deflector too high in
relation to the trailer than too low. A roof air deflector
set too low will give a higher fuel consumption than one
set too high.
30 Complete
Environment
1 2
b384295
1. Optimum setting of the roof air deflector.
2. Too high setting of the roof air deflector.
3. Too low setting of the roof air deflector.
Setting roof air deflector

Contact a Scania workshop for roof air deflector adjustment.
The roof air deflector is not a user-serviceable part.
Economical driving
IMPORTANT!
Do not overrev as it increases fuel consumption.
Driving in the red zone can damage the engine.
Complete
31
Environment
IMPORTANT!
Allow the gear to engage and do not declutch. This is to
avoid damaging the gearbox.
Your vehicle affects the environment

Exhaust gases contain e.g. carbon dioxide, nitrogen oxides and
hydrocarbons that affect the environment.
In order to improve fuel economy and reduce exhaust
emissions, Scania is constantly striving to increase engine
efficiency and reduce the air/rolling resistance of vehicles. It is
nevertheless inevitable that your vehicle and your driving will
affect the environment.
• Carbon dioxide emissions contribute to the greenhouse
effect, and are regarded as being the environmental
problem which is most difficult to overcome.
• Nitrogen oxides contribute to the acidification of soil
and water and to eutrophication.
• Hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides help to form ground
level ozone which is harmful to human life, animals and
plants.
Drive economically and reduce

environmental impact
The main factors affecting the fuel consumption are your
driving and the condition of the vehicle.
32 Complete
Environment
The most important aspect of economical driving is a long-

term, permanent fuel saving. The less fuel your vehicle
consumes, the fewer exhaust gases it emits. It is therefore
possible to save money and the environment by reducing fuel
consumption.
Your driving
• Plan ahead when driving so that you avoid large

variations in speed.
• Economical driving with good forward planning and
greater use of the vehicle’s kinetic energy can reduce fuel
consumption by 10%.
• Use the retarder and exhaust brake to save the wheel
brakes.
• A preheated engine is subject to less wear when starting
than a cold engine.
• Run the engine at idling speed for approximately 1
minute after driving before switching off the engine.
Otherwise there is a risk of the turbocharger being
damaged.
Vehicle condition
• A well-serviced engine and fuel system give good

efficiency. In the long run it is always more expensive to
neglect vehicle maintenance than to observe the
recommended service intervals. A vehicle that is well
looked after is always more economical in operation than
one that is neglected and poorly maintained.
Complete
33
Environment
• The vehicle’s service life and fuel economy are improved

if the vehicle is kept in good condition.
• A clean air filter considerably reduces the fuel
consumption.
Tips for economical driving

As driver, you can adapt your driving behaviour to reduce fuel
consumption.
• You achieve highest traction and cheapest operation at
engine speeds of between 1,000 and 1,600 rpm.
• Before changing up, accelerate just enough to keep the
engine speed after gear change at about 1,000 rpm.
• Before changing down, allow the engine speed to drop to
around 1,000 rpm. Avoid changing gear if the engine can
manage anyway.
• Make use of the kinetic energy. Release the accelerator
pedal before a stop or on a downhill slope and roll
forward.
• Drive as smoothly as possible and maintain the vehicle
speed. Increased vehicle speed leads to increased fuel
consumption.
• Avoid unnecessary idling.
For more information on the tachometer, refer to the Menus in

the display section.
34 Complete
Environment
Economy gear ratio

Save fuel by using the correct gear position for economy gear
ratio, overdrive and Opticruise.
If your vehicle has an economy gear ratio, it will have an engine
speed of approximately 1,200 rpm at cruising speed. The low
engine speed means that you save fuel. It may require rather
more gear changes.
If your vehicle is equipped with overdrive, you can drive in 11th
gear at cruising speed with a heavy load, such as on hilly terrain
or when the vehicle is fully laden. You will have better pulling
power and will not need so many gear changes.
If your vehicle is equipped with Opticruise you should drive in
automatic mode to obtain the best fuel economy and driving
comfort.
The effect of tyres on fuel consumption

The tyres must have correct air pressure, be suited to your
driving and to each other on double-mounted wheels.
• Insufficient pressure in the tyres increases the rolling
resistance and therefore also the fuel consumption. In
addition, the tyres rapidly become worn and this also
affects safety when driving. Incorrect tyre pressure can
increase fuel consumption by up to 5%.
• Check the tyre pressure frequently. Do this when the
tyres are cold.
Complete
35
Environment
• Choose the correct tyres to suit your driving. If you use

so-called energy tyres, the fuel consumption is reduced
by 4-6%. An unnecessarily deep tread creates greater
resistance.
• Make sure that the rims and tyres on double-mounted
wheels are the same type and size.
The effect of air resistance on economical

driving
Air resistance is affected by vehicle speed, bodywork and air
deflectors.
• The air resistance is affected by the road speed. If vehicle
speed is doubled, the air resistance increases fourfold. As
the height and width of the vehicle increases, its air
resistance also increases. This also applies if there are
roof racks and other protruding objects on the vehicle.
• By adapting the bodywork and decreasing the height by
0.4 m, you can save approximately 2 litres of fuel per 100
km at a driving speed of 80 km/h.
• Flat surfaces on covers and loads are important.
• The setting of the air deflector is important. An
incorrect setting increases fuel consumption by 4-5%.
36 Complete
Environment
Checking nitrogen oxides
Note!
Driving a vehicle that emits more nitrogen oxides in the
exhaust gases than intended could violate national
legislation. This could also mean that the conditions for
national tax and duty relief will not be met. Comply with
national legislation.
The purpose of check the amount of nitrogen oxides in the

exhaust gases is to ensure that the vehicle does not emit more
nitrogen oxides than intended.
In general, national legislation specifies requirements for
nitrogen oxide emissions as well as what measures must be
taken if permitted limits are exceeded.
The symbol for exceeded nitrogen oxide

levels lights up yellow
Contact a Scania workshop in the event of a fault in the
nitrogen oxide control system or exceeded nitrogen oxide levels.
b374114
Once 50 hours of operating time have elapsed since the warning

was first lit, engine power is limited by 40%. The number of
Complete
37
Environment
hours remaining before engine power is limited is displayed in

the instrument cluster. The limitation is activated once time has
run out and the vehicle has been stopped.
Fault in the nitrogen oxide control system.
The vehicle emits more nitrogen oxides in the exhaust gases

than intended.

b374114
Once 36 hours of operating time have elapsed since the warning

was first lit, engine power is limited by 40%. The number of
hours remaining before engine power is limited is displayed in
the instrument cluster. The limitation is activated the first time
the vehicle is started after the time has run out.
38 Complete
Environment

than intended.

b374114


than intended.

b374114
Complete
39
Environment


than intended.

levels flashes yellow
When the symbol flashes, the control system for nitrogen oxide
is working.
b374114
The symbol flashes yellow.
15 seconds after the starter key has been turned to the drive
position with the engine off, the symbol should flash once every
five seconds. The flashing indicates that the nitrogen oxide
control system is operational. Contact a Scania workshop if the
warning lamp does not flash at this point.
White smoke limiter

The white smoke limiter makes the engine emit cleaner exhaust
gases and maintain the correct operating temperature.
The white smoke limiter can e.g. be used when you want to
heat up the cooling system and cab by idling. When the engine
40 Complete
Environment
has become too hot, the white smoke limiter is automatically

switched off.
Remember that the white smoke limiter increases the exhaust
noise somewhat and therefore should be used with caution at
night.
White smoke limiter settings

The white smoke limiter settings are made in the instrument
cluster. Use the OK button to navigate the display menu. You
can find the selection under Settings. For more information,
refer to the Menus in the display section.
Handling hazardous substances
WARNING!
Refrigerant may only be handled by authorised personnel.
Coolant, engine oil, hydraulic fluid and similar substances are

not to be discharged into the sewage system or on the ground.
Isocyanates
Isocyanates are used, e.g. in some paints, putties, adhesives and
plastic foams.
Inhalation of isocyanates in the form of vapour, dust or aerosol
may cause irritation of mucous membranes with asthmatic
Complete
41
Environment
symptoms from the respiratory passages and produce an

impairment of lung function. Even short exposures may cause
lasting hypersensitivity.
When products containing isocyanates in combined form are
heated, these may be set free. This applies to grinding, welding,
cutting, etc. Therefore, provide for adequate ventilation in the
working area. Use respiratory protective equipment.
42 Complete
Vehicle information instruments

Instrument cluster
The instrument cluster is the part of the control panel that
displays vehicle information to the driver.
2 3 4
1 5
9
6
b364746
7 8
1. Speedometer
2. Direction indicator
3. Display
4. General warning symbols and indication symbols.
5. Tachometer
6. Fuel level gauge
7. Indicator lamps and warning symbols
Complete
43
8. Coolant temperature gauge
9. Display showing reductant level, outdoor temperature and clock.
The instrument cluster is the part of the control panel that

displays vehicle information to the driver.
1 2 3 4 5
6 8
b364745
7
1. Speedometer
2. Direction indicator
3. Display
4. General warning symbols and indication symbols.
5. Tachometer
6. Display that shows odometer and fuel level gauge
7. Indicator lamps and warning symbols
8. Display that shows reductant level, outdoor temperature, clock and coolant
temperature gauge
44 Complete
Display for selectable fields in instrument

cluster
There are 4 selectable fields in the display in the instrument
cluster.
You can add or remove the functions you want to see in each
field.
1 2
1. Field A
2. Field B
3 4 3. Field C
b364925
4. Field D
Selectable field display in instrument cluster

There is 1 selectable field in the display in the instrument
cluster.
You can add or remove the function you want to see in each
field.
Complete
45
b364924
1. Selectable field
Add function display in the instrument

cluster
You can add functions you want to see in each selectable field in
the display.
1. Navigate to the selected function.
2. Click the OK button.
3. Select the field for the display.
Remove function display in the instrument

cluster
Remove the display of functions you do not want to see in each
selectable field in the display.
1. Click the OK button.
46 Complete
2. Select remove field.

3. Select which field is to be removed.
Tachometer
The tachometer in the instrument cluster displays the engine
speed in revolutions per minute, rpm.
The tachometer has 4 fields:
• White, 0-2,000 rpm and 2,200-2,400 rpm.

• Blue, 2,000-2,400 rpm. The engine auxiliary brake is
strongest here.
• Red, over 2,400 rpm. When the engine speed is in the
red zone, there is a risk of damage to the engine.
The instrument cluster symbol lights up red

b388694
The instrument cluster has no contact with the control units

with which it should be communicating.
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
2. Check the fuses.
3. Contact a Scania workshop if the fault persists.
Complete
47
The instrument cluster symbol lights up

yellow
b383384
Fault in the instrument cluster.

The instrument cluster symbol lights up red

b383384
Symbol lights up red.
Fault in the instrument cluster.

Menus in the instrument cluster

display
Navigating in the instrument cluster

Use the switches on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to
navigate through the instrument cluster menus.
48 Complete
1. Menu navigation
3 1
2. OK button
4 3. Back button
2
b364744
4. Quick selection
Main menus in the instrument cluster

There are 5 main menus in the instrument cluster.
b364743
• Vehicle information
• Trip information
• Instantaneous data
• Media
• Settings
Vehicle information
You will find the following headings in the Vehicle information
menu in the instrument cluster.
b364742
Complete
49
• Differential locks
• Level adjustment
• Load display
• Tyre pressure
Trip information
You will find the following headings in the Trip information
b363515
• Cruise control
• Trip meter
• Fuel average
• Fuel overview
• Running hours
• Driving score
• Drive and rest times
Instantaneous data
You will find the following headings in the Instantaneous data
50 Complete
b364740
• Brake and oil pressure

• Fuel level
• Fuel consumption
• Oil temperature
• Battery voltage
Media
You will find the following headings in the Media menu in the
instrument cluster.
b364739
Under the media menu you can find information about the
following:
• Media information
• Phone status
• Contacts
• Navigation
Complete
51
Settings
You will find the following headings in the Settings menu in the
instrument cluster.
b364738
• Start-up check
• Functions
• Auxiliary heater
• Auxiliary trip meter
• Vehicle
• Display
• Information.
• Language
− To make it easy to change language, the language

selection always appears last in the Settings menu.
The easiest way to navigate to the language
selection is to click to the Settings menu and then go
one step up when you enter the menu. This will
take you directly to the Language menu option.
52 Complete
Change language in the display

To make it easy to change language in the display, the language
selection always appears last in the Settings menu.
The easiest way to navigate to the language selection is to click
to the Settings menu and then go one step up when you enter
the menu. This will take you directly to the Language menu
option.
Indicator lamps and symbols

The red or yellow warning lamp lights up if there is a fault on
the vehicle. Texts and symbols in the display or indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster indicate the fault that has occurred.
A red warning is displayed. The warning lights up red

b374039
even when it has been acknowledged.
A yellow warning is displayed. The warning lights up

b374038
yellow even when it has been acknowledged.
Read what the information means in the relevant section of the

Driver's Manual. Some symbols are displayed along with an
acoustic signal. The acoustic signal only sounds when the
engine is running.
Complete
53
Information levels for indicator lamps and

symbols
The information in the instrument cluster is displayed in 3
levels.
Red
• Red means a risk of serious injuries or death, or damage

to the vehicle or other property. You must take
appropriate action immediately.
Yellow
• Yellow means that something on the vehicle is in a state

which risks damaging the vehicle. Rectify the fault as
quickly as possible. Yellow information can also mean
that an active function requires extra attention.
White, blue, red
• White, blue and green show information from a function

that is operating normally.
Symbols that are not chapter specific
The symbol for maintenance lights up white

b374113
Symbol lights up white.
Maintenance should be carried out.
54 Complete
The symbol for the coordinator lights up

yellow
b200353
Symbol lights up yellow.
Coordinator fault or a fault affecting the coordinator.

2. Check the fuses.
The symbol for the coordinator lights up red

b200353
The coordinator has not been programmed.

1. Stop the vehicle.
The symbol for speed limit lights up white

b216152
Complete
55
Vehicle speed is limited.

There may be a counter associated with the symbol. The
counter indicates how much time remains until speed limitation
is activated.
The symbol for engine power lights up

yellow
b374140
Engine power is limited.

There may be a counter associated with the symbol. The
counter indicates how much time remains until power
limitation is activated.
1. Normally with heavy driving. If repeated or if the
warning is displayed with normal driving, contact a
Scania workshop for troubleshooting.
The symbol for engine fault lights up yellow

The symbol may be displayed due to three reasons.
b200352
• Engine fault
56 Complete
• The battery master switch was switched off too soon last
time it was used
• The battery master switch was switched off before
voltage 10 times in a row.
1. For more information, refer to the Battery master switch
section.
The symbol for engine fault lights up red

b200352
Serious engine fault.

The symbol for overheated starter motor

lights up yellow
b213330
The starter motor has overheated.
Complete
57
1. The starter motor must rest for at least 5 minutes before

the next attempt to start it.
For more information, refer to the section Jump starting.
The symbol for high exhaust gas

temperature lights up yellow
b374151
High exhaust gas temperature.
The symbol for steering circuit lights up

yellow
b374094
Fault in steering circuits 1 and 2, both flow and pressure.

58 Complete
The symbol for steering circuit 1 lights up

yellow
b200354
Fault in steering circuit 1. Steering circuit 2 is activated

automatically.
The symbol for steering circuit 2 lights up

yellow
b200355
Fault in steering circuit 2.

Bodywork symbols
Symbols for bodywork light up red

Description of the symbols.
Complete
59
Towing unit unlocked
b209611
Bodywork unlocked
b209610
Fifth wheel unlocked

b209612
Crane extended
b209613
Supporting legs unlocked

b209614
The platform is not in the normal

position.
b373609
Tail lift lowered

b213676
60 Complete
Symbols for bodywork light up yellow

Bodywork warning
b209617
Truck tipper body raised

b373609
Trailer tipper body raised

b209621
Underrun protection raised

b373607
Underrun protection lowered

b373606
Truck tailboard spreader open

b373628
Trailer tailboard spreader open

b209625
Complete
61
Box body open/unlocked
b373627
Box body raised

b373626
Overload
b209628
Maximum trailer angle

b209629
Sensor error, foot plate

b209630
Demountable body unlocked

b373625
Platform cover open

b373621
62 Complete
Bodywork temperature outside

threshold values
b213681
Trailer steered tag axle locked

b213682
Trailer tag axle raised

b213683
Symbols for bodywork light up white

Bogie drive roller active

b209632
Plough floating
b373624
Sand spreader active

b209634
Complete
63
Sand spreader active
b209635
Towing unit locked

b209636
Platform locked
b373623
Bodywork locked
b209638
Fifth wheel locked

b374144
Winch active
b209640
Bodywork filled
b373620
Mixer unit active

b373619
64 Complete
Functions can be controlled from the

outside of the vehicle
b374143
Working lamp active

b373658
Message received
b213687
Symbols for bodywork light up red, yellow,

green or blue
Description of the symbols. The colour of the symbol depends
on the vehicle specification.
Rotating beacon
b387939
Horizontal fifth wheel adjustment

b387940
Vertical fifth wheel adjustment

b387948
Complete
65
Spotlight
b387941
Work light, left-hand

b387942
Work light, right-hand

b387935
Flashing lights
b387936
Reversing lights
b387937
Level adjustment
b387938
Plough locked
b387933
66 Complete
Sand heating
b387934
Snow chains
b387952
Box lighting
b387947
Speed limitation
b387949
Door open
b202937
Distance to empty and remaining

engine running time
This function shows distance to empty and remaining engine
running time until fuel and reductant are exhausted.
The distance and time are calculated based on historic
consumption, current consumption, vehicle speed and how
heavily the vehicle is loaded.
Complete
67
70 % 1. Time remaining until fuel and

12:35 h 1234 km 2 reductant are exhausted.
1
100 % 2. Driving distance remaining
12:35 h 1234 km until fuel and reductant are
b397937
exhausted.
This function shows distance to empty and remaining engine

running time until fuel and reductant are exhausted.
The distance and time are calculated based on historic
consumption, current consumption, vehicle speed and how
heavily the vehicle is loaded.
1. Time remaining until fuel and
12:35 h 1234 km reductant are exhausted.
1 2
2. Driving distance remaining
12:35 h 1234 km until fuel and reductant are
b400026
exhausted.
Tachograph
Note!
The fuse for the alarm and tachograph is located in the
battery box.
The tachograph records operational data for a maximum of 24

hours on each tacho chart.
The tachograph records driving time and stationary time. This
tachograph is a one-day tachograph. You should therefore
68 Complete
change the tacho chart every day, which can only be done with
the vehicle stationary and the voltage on.
This tachograph records operational data for a maximum of
seven days on each tacho chart.
This tachograph records driving time and stationary time. This
is a seven-day tachograph. You should therefore change the
tacho chart every week, which can only be done with the vehicle
stationary and the power on.
Tachograph control panel

Use the buttons on the tachograph control panel to manage the
tachograph and its display.
1 2 3 4
b392184
1. Open the cover.
2. Display.
3. Switch between hours and minutes to set the time or scroll between fault
messages.
Complete
69
4. Set the time and show the error messages.
5. Tachograph cover.
1. Time
1 2
2. Vehicle speed
3. Driving time recorded shown

while driving.
6 5 4 3
4. Tacho chart in tachograph.
5. Fault indication.
b392183
6. Total distance driven.
Tachograph control panel

Use the buttons on the tachograph control panel to manage the
tachograph and its display.
1 2 3 4
b409319
5
1. Open the cover.
2. Display.
70 Complete
3. Switch between hours and minutes to set the time or scroll between fault
messages.
4. Set the time and show the error messages.
5. Tachograph cover.
1 2 1. Date.
2. Time.
3. Driving time recorded shown

while driving.
4. Tacho chart in tachograph.

6 5 4 3
5. Fault indication.
b209427
6. Total distance driven.
Checking the tacho chart

For the tachograph to work correctly, the correct type of tacho
chart must be used.
1 2
Serial no: 1004758
TO
Current?
Nagot som jag inte ser? xxx/xx
00021F
IP: 138.315 James?

Serie:107 Docka?
A 000
125 km/h
Ingen aning? 5 00 33
004.001M
4 Check that the information at 1

b209453
and 2 matches 3 or 4.
1. Check the information at 1 and 2.
Complete
71
You can view the information at 1 and 2 by opening the

hatch and carefully folding it down.
2. Compare the information with figures 3 and 4 on the
tacho chart.
The information at 1 and 2 should match the
information at 3 or 4.
Contact a Scania workshop if you have any questions about

what type of tacho chart you should use in this tachograph.
Changing the tacho chart

Before starting a shift, a new tacho chart should be inserted into
the tachograph.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary and that the power
is on.
2. Fill in the following information on a new tacho chart.
− Name of driver 1 and 2.
− The post town where the shift starts.
− Today's date.
− The vehicle's registration number.
− Distance driven.
3. Check and if necessary set the time.
4. Open the box cover, insert the tacho chart and close the
cover.
5. Check the symbols in the display
72 Complete
Removing the tacho chart

After finishing a shift, the tacho chart must be removed from
the tachograph.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary and that the power
is on.
2. Open the cover and remove the tacho chart.
3. Close the hatch.
4. Check the recorded driving time and stationary time.
5. Enter the total and day's distance driven.
Setting the time on the tachograph

You can only set the time on the tachograph when the vehicle is
stationary.
1. Press M.
2. Press plus or minus.
The minute digits start to flash and you can set the
minutes.
3. Set the hours by pressing M.
The date is automatically changed if midnight is passed.
4. Confirm the setting by keeping M depressed for more
than 2 seconds.
Complete
73
The main menu is then displayed again.
The time setting for the tacho chart holder is automatically

updated if the box is empty. If you have set the clock with the
tacho chart inserted, you must remove the tacho chart and close
the box. The time is updated automatically. You can then re-
insert the tacho chart.
Displaying fault codes on the tachograph

Fault indications are automatically shown on the tachograph
display, but the fault codes must be retrieved via the tachograph
control panel.
Fault codes can only be read when the vehicle is stationary.
1. Press the M button twice to show the fault codes.
2. Press the plus and minus buttons to navigate through
different fault codes.
Some fault codes are explained in the Driver’s Manual, while

the rest are explained in the manufacturer’s manual.
Fault code 9053 on the tachograph

When the tachograph symbol lights up in yellow in the
instrument cluster, there is a fault in the tachograph and a fault
code has been generated.
74 Complete
b201938
The time will flash on the tachograph display and fault code
9053 has been generated on the tachograph.
The time has been changed with the tacho chart in the
tachograph.
1. Remove the tacho chart and close the cover.
2. Open the cover, replace the tacho chart and close the
cover.

b201938
The fault symbol is lit on the tachograph display and fault code
Faulty tachograph.
1. Open and close the cover once.
Complete
75

b201938
The time will flash on the tachograph display and fault code
Fault in the time or fault in the tachograph.
1. Reset the time.
2. Also check that the tacho chart has been inserted
correctly and that it is not damaged.
Fault code A050 on the tachograph

b201938
76 Complete
The tacho chart symbol has turned off on the tachograph

display and fault code A050 has been generated on the
tachograph.
No tacho chart in the tachograph.
1. Stop the vehicle and insert a tacho chart.
Tachograph
Note!
Do not place any material objects containing metal, plastic
reinforced with glass fibre or plastic reinforced with carbon
fibre on the instrument panel. This can block the
transmission from the radio transmitter connected to the
tachograph. If this happens, the police may be unable to
read the tachograph data from the edge of the road and
may in such a case need to stop the vehicle to read
tachograph data manually.
For the tachograph in this vehicle, refer to the manufacturer’s

manual.
Complete
77
The tachograph manual applies to the tachograph in the vehicle

upon delivery. The manual can be ordered from Scania as a
spare part.
If the tachograph has been renewed, refer to the manual
supplied by the manufacturer.
For the tachograph in this vehicle, refer to the manufacturer’s
quick guide.
The tachograph quick guide applies to the tachograph present
in the vehicle upon delivery. The tachograph quick guide can be
ordered from Scania as a spare part. In the tachograph quick
guide, there is a code that links to an electronic version of the
manual.
Tachograph Remote Download

The vehicle can be connected to Scania's service for the remote
download of tachograph data.
The service transfers data wirelessly from the tachograph and
driver card to a remote server. Tachograph and driver card data
is transferred automatically. Driver card data can also be
transferred manually by pressing the switch for downloading
data from the driver card.
Contact the vehicle owner for more information about the
download service.
78 Complete
Manually downloading driver card data

Driver card data can be downloaded manually by pressing the
switch for downloading data from the driver card.
b365938
Downloading data from the driver card.
The download can be performed while the vehicle is stationary

or moving. The power must be switched on when the download
is started.
The download of driver card data will be completed even if the
power is cut off with the starter key during the download. If the
power is cut off with the battery master switch, the driver card
data download is cancelled.
1. Insert the driver card into tachograph card slot 1 and let
it remain there while downloading.
2. Press the switch for downloading data from the driver
card.
The download takes approx. 10 minutes.
The LED on the switch will be lit during the download
and will switch off when it is finished.
Complete
79
Remote driver card data download not

working
The switch for downloading data from the driver card is
flashing.
b365938
The switch is flashing.
No driver card.
1. Press the switch once as acknowledgement so the LED
stops flashing.
2. Insert the driver card into tachograph card slot 1 and try
again.

working
The switch for downloading data from the driver card light up
and then flashes after a few minutes.
The switch is lit and then starts flashing after a few

b365938
minutes.
80 Complete
Problem with the company card.

stops flashing.
2. Try again.
3. Contact the vehicle owner if the download fails again.

working
The switch for downloading data from the driver card has been
lit for over 30 minutes.
b365938
The switch is lit for over 30 minutes.
No mobile coverage.
switches off.
2. Move the vehicle and try again.
ID button
The ID button identifies the vehicle’s driver.
Complete
81
3
1. LED-lamp
2. Reader
b362492
3. ID button
If the vehicle is equipped with both a tachograph and ID

button, the tachograph has priority.
Identifying the vehicle’s driver with the ID

button
Identify the vehicle’s driver with the ID button in order to
register preselected information, e.g. service hours.
b404917
ID button.
1. Place the ID button against the reader.
82 Complete
The ID button is magnetic and can be left on the reader

throughout the work shift.
The reader is equipped with an LED lamp which signals
the status of the identification. When the LED-lamp
lights with a constant light, the driver has been
identified.
Status of identification with ID button

The LED lamp signals which status the identification has.
The following statuses are possible:
• Driver unknown: The LED lamp does not come on.

• Identifying: The LED lamp flashes.
• Driver identified: The LED-lamp is constantly on.
The vehicle can be driven/operated regardless of the status.
IVD
IVD is operational testing of the vehicle’s electric control
systems where the result is shown as fault codes in the
instrument cluster.
Navigate the instrument cluster display via Settings >
Information > Diagnosis/IVD.
Complete
83
Under Diagnosis/IVDthere are two submenus, ECU system and

Self-test display.
The vehicle’s internal time data, which is set at the factory, is
used in the IVD. The clock in the tachograph will control the
clock in the instrument cluster and also the time indication in
IVD.
ECU system for IVD

In the instrument cluster you can see information and fault
codes for the different ECU systems with which the vehicle is
fitted and which are supported by IVD.
1. Navigate to Diagnosis/IVD in the instrument cluster.
2. Select which ECU system will be inspected.
3. There are two options for each ECU system in the
submenu.
− Information.
− Fault codes
Information.
ACS Information 1. The part number of the control

1 unit in question.
Part: 2222222
2. The part number of hardware
2 Hardware: 3333333 in the control unit in question.
Software: 4444444 3. The part number of software
3
b364709
in the control unit in question.
84 Complete
Fault codes
Fault codes 1. Fault code

1
Fault code: 222222222 2. Number
2
Number: 33333
Active Yes 3. If the fault code is active
3
Last detected: 4. The first and latest time the
4 2016-09-01 22:22 PM
fault code occurred or only the
latest time the fault code
occurred, depending on the
b364710
vehicle’s specification
Self-test display
Check that indicator lamps and other information is displayed
correctly in the instrument cluster.
1. Navigate to Diagnosis/IVD in the instrument cluster.
2. Select Self-test display.
The self-test display checks:
− Gauges
− Indicator lamps
− Sound
− Centre display
− Side displays.
Complete
85
Tyre pressure monitoring
IMPORTANT!
Tyre pressure monitoring does not replace daily checks.
Manual checking of the tyres should be carried out daily
even on vehicles equipped with tyre pressure monitoring.
IMPORTANT!
Warnings are displayed based the reference value that has
been set. You can change the reference value for each axle
and adjust the values to the vehicle usage.
IMPORTANT!
The pressure sensors are fitted on the rims and the control
unit which is fitted on the frame must not be coated with
paint. Paint can interfere with the wireless communication.
Tyre pressure monitoring is a function that monitors that the

vehicle tyres have the correct air pressure. The information is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
The function warns the driver if the tyre pressure deviates from
the set reference value. This makes it easier to maintain a
constant optimum rolling resistance, which provides better
86 Complete
operating efficiency and reduced tyre wear. It helps to avoid

accidents and damage to bodywork, and also contributes to
major fuel savings. Tyre pressure monitoring only monitors the
tyre pressure and cannot affect the actual air pressure in the
tyres.
If the trailer is fitted with tyre pressure monitoring, the tyre
pressure of the trailer’s tyres is also monitored.
The symbol for incorrect tyre pressure lights

up white
b374112
The air pressure in the tyre is too low.

1. Inflate the tyre.
Insufficient tyre pressure will adversely affect tyre wear
and fuel economy.
The symbol for incorrect tyre pressure lights

up yellow
There are three reasons why the symbol for incorrect tyre
pressure may light up yellow.
b374112
Complete
87
The relevant tyres light up in yellow in the instrument cluster if

the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
The air pressure in the tyre is extremely low.
2. Inflate the tyre.
Low tyre pressure can lead to overheating and tyre
blowout.
Low tyre pressure leads to increased fuel consumption
and increased tyre wear. Low tyre pressure may also
damage the tyre carcass.
The tyre air pressure is significantly higher than the reference

value.
2. Let air out of the tyre.
High tyre pressure affects road-holding ability which
increases tyre wear and the sensitivity to uneven road
surfaces.
Leakage of air over a longer period.
8.0 8.0 !5.0
8.0 8.0
8.0 !7.2
Tyres with air leaks are marked

8.0 5.0 8.0
b380394
with an exclamation mark (!).
88 Complete

Low tyre pressure can lead to tyre blowout.
Displaying tyre pressure

You can show the tyre pressure for all of the vehicle’s tyres in
the instrument cluster.
You can also see the tyre pressure for the trailer’s tyres if the
trailer is fitted with tyre pressure monitoring.
Use the OK button to navigate the display menu.
1. Select Vehicle information.
2. Scroll to tyre pressure with the down arrow.
The tyre pressure is indicated in bar.
8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
Tyre pressure is shown for all tyres

8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
b381905
on the vehicle.
Complete
89
8.1 8.1
1 8.1 8.1
8.1 8.1
Tyre pressure is shown for the

8.1 8.1
b380391
trailer’s tyres.
b380393
A dash is shown by tyres.
A dash is shown by tyres:
− when the signal has previously been received from

the tyre’s pressure sensor but the contact was
interrupted.
− when no signal has been received from the tyre

pressure sensor since the power was last switched
on with the battery master switch.
When the vehicle is stationary, it is possible that the signals

from some tyres are not reaching the control unit.
Communication works best when the vehicle is moving and the
wheels are rotating. If the battery master switch has been
switched off, or if the power was disconnected for some other
reason, it may take up to 20 minutes before all air pressures are
displayed again.
90 Complete
Setting the reference pressure for tyre

pressure monitoring
You can set the reference pressure for the pairs of wheels on
each axle.
For information about the recommended tyre pressure, see the
Tyre pressure section.
The setting can only be changed when the vehicle is stationary.
Use the OK button to navigate in the menu.
1. Select Settings > Vehicle.
2. Select TPM reference pressure and press the OK button.
3. Press the up arrow or down arrow to change the
reference pressure.
Setting starts with the front axle.
− Press the right-hand or left-hand arrow to select
the next axle.
4. Exit.
− Press the OK button to save the changes.
− Press the Back button to end without saving.

After changing the reference pressure, it may take 5-10
seconds before the new reference pressure appears.
Complete
91
Driving time and rest time support
Note!
The system is a support function and should only be seen as
giving advice. Always adhere to applicable legislation
regarding driving and rest times in the country you are
currently in.
Driving time and rest time support exists to make it easier for
the driver to keep track of breaks and rest during a driving trip.
Driving time and rest time support is simple to use and displays
time data on the instrument cluster display during driving.
The following views may be shown in the instrument cluster:
• Overviews.
• Remaining time and upcoming activity whilst driving.
• Remaining time and upcoming activity whilst resting.
The following symbols are shown in the views depending on

what type of rest or driving trip is in progress or coming up.
92 Complete
1. Break
1 2 3 4
2. Daily rest period
3. Weekly rest period

5 6 7 4. Driving trip
5. Day trip
6. Week trip
7. No remaining driving time for

the current week or 2-week
b387487
period.
Driver activity
The view in driving time and rest time support that shows the
current and next driver activity.
The current activity is always shown at the top.
1 02:47
2 1. Current driver activity

07:34 09:00
b397258
2. Coming driver activity
Driving times
The view in driving time and rest time support that shows the
time remaining until the next activity.
The value shows remaining time.
Complete
93
1
04:13
1. Remaining driving time.
2
08:43 2. Times over a day.
4 3. Times over a week.

3
39:36 4. Indication of extended driving
b397257
time
If the driver drives for a longer period than usual within a day,
an extended driving time indication is used. There are two
opportunities for extended driving time within a week.
Rest times
Various views in driving time and rest time support that show
information about break times.
While driving, the view displays the next break and subsequent
break.
94 Complete
View while driving
1. Up-coming break.
1 2 3
17:22 00:45 2. Time for up-coming break.
3. Length of up-coming break.

5 6
4. Subsequent break.
4
20:34 00:45 5. Indication of reduced daily
rest period.
6. Indication of reduced weekly

b397253
rest period.
If the driver starts a driving trip before the total rest time is
over, a reduced daily rest period indication will be used. There
are three opportunities for a reduced daily rest period within a
week.
A break of 45 minutes can be divided into two breaks. One
break of 15 minutes and one later break of 30 minutes. A
divided break will always give a second break of at least 30
minutes. Regardless of whether the first break was longer than
15 minutes.
During the break, the view displays the ongoing break and
subsequent break.
Complete
95
1 2
00:36 1. Ongoing break.
45 min
2. Remaining time.
3. Subsequent break.
3
20:35 09:00 4. Time for next break.
b397256
4 5
5. Length of subsequent break.
1
00:00 1. Confirmation that rest has
b397254
been completed.
Driving time and rest time support warnings

An orange warning symbol is displayed when the driver has
exceeded the driving time.
1
00:00
03:06
39:36 1. The warning symbol will light

b397255
up in orange.
The driving time has been exceeded.

1. Stop the vehicle at a suitable place and take a break.
96 Complete
Hour counter
The vehicle is equipped with an hour counter which makes it
possible to monitor the operating time.
b371928
Hour counter.
The hour counter is located inside the driver’s door on the side
of the instrument panel.
Complete
97
Driver environment
Driver environment
Steering wheel
WARNING!
Adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and
check that the settings are locked before you drive off.
WARNING!
The steering wheel may only be turned to the parking
position when the vehicle is parked.
The horn and switches for various functions are fitted to the
steering wheel.
The illustration above shows all switches available on the
steering wheel.
98 Complete
Driver environment
2 3
1 4
5
6
7
10 9 8
b362861
1. Radio: Change track, station, volume.
2. Radio: Selection of audio source.
3. Radio: Lower volume, voice control
4. Instrument cluster: Menu navigation
5. Instrument cluster: OK button
6. Instrument cluster: Back button
7. Instrument cluster: Quick selection
Complete
99
Driver environment
8. Downhill speed control
9. Adaptive cruise control
10. Cruise control
Press the middle of the steering wheel to activate the horn.

For more information on a switch, see the section for each
function.
Set the steering wheel position

The steering wheel is adjustable for height and rake so that a
comfortable driving posture can be obtained.
1
2
1. Open position
b363208
2. Locked position
Adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and

check that the settings are locked before you drive off.
1. Press the button to the open position in order to set the
height and angle of the steering wheel.
You will have a few seconds to adjust the steering wheel
position.
100 Complete
Driver environment
2. Push the button into the locked position to lock the

setting.
The settings also lock automatically after a few seconds.
• On vehicles with an adjustable steering column, the
steering wheel can be angled in the parking position so
that it is parallel with the cab floor.
The steering wheel may only be turned to the parking
position when the vehicle is parked.
Windscreen wipers, windscreen

washers and headlamp washers
1. Windscreen wipers,
windscreen washers and
headlamp washers: press the
end of the lever.
2. Windscreen wipers or rain

sensor: turn the ring to select
function.
1
2 3 3. Windscreen wipers or rain
sensor: turn the ring to select
the intermittent wiper speed
b409851
or rain sensor sensitivity.
Starting and adjusting the windscreen wiper,

windscreen washer and headlamp washer
Use the direction indicator and wiper lever to start and adjust
the windscreen wiper, windscreen washer and headlamp washer.
Complete
101
Driver environment
Perform the following to start the windscreen wiper or

windscreen washer and headlamp washer:
• Lightly push the end of the lever to start a sweep of the
windscreen wipers.
• Push more firmly on the end of the lever to start
washing the windscreen and headlamps.
Proceed as follows to adjust the windscreen wiper:

• Twist the left-hand ring to adjust the windscreen wiper
function:
− Dashed line: intervals or rain sensor
− Single line: slow speed
− Double lines: high speed.

• Twist the right-hand ring to adjust the windscreen wiper
speed.
Upwards gives a higher speed.
Activating and adjusting the rain sensor

Some of the positions of the direction indicator and wiper lever
can be used for the rain sensor.
Activation and deactivation of the rain sensor is done in the
instrument cluster. Use the OK button to navigate the display
menu. You can find the selections under Settings > Functions >
Rain sensor. For more information, refer to the Menus in the
display section. When deactivating the rain sensor, the
intermittent wiper function is activated.
102 Complete
Driver environment
• Start the rain sensor by turning the left-hand ring to the

dashed line.
• Change rain sensor sensitivity by turning the right-hand
ring to the desired position.
Adjusting the collapsible gear lever in

the cab
Adjust the collapsible gear lever in the cab

The collapsible gear lever position can be adjusted for optimum
adaptation to the driver.
1 2
1. M6 lock nut
b206721
2. Pivot screw
To adjust the gear lever:

1. Undo the gear lever boot and lift it upwards.
2. Undo the M6 lock nut.
Complete
103
Driver environment
3. Turn the pivot screw 0-180° to adjust the gear lever

knob.
Beyond 180°, the knob will move back to its original
position.
4. Tighten the M6 lock nut at the correctly adjusted
position.
5. Press on the gear lever boot.
Ergonomics
Frequently adjusting the sitting position and using the seat
settings is essential to prevent stress injuries to the back and
neck.
Tips for an ergonomic seat position

10 tips on how to use the seat settings in order to achieve an
ergonomic seat position.
Change the settings frequently and adjust the seat to the best
position for the traffic situation.
Keep both feet on the floor while adjusting the seat.
104 Complete
Driver environment
1
10
6
8
4 7
2
b362862
3 10 possible seat adjustments.
1. Sit as close to the backrest as possible.

2. Set the damping in the seat so that it is suitable for your
weight.
3. Set the position of the seat horizontally and vertically so
that you have good visibility and can operate both the
steering wheel and the pedals comfortably. Check the
lengthwise position of the seat squab.
You should be able to get two or three fingers between
the seat squab and the back of the knees.
4. Adjust the inclination of the seat squab so that the
pressure under the thighs is even.
The angle between the seat squab and backrest should be
greater than 90 degrees.
Complete
105
Driver environment
5. Push the backrest back slightly so you can grip the

steering wheel comfortably with slightly bent arms and
your back against the backrest.
6. Set the steering wheel so that you can work with your
arms close to the body and with your shoulders relaxed.
On long journeys, consider positioning your hands lower
down on the steering wheel so that it is easier to relax
the shoulders.
7. Adjust the lumbar support so that your seating position
is not cramped.
It is essential the lumbar support is adjusted correctly.
8. Adjust the side supports close to the upper body to
guarantee a good and stable support.
9. Set the head restraint so that you can easily lean
backwards and rest your neck.
10. Set the armrests so that they provide support for the
arms and elbows without limiting their free movement.
They should help to take the strain off the neck and
shoulders.
Fixed seat
Overview of settings available on the fixed seat.
106 Complete
Driver environment
b209874
1 2 3
1. Adjusting the rake of the whole seat
2. Adjusting height
3. Adjust the backrest rake
4. Adjusting the longitudinal position of the seat
The seat may also be fitted with the following:
• Seat heating
• Safety belt warning
Seat, Basic
This is where you can adjust the seat to achieve a better sitting
position.
Complete
107
Driver environment
b209876
1 2 3
1. Adjusting height
2. Quick lowering
• Seat heating
• Seat release control
Seat, medium
position.
108 Complete
Driver environment
7 8
10
b209348
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Seat heating
2. Shock absorber
4. Adjusting height
5. Quick lowering
7. Lower lumbar support
8. Upper lumbar support
9. Adjusting the seat cushion lengthwise
Complete
109
Driver environment
• Armrest
• Belt pretensioner
Seat, premium
position.
2
13
12
b333975
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
2. Adjusting the angle of the upper backrest section
3. Backrest side support
4. Upper lumbar support
5. Lower lumbar support
6. Adjusting height
7. Shock absorber
8. Seat heating
110 Complete
Driver environment
9. Seat ventilation
11. Rapid evacuation of height control
13. Adjusting the seat cushion lengthwise

• Armrest
• Belt pretensioner
Folding seat
This is where you can adjust the folding seat.
1. Backrest angle
1 2. Lengthwise adjustment of
b200517
2
whole seat
Complete
111
Driver environment
Corresponding controls can be found on the inside of the seat.

The folding seat backrest can be folded down so the folding seat
forms a table. The head restraint can be adjusted manually. The
folding seat cushion can be folded up.
The folding seat can also have these functions:
• Seat heating
• Armrest
Reclining seat
Adjust the reclining seat

Do the following to adjust the reclining seat.
1. Lift the cushion up against the

1 backrest until it stops in order
to be able to rotate and
change the seat’s longitudinal
position.
2. Adjust the backrest angle.

2
3. Adjust the longitudinal
3 position of the seat.
b380390
4
4. Adjust the seat squab angle.
112 Complete
Driver environment
Seat heating
Note!
Make sure the seat heating in the passenger seat is not
turned on if the seat is not occupied. This may shorten the
service life of the seat heating.
The seat heating has three positions: No heating, 25% heating

or 100% heating.
Seats in the crew area
Adjusting seats in the crew area

The angle of the backrest and head restraint can be adjusted.
b379366
The location of the belts.
• Adjust the backrest angle by pulling one of the straps.

• The head restraint is adjusted manually.
Complete
113
Driver environment
Extendable ladder
Ladder to the upper bed

An extendable ladder is available for the upper bed. This is
located on the underside of the upper bed.
The ladder is made to take a load of up to 140 kg.
During the trip, the ladder must be stored and fastened in place.
Unfolding the ladder to the upper bed

You can unfold the ladder with a couple of simple manoeuvres.
1. Press the button in the casing.
The ladder will release from the underside of the upper
bed.
2. Move the ladder downwards and towards you.
3. Pull out the ladder to its full length.
Fixed bed
Folding the fixed bed away

You can fold up the entire bed in order to e.g. access the storage
compartments under the bed.
114 Complete
Driver environment
b360575
• To fold up: pull the handle outwards and move the bed
up at the same time.
• To fold down: push down the bed until it is in a locked
position.
Cleaning and maintenance of the fixed bed

The mattress cover can be removed and cleaned.
1. Lift the mattress off the bunk.
2. Remove the mattress cover using the zipper.
Follow the washing instructions on the cover.
Upper bed
The upper bed can be folded away. The bed is attached to the
back of the cab and is attached using belts in the ceiling.
Folding the upper bed down

The cab’s upper bed can be folded down when the vehicle is
stationary.
Complete
115
Driver environment
Hold the button in to fold down
b357519
the bed.
1. Press the button on the underside of the long side of the

bed.
2. Continue to hold the button in while the bed is folding.
Release the button when the bed is completely lowered.
Folding the upper bed away

Fold the bed away when it is not in use to free up space in the
cab.
1. Push the bed upwards until it is completely folded up.
Locking takes place automatically.
Removing and cleaning the mattress cover

The mattress cover can be removed and cleaned.
1. Fold the bed up against the wall.
2. Detach the two eyes on the long side of the bed closest
to the rear wall of the cab.
3. Remove the mattress cover using the zipper.
116 Complete
Driver environment
Follow the washing instructions on the cover.
Refrigerator
Note!
The refrigerator has an energy saving function which
means that it switches off automatically at pre-defined
times if the vehicle is switched off for an extended period.
The pre-defined switch-off times vary depending on the
cooling mode selected.
If the refrigerator has switched off automatically due to the
energy saving function, it must be restarted manually by
pressing the switch on the control panel.
1. Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6
2. LED
3. Temperature mode selector
4. Fridge position
5. Temperature indication
b407507
6. Display
The vehicle is fitted with a refrigerator.

The refrigerator temperature can be at most 40°C below the
ambient temperature.
Complete
117
Driver environment
The refrigerator runs on 24 V. The refrigerator’s energy saving

function activates if the system voltage is below 26 V for two
minutes. The display on the refrigerator control panel shows
calculated time to switch-off.
If the refrigerator is not to be used for a longer period of time,
the lid should be slightly open so that the air can circulate.
Starting the refrigerator

1. Press the switch in the control panel to start or switch off
the refrigerator.
The refrigerator’s 3 temperature modes

The refrigerator has 3 temperature modes: Freezer, Fridge and
Chill. The temperature for the different temperature modes is
set automatically.
The refrigerator cooling setting can be adjusted steplessly.
When the refrigerator is switched on, the temperature can be
adjusted using the temperature mode selector. The temperature
can be set between +10°C and 0°C, in increments of 1°C. The
temperature then jumps to -15°C and then returns to +10°C.
When the refrigerator is in the process of adjusting to the set
temperature, the snowflakes on the display will flash. When the
set temperature is achieved, the snowflakes will be illuminated
but not flashing.
118 Complete
Driver environment
Symbol Fridge Explanation

positio
n
Freezer Set Freezer mode (Freezer):

Press the temperature mode
selector repeatedly and select
b393895
the temperature -15°C. When

the Freezer mode is selected, 3
snow flakes are shown in the
display.
The temperature of Freezer

mode is approx. -15°C.
Fridge Set Fridge mode (Fridge):

Press the temperature mode
b393894
selector repeatedly and select a

temperature between 0°C and
7°C. When the Fridge mode is
selected, 2 snow flakes are
shown in the display.
The temperature in Fridge

mode is approx. 0°C to 7°C.
Complete
119
Driver environment
Symbol Fridge Explanation

positio
n
Chill Set Chill mode (Chill): Press

b393893
the temperature mode selector

repeatedly and select a
temperature between 8°C and
10°C. When the Chill mode is
selected, 1 snow flake is shown
in the display.
The temperature in Chill

mode is approx. 8°C to 10°C.
Cleaning the refrigerator

Clean the refrigerator regularly.
1. Switch off the refrigerator and wipe it internally and
externally with a mild soap solution.
2. Wipe the refrigerator dry after cleaning.
Rub the seals on the door with talcum powder once a year.
Error messages for the refrigerator

If a refrigerator fault occurs, the following error messages may
be shown in the refrigerator display or signalled in the case of
an audio signal:
120 Complete
Driver environment
Message in Lamp in the Acoustic Event

the display display signal
The Flashes white - Temperature

temperature above the
indicator limit value
flashes
- Lights up 2 short 1 hour until

white signals shutdown due
to low voltage
in the vehicle
battery
- Lights up 3 short 30 minutes

white signals until
shutdown due
to low voltage
in the vehicle
battery
EL Flashes red 4 short Shutdown

signals due to low
voltage in the
vehicle
battery
CP Flashes red - Shutdown

due to cab
tilting
Complete
121
Driver environment
Message in Lamp in the Acoustic Event

the display display signal
88 (flashes) Flashes red 1 short Hatch open

signal/10 (after 1
minutes minute)
E1 Flashes red 1 long signal Communicati

on error in
the display
E2 Flashes red 1 long signal Fan fault
E3 Flashes red 1 long signal Compressor

blocked
E4 Flashes red 1 long signal Compressor

speed fault
E5 Flashes red 1 long signal Overheated

ECU
E6 Flashes red 1 long signal Temperature

sensor fault
Microwave oven
WARNING!
The microwave oven must not be empty when in use.
122 Complete
Driver environment
WARNING!
Empty the microwave oven before driving away. Do not
drive the vehicle with the microwave oven door open.
Using the microwave oven

This is a summary from the manufacturer’s manual.
• Start the microwave oven by opening the door with the
button at the bottom right.
When the door is open, you will hear repeating acoustic
signals.
• Press the button to set the desired time.
b382199
The maximum time is 30 minutes.

If you set the desired time and start the microwave oven,
it runs at maximum power.
• Press the button to set the desired power.
b382201
There are 3 levels to choose from.
Complete
123
Driver environment
• Press the button to start the microwave oven. Press the

button again to switch off the microwave oven.
b382198
If the door is opened at the same time as a program is

running, the program is interrupted. Close the door and
press the button to start the program again.
Extra functions
Button Explanation
Defrost function
b382203
Save and use a setting. Make the desired

settings and then hold in the button for at
FAV least 2 seconds until a signal is heard to
b382202
save the settings. Press the button once to

use the saved settings.
124 Complete
Driver environment
Button Explanation
Hold in the button for at least 3 seconds

to switch off the microwave oven. Short
presses on the button will display
b382200
technical information about the

microwave oven.
1 press: Fault code.
2 presses: Battery voltage.
3 presses: Temperature of the microwave

oven’s electronics, measured in °C.
Press once again to return to the start

position.
Fault codes in the microwave oven

The fault codes and their cause are shown in the following
table. Contact a Scania workshop for more information.
Fault code Acoustic signal Event
F.01 - Overcurrent
protection triggered
F.02 - Door open
Complete
125
Driver environment
Fault code Acoustic signal Event
F.03 - Fault in the internal

power supply.
F.04 2 signals per Low voltage

second protection triggered
b382197
F.05 2 signals per Surge voltage

second protection triggered
b382197
F.06 - Overheating of the

electrical system
F.07 - Fan fault
F.08 - Antenna fault
F.09 - Internal
communication
error
Coffee maker
For information about the coffee maker, refer to the
manufacturer’s manual.
126 Complete
Driver environment
TV preparation
IMPORTANT!
The maximum load on the wall bracket is 10 kg.
Your vehicle is prepared with a wall bracket for a TV. On the

wall bracket, attach a TV bracket that the TV can be attached
to.
2 1. Wall bracket
2. AUX input
3
b368996
3. 12 volt electrical socket
Your vehicle is prepared with a wall bracket for a TV. On the

wall bracket, attach a TV bracket that the TV can be attached
to.
2 1. Wall bracket
2. AUX input
3
b384245
3. 12 volt electrical socket
Complete
127
Driver environment
Limitations for TV
Installing a TV inside the vehicle is subject to the following
limitations.
The screw holes’ locations in the wall bracket have the
dimensions 75 × 75 mm.
The limitations that apply for the TV are as follows:
• Maximum external dimensions for the TV are

415 × 655 mm.
• The thickness from the back of the TV bracket to the
front of the TV is maximum 60 mm. This also includes
any electrical cables that should be parallel to the back of
the TV. If the thickness is more than 60 mm, the bed
cannot be lowered.
• The TV must be able to be connected to a 12 volt
electrical socket.
Scania recommends TV sets intended for e.g. trucks or caravans

as they often have a built-in antenna amplifier. Make sure the
TV antenna gets a 5 V supply, otherwise it will not work.
Fitting the TV bracket

1. Remove the 4 screws from the wall bracket.
2. Screw the TV bracket in place.
When the TV is fitted, the upper bed should be raised to
facilitate the installation.
128 Complete
Driver environment
− After the installation, check that the bed can be

lowered.
Electrical socket in cab
WARNING!
Incorrect use of electrical sockets and electrical devices may
cause a fire and serious personal injury. Using a fuse of a
rating other than that stated on the electrical socket may
cause a fire and serious personal injury.
IMPORTANT!
If connected equipment becomes hot, immediately switch
off the equipment and disconnect the electric power supply.
Avoid connecting several switches, adapters or extension
cables to the electrical socket.
There are electrical sockets in the cab with a voltage of 12 V

and 24 V for connecting extra equipment.
• Electrical socket 12 V. Maximum load 180 W, 15 A.
• Electrical socket 24 V. Maximum load 360 W, 15 A.
The electrical socket is intended for electrical equipment. The

electrical sockets are located on the instrument panel next to
Complete
129
Driver environment
the hat rack behind the driver’s seat and the passenger seat and
in the storage compartment.
When using the electrical socket, the following applies:
• During simultaneous use of multiple electrical sockets,

the stated maximum load must not be exceeded.
• Only use equipment that is suitable for the electrical
sockets and preferably with built-in fuses.
• Do not connect equipment that could trip while driving.
• Always fit a fuse of the rating specified and of a rating
that is equivalent to the original fuse.
• 230 V. It can be loaded with 350 W.
Electrical socket in cab for cab heater

The cab has an electrical socket with a voltage of 230 V
intended for an electric cab heater.
• 230 V electrical socket. The electrical socket can be
loaded with 2,000 watts. In order to power the electrical
socket, electricity must be connected to the electrical
input behind the cab.
Electricity via USB

There is access to electricity via a USB port in the cab.
130 Complete
Driver environment
Symbol Explanation
The port is intended to charge USB

b394528
devices up to 1.5 A. The port is supplied

with current from the radio and you can
only use it when the radio is switched on.
You can also play music via this port when
music is not played via the AUX port.

b394526

with current from the battery and you can
therefore use it even when the voltage is
switched off by the starter key.
Electricity via USB

Symbol Explanation

b394526

with current from the battery and you can
therefore use it even when the voltage is
switched off by the starter key.
Complete
131
Driver environment
Electricity via USB

Symbol Explanation

b394528

with current from the radio and you can
only use it when the radio is switched on.
You can also play music via this port when
music is not played via the AUX port.
Climate system
Note!
Use of the climate system’s short-stop functions requires
the battery charge status to be good.
The vehicle has no function that prevents any discharge of
the batteries when using e.g. auxiliary cab cooler, auxiliary
heater or other equipment that affects the climate.
The climate system is a system that regulates temperature,

ventilation and air distribution.
The automatic climate system checks and controls the climate
in the cab. The climatic comfort can be regulated with e.g. air
132 Complete
Driver environment
conditioning, auxiliary cab cooler, fan, air distribution, heater,

auxiliary heater, short-stop heater and recirculation depending
on what your vehicle is equipped with.
Scania recommends that the climate system is set to automatic
mode. Personal setting can then be made for temperature.
Climate system control panel

The following settings may appear on the panel, depending on
the vehicle’s specification.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b360120
1. Recirculation
2. Air conditioning
3. Temperature control
4. Air distribution
5. Max defroster
6. Fan
7. Auxiliary heater or short-stop heater
8. Auxiliary cab cooler or short-stop ventilation
Complete
133
Driver environment
Starting and switching off recirculation

Recirculation means that air from the cab is circulated back into
the cab. This reduces the amount of air that is brought into the
cab from outside.
• Press the button once to start automatic recirculation
mode.
The LED next to A will light up. This means that
recirculation is switched on automatically when the air
quality outside the cab is too poor.
• Press the button a second time to start forced
recirculation.
The LED next to ON will light up.
• Press the switch a third time to switch off the
recirculation.
Starting and stopping the air conditioning

The air conditioning regulates the air temperature in the cab.
• Press the button once to start automatic air conditioning
mode.
The LED next to A will light up. This means that the air
conditioning optimises the temperature to achieve the
lowest possible fuel consumption. The air conditioning
is also used to dry the air and prevent fogging on the
windscreen.
• Press the button a second time to start the air
conditioning maximum mode.
134 Complete
Driver environment
The LED next to ON will light up. The max. position is

used e.g. for the need to dry a higher atmospheric
humidity. Note that the maximum position will increase
the fuel consumption. Therefore, do not use the
maximum position unnecessarily.
• Press the button a third time to switch off the air
conditioning.
Starting automatic temperature control

Automatic temperature control adapts to the desired cab
temperature.
• Turn the temperature rotary control until the desired
cab temperature is shown in the display.
• Press the button on the rotary control to start the
climate system’s automatic mode.
Automatic mode means that also the fan, air distribution,
air conditioning and recirculation are automatic.
Adjusting the air distribution in the cab

1. Press the buttons to adjust the air distribution as desired.
The buttons for the selected air distributors light green.
Max defroster
The max defroster removes frost or mist from the windscreen.
1. Press the button once to start the function for removing
frost or mist from the windscreen.
Complete
135
Driver environment
Adjusting the fan

The fan speed can be adjusted.
1. Turn the fan rotary control until the desired fan speed is

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b361439
1. Recirculation
2. Air conditioning
3. Temperature
4. Air distribution
5. Max defroster
6. Fan
7. Auxiliary heater
8. Auxiliary cab cooler or short-stop ventilation
136 Complete
Driver environment
Starting recirculation
cab from outside.
1. Press the button once to start recirculation.
The diode in the switch is lit when the recirculation is
active.
Starting and stopping the air conditioning

The air conditioning regulates the air temperature in the cab.
• Press the button once to start automatic air conditioning
mode.
The LED next to A will light up. This means that the air
conditioning optimises temperature in the cab to achieve
the lowest possible fuel consumption.
• Press the button a second time to start the air
conditioning maximum mode.
The LED next to ON will light up. The max. position is
used e.g. for the need to dry a higher atmospheric
humidity. Note that the maximum position will increase
the fuel consumption. Therefore, do not use the
maximum position unnecessarily.
• Press the button a third time to switch off the air
conditioning.
Complete
137
Driver environment
Starting automatic temperature control

Automatic temperature control adapts to the desired cab
temperature.
• Turn the temperature rotary control until the desired
temperature is shown in the display.
• Press the button on the rotary control to start the
climate system’s automatic mode.
Automatic mode means that also the fan, air distribution
and air conditioning are automatic.
Adjusting the air distribution in the cab

Max defroster
The max defroster removes frost or mist from the windscreen.
1. Press the button once to start the function for removing
frost or mist from the windscreen.
Adjusting the fan

The fan speed can be adjusted.
1. Turn the fan rotary control until the desired fan speed is
138 Complete
Driver environment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
b360119
1. Temperature
2. Auxiliary heater
3. Air conditioning
4. Recirculation
5. Air distribution
6. Defroster
7. Fan
Adjusting the temperature in the cab.

1. Turn the temperature rotary control to the required
temperature.
The setting determines the amount of hot air in the air
vent.
The air temperature can vary depending on the outside

temperature, the vehicle speed and the coolant temperature.
Complete
139
Driver environment
You may therefore need to adjust the setting to maintain your

comfort.
For more information on auxiliary heater functions, see the
Auxiliary heater section.
Starting the air conditioning

1. Press the button once to start the air conditioning.
The LED in the switch is lit when air conditioning is
active.
Starting recirculation
cab from outside.
1. Press the button once to start recirculation.
The diode in the switch is lit when the recirculation is
active.
Adjusting the air distribution

Adjusting the fan

1. Turn the fan rotary control to the required fan speed.
140 Complete
Driver environment
Starting the auxiliary cab cooler

The auxiliary cab cooler is used keep the temperature in the cab
cool while parked.
1. Press the auxiliary cab cooler button once to start the
Eco function.
The function runs the auxiliary cab cooler at a low level
and switches off automatically after eight hours.
2. Press the button a second time to start the Pwr function.
The function runs the auxiliary cab cooler at a high level
and switches off automatically after two hours.
Starting short-stop ventilation

Short-stop ventilation is used to air the cab for short stops or
when sleeping in the cab.
• Press the short-stop ventilation button once to start the
Lo function.
The function means the fan is run at low level and is
switched off automatically after 8 hours. The function is
suitable when e.g. sleeping in the cab.
• Press the button a second time to start the Hi function.
The function means the fan is run at a high level and is
switched off automatically after 2 hours. The function is
suitable for use at, for example, short breaks.
Mist or frost
Proceed as follows to get rid of mist or frost.
Complete
141
Driver environment
• Activate the defroster to guide the air to the windscreen.

• Increase the temperature to heat the air in the cab.
• If required, activate the air conditioning to dry the air.
• Activate recirculation in damp weather.
• Select a high fan speed.
Maximum cooling
Set the desired temperature using the temperature rotary
control.
1. Turn the temperature rotary control one notch past the
minimum position to select Low.
The cab is then cooled using the fan, air distribution and
recirculation.
Maximum heating
Set the desired temperature using the temperature rotary
control.
1. Turn the temperature rotary control one notch past the
highest selectable temperature to select High.
The cab is then heated by guiding out maximum heat
and optimum fan, air distribution and recirculation.
Extra quick heating

The cab is heated by guiding out maximum heat and optimum
fan, air distribution and recirculation.
142 Complete
Driver environment
1. Turn the temperature rotary control 2 notches past the

highest selectable temperature to select High Quick.
High Quick and an engine symbol appear in the display.
The automatic climate system also activates, if necessary, the

exhaust brake, retarder and auxiliary heater to heat the coolant,
if the vehicle is equipped with these functions.
Mist or frost
1. Press the max defroster button to dry and heat the air.
Note that the maximum position will increase the fuel
consumption. Therefore, do not use the maximum
position unnecessarily.
Temperature setting in case of a fault

A number between 0 and 100 is displayed along with the
message Error.
There is a fault in the climate system. 0 means 0% heat and 100
means 100% heat.
1. Contact a Scania workshop for repair if the fault occurs.
You must adjust the heating in 5% increments yourself,
as the climate system cannot regulate the temperature
automatically.
Compressed air horn

The compressed air horn is an electrically controlled horn
powered by compressed air.
Complete
143
Driver environment
b361449
Switch for air horn.
The air horn sounds together with the ordinary horn when the
switch is activated.
Sound level control for reverse alarm

b361444
Switch for reverse alarm sound level adjustment.
Decreasing the sound level for the reverse

alarm
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the sound
level for the reverse alarm.
The selection on the switch will light up.
Resetting the sound level for the reverse

alarm
• Reset the sound level by pressing the top of the switch.
144 Complete
Driver environment
The sound level is also automatically reset when you

switch off the ignition.
Switching off the sound for the reverse

alarm
• Press the bottom of the switch to switch off the sound
for the reverse alarm.
The selection on the switch will then light up.
Resetting the sound for the reverse alarm

• Reset the sound level by pressing the top of the switch.
Mirrors
Adjusting the rear view mirrors

The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or in pairs.
The switches for the rear view mirrors are positioned on the
inside of the doors. Each rear view mirror has a main mirror
and a wide-angle mirror.
1. Joystick for controlling the
2 3 selected rear view mirror
1
2. Left-hand wide-angle mirror
4 5 3. Right-hand wide-angle mirror
4. Left-hand main mirror

b364508
5. Right-hand main mirror
Complete
145
Driver environment
You can adjust one mirror at a time.

1. Press the switch for the mirror you want to adjust.
The switch for the selected mirror lights green.
2. Use the joystick to adjust the position of the mirror.
You can adjust the rear view mirrors in pairs.

1. Press the switches for the mirrors that you want to adjust
in order to adjust them simultaneously.
The switches for the selected mirrors light up green.
− Select the wide-angle mirrors (2) and (3).
− Select the main mirrors (4) and (5).

The mirrors are adjusted according to centre of the
vehicle starting with the mirror on the driver’s side.
− Select the left-hand rear view mirrors (2) and (4).
− Select the right-hand rear view mirrors (3) and (5).

The mirrors are adjusted by turning in the same
direction.
2. Use the joystick to adjust the position of the mirrors.
Adjusting the front view mirror

Use the front view mirror to see material objects or people in
the obstructed field in front of the vehicle.
The switch for the front view mirror is positioned on the inside
of the door.
146 Complete
Driver environment
b364507
Front view mirror.

The selected switch lights up green.
2. Use the joystick to adjust the selected mirror.
Adjusting the close-proximity mirror

Use the close-proximity mirror to get a view below the
passenger door.
The switch for the front view mirror is positioned on the inside
of the door.
b364506
Close-proximity mirror.

2. Use the joystick to adjust the selected mirror.
Adjusting the front view mirror and close-

proximity mirror at the same time
b364507
Front view mirror.
Complete
147
Driver environment
b364506
Close-proximity mirror.
1. Press the switches for the mirrors you want to adjust.

2. Use the joystick to adjust the selected mirrors.
The mirrors are adjusted around a point on the ground.
Rear view mirror heating

The rear view mirrors are equipped with heating in order to
counteract misting and frost.
Activate rear view mirror heating

Use rear view mirror heating to counteract misting and frost.
b364511
Switch for rear view mirror heating.
The switch is located in the door on the driver’s side.

1. Press the switch to activate rear view mirror heating.
The switch lights up yellow.
Activate rear view mirror heating

Use rear view mirror heating to counteract misting and frost.
148 Complete
Driver environment
b364509
Switch for rear view mirror heating.
The switch is located in the door on the driver’s side.

1. Press the switch to activate rear view mirror heating.
The switch lights up yellow.
Settings for rear view mirror heating.

From the vehicle’s instrument cluster, it is possible to set if the
heating of the rear view mirror is to be time-based or activated
continuously.
The option can be found under Settings > Vehicle > Mirror
heating. For more information, refer to the Menus in the display
section.
Window winders
WARNING!
Incorrect use of the window winders can cause serious
personal injury. Do not allow anyone to get in the way of
the windows when they are closing.
Complete
149
Driver environment
Note!
The window winders cannot be used when the power is
switched off with the starter key.
Note!
In the rear seat, the one-touch function can only be used to
wind the windows down.
Note!
The one-touch function can only be used when the
windows are to be wound down.
Note!
The window winder has a safety function that makes it
rewind if e.g. something is blocking the window when
winding up. After 2 failed attempts, the quick-press
function is switched off, but is activated again when the
window has been closed completely. The safety function
can also release if the vehicle is subjected to bumps, e.g.
holes in the road, while winding the window up.
150 Complete
Driver environment
Controlling the window winders

Control the window winders with the switches to raise or lower
the side windows.
b392656
Window winders.
1. Press the switch to control the window winders.
Controlling the window winders

Control the window winders with the switches to raise or lower
the side windows.
b364505
Window winders.
• Lift or press the switch to control the window winders.

Use the one-touch function by lifting or pressing down
the switch 2 steps to activate the automation in the
window winders.
• Lift or press down both switches at the same time to
close or open all windows.
Complete
151
Driver environment
You must lift or press down the switches with the same
number of steps.
When the power is switched off by the starter key, the window
winder can only be used if the door is unlocked.
When the power is switched off by the starter key, the window
winder can only be used if the door is unlocked.
Deactivating the one-touch function for the

window winders
The window winders have a safety function that can turn off the
one-touch function if e.g. something is in the way when raising
them.
Proceed as follows to reactivate the one-touch function:
1. Switch on the power using the starter key.
2. Close all doors and windows.
3. Lift the window winder switch and hold it for 2 seconds.
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift and hold the switch again for 2 seconds.
152 Complete
Driver environment
Electrically heated windscreen
Note!
To reduce the load on the vehicle’s batteries, the function
should be deactivated when not being actively used.
Avoid using an electrically heated windscreen together with
other functions that consume a lot of power, e.g. the cab
heater.
The function can only be activated when the engine is
running.
The electrically heated windscreen is controlled by a switch.

b361121
Electrically heated windscreen switch.
Roof hatch
b383834
Switch for opening and closing the roof hatch.
Complete
153
Driver environment
b361941
Switch for opening and closing the roof hatch.
Open the roof hatch

The roof hatch can be opened fully or gradually.
• Quickly press once on the lower part of the switch.
The roof hatch opens fully.
• Press and hold the lower part of the switch.
The roof hatch opens gradually until the switch is
released.
Close the roof hatch

The roof hatch can be closed fully or gradually.
• Quickly press once on the upper part of the switch.
The roof hatch closes fully.
• Press and hold the upper part of the switch.
The roof hatch closes gradually until the switch is
released.
154 Complete
Driver environment
Roof hatch
The roof hatch can be opened to ventilate the cab or to be used
as an emergency escape route.
Open the roof hatch

The roof hatch is opened manually with a handle.
b363508
The handle of the roof hatch.
1. Pull the handle with a rotating movement downwards,

round and back.
Auxiliary heater
WARNING!
To avoid accidents which can result in injury, it is important
to follow the instructions below when using and
maintaining the auxiliary heater.
Complete
155
Driver environment
IMPORTANT!
The auxiliary heater may stop working if it is not used for
long periods of time. To prevent this from happening, run
the auxiliary heater for about 15 minutes once a month.
Note!
It is best if you switch off the auxiliary heater by using the
button on the climate system’s control panel or by the
remote control.
the batteries when using e.g. auxiliary heater or other
equipment that affects the lighting or climate.
Note!
In the event of low fuel level in the fuel tank, a warning is
displayed in the instrument cluster. When the message
appears, the auxiliary heater cannot be started or switched
off. This is to prevent air in the fuel system.
156 Complete
Driver environment
WARNING!
Only use the emergency stop in the event of danger. There
is a risk of overheating.
The auxiliary heater heats the cab.

It is powered by the vehicle's fuel and heats the coolant in the
vehicle coolant system. Control of the auxiliary heater varies
depending on the vehicle climate system.
The auxiliary heater can heat the cab, the engine or the cab and
engine.
It is powered by the vehicle's fuel and heats the coolant in the
vehicle coolant system. Control of the auxiliary heater varies
depending on the vehicle climate system.
The auxiliary heater heats the cab.
The vehicle is fitted with an auxiliary heater that uses excess
heat in the engine coolant. The heat is routed to the cab
through the heating system.
Maintenance and use of auxiliary heater

Follow the instructions during maintenance and use of the
auxiliary heater and it will have a longer service life.
Engine pre-heating makes cold starts easier and extends the life
of the engine. The heat is routed to the cab through the heating
system. Note the warnings and advice on care and usage.
Complete
157
Driver environment
• Before starting the auxiliary heater, check that the outlets

for exhaust gases and combustion air are not blocked.
The auxiliary heater is positioned down on the front
right-hand side.
• The auxiliary heater must not be switched on while the
vehicle is standing in a garage.
• When refuelling, the auxiliary heater must have been
switched off for at least 3 minutes before driving the
vehicle into the refuelling area.
• At least 5% of fuel in the fuel tank is required in order to
start the auxiliary heater.
• Do not use the auxiliary heater where highly flammable
fumes or gases may build up.
• The windows and roof hatch must be closed when the
auxiliary heater is active.
• The auxiliary heater may only be started if it is filled
with coolant.
• To protect the auxiliary heater against corrosion, the
refrigerant must contain at least 10% antifreeze all year
round. In areas where there is no risk of frost damage,
only corrosion protection needs to be added.
158 Complete
Driver environment
Biodiesel auxiliary heater

If the auxiliary heater is run on biodiesel, the auxiliary heater
service life is shortened.
The starting ability can be affected at low temperatures. For
more information on operation at low temperatures, see the
Fuel, biodiesel section.
Starting the auxiliary heater

1. Before starting the auxiliary heater, check that the outlets
2. Press the switch.
b357933
Auxiliary heater
The switch is located in the climate panel.

When the climate system is set to maximum heating, the
auxiliary heater may start automatically. The auxiliary
heater can always be switched off manually by pressing
the switch.

Complete
159
Driver environment
b358275
Auxiliary heater

3. Press the switch several times to change the auxiliary
heater functionality.
Number of presses Functionality
1 The auxiliary heater heats the

cab.

cab and engine.

engine.
4 The auxiliary heater is

switched off.

the switch.

160 Complete
Driver environment
b358276
Auxiliary heater

3. Press the switch several times to change the auxiliary
heater functionality.
Number of presses Functionality

cab.

cab and engine.

engine.
4 The auxiliary heater is

switched off.

the switch.
Complete
161
Driver environment
Symbols in auxiliary heater display

When the auxiliary heater is started, different functions can be
selected. The symbol or symbols show the selected function.
Engine and cab can be heated simultaneously.
Symbol Functionality
The auxiliary heater heats the

cab.
b413310
The auxiliary heater heats the

engine.
b413308
Function operating the auxiliary heater

Function operate the auxiliary heater once a month to ensure its
function.
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster when the
auxiliary heater needs to be function operatedAuxiliary heater
needs maintenance.
Function operation of auxiliary heater

The auxiliary heater is function operated automatically once a
month to ensure its function.
162 Complete
Driver environment
A message appears in the instrument clusterAuxiliary heater

started for maintenance.
If function operation cannot be performed automatically, it
must be performed manually. A message appears in the
instrument clusterMaintenance of auxiliary heater required.
Auxiliary heater with a warm engine

Under certain conditions, the auxiliary heater will not respond
when you start it with the switch. This is because the coolant in
the cooling system is at a high temperature. The auxiliary
heater starts automatically when the temperature in the cooling
system drops.
Switching off the auxiliary heater

b357933
Auxiliary heater
After the button is pressed, it takes approximately 3

minutes before the auxiliary heater is switched off.
Switching off the auxiliary heater

b358276
Auxiliary heater
Complete
163
Driver environment
After the button is pressed, it takes approximately 3

minutes before the auxiliary heater is switched off.
Starting the auxiliary heater with a cold

engine
When the cab and engine are cold, it can take a long time
before heat is felt in the cab.
Starting the auxiliary heater with a cold

engine
When the cab and engine are cold, it can take a long time
before heat is felt in the cab. The auxiliary heater is set by the
manufacturer to run at full power for a maximum of 2 hours.
Then it goes down to a lower power mode. The time the
auxiliary heater can run at full power varies. To achieve full
power for two hours, the engine and radiator must be cold
when the auxiliary heater is started. The auxiliary heater's
different operating modes at full power and shorter periods at
lower power are normal. Do not restart the auxiliary heater.
Preset start of the auxiliary heater

Via the vehicle instrument cluster, it is possible to set the
auxiliary heater to start.
Navigera till Auxiliary heater under the Settings menu.
It is possible to program the start in two ways, using a start time
and end time.
164 Complete
Driver environment
Start time means that the auxiliary heater starts at the specified
time.
End time means that the auxiliary heater stops at the specified
time. The auxiliary heater automatically starts in advance and
heats the vehicle to the specified temperature, and for the
specified time.
It is also possible to set duration, repetition and zone.
Performing an emergency stop on the

auxiliary heater
Proceed as follows to perform an emergency stop of the
auxiliary heater.
1. Switch off the vehicle battery master switch.
2. Pull out the fuse.
The fuse is located in the central electric unit and has the
symbol shown in the following illustration.
Fuse symbol for auxiliary heater. The fuse is in the

central electric unit, which is located in the instrument
b206483
panel in front of the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the auxiliary heater from the battery
App for the remote control of

auxiliary heater
It is possible to control the auxiliary heater remotely by using
the app Scania Fleet Management.
Complete
165
Driver environment
Scania Fleet Management is available for installation on mobile

phones and other mobile devices.
With this app it is possible to:
• Start the auxiliary heater.

• Program the start time.
• Program the end time.
Sometimes it can take a few minutes for the vehicle to wake up

and acknowledge the command. This is not a fault, it is due to
the status of the vehicle when the command is sent.
For more information on auxiliary heater functions, see the
Auxiliary heater section.
Electric cab heater

b359616
Electrical socket for electric cab heater.
Inside the cab, there is an 230 volt electrical socket for

connecting an electric cab heater. In order to power the
electrical socket, electricity must be connected to an electrical
input. The electrical input can be positioned in the front of the
vehicle or behind the cab.
166 Complete
Driver environment
Connecting the electric cab heater

Connect the electric cab heater approx. two hours before
starting, in order to heat up the cab.
The electrical input can be positioned in the front of the vehicle
or on the frame behind the cab on the driver’s side of the cab.
1. Connect an electric cab heater in the cab to the 230 volt
electrical socket in the cab.
2. Connect a connection cable from the electric cab
heater’s electrical intake to the 230 volt electrical socket.
Storage compartments
Internal storage compartments

An inner storage compartment is located at the rear wall of the
engine tunnel.
WARNING!
The storage area for the engine tunnel by the rear wall
must be filled with max. 4 kg. This is to prevent the door
from opening in the event of a collision or harsh brake
application.
Complete
167
Driver environment
Upper storage compartment

The wire that opens the hatch for the upper storage
compartment is located by the boarding grab handle in the cab.
Wire that opens the hatch for the

b382826 upper storage compartment.
The storage compartment can also be accessed via the cab.

If the hatch is not completely closed, a warning is displayed in
the instrument cluster. The hatch lock has 2 positions. If you
only close to the first position, the hatch will not be completely
closed.
Lower storage compartment

The handle that opens the hatch for the lower storage
compartment is located by the top boarding step.
Handle that opens the hatch for

b382420
the lower storage compartment.
168 Complete
Driver environment
Storage compartment under cab
Note!
At high engine temperatures, the interior of the storage
compartment could become hot.
Accessories
IMPORTANT!
The voltage in 24 volt sockets can vary. Therefore make
sure that the accessories connected to 24 volt sockets can
withstand continuous voltages up to 30 V. Otherwise there
is a risk that the accessories will be damaged.
Fixed accessories should be retrofitted in a Scania workshop.

If the vehicle is fitted with electrical sockets, you can connect
portable accessories to them. The electrical sockets are marked
as 12 V or 24 V and are normally fitted on the instrument
panel. Alternative locations are possible.
Complete
169
Driver assistance system

Kickdown
Kickdown is used to change down a gear, e.g. when overtaking.
Kickdown can also be used to delay changing up, so that the
higher gear is engaged at a higher engine speed.
Keep the accelerator pedal in the kickdown position to avoid
the engine losing power when changing up whilst driving
uphill.
Acceleration control
Acceleration control is a function that limits the maximum
acceleration of the vehicle.
To reduce fuel consumption and improve drive comfort, the
vehicle is fitted with acceleration control.
The improvements are most noticeable at low rolling resistance,
i.e. when the vehicle has a low load or when the trip involves
many stops and starts.
The driver is only aware of the acceleration control when the
vehicle fails to deliver full torque at low rolling resistance.
170 Complete
At high rolling resistance, e.g. under heavy load, driving on an

uphill slope, the acceleration control does not affect the engine
torque.
The degree of acceleration control can be adjusted at a Scania
workshop.
Temporary disengagement of acceleration

control
You can temporarily disengage the acceleration control at
speeds over 30 km/h.
You do this by pressing the accelerator pedal to the kickdown
position. At high rolling resistance, the acceleration control
cannot be certain of affecting the engine torque. In such cases,
pressing the accelerator pedal to the kickdown position makes
no difference.
Complete
171
Cruise control
Cruise control switch
1. Return to the previously set

1 speed.
3
2. Switch off/disengage the
cruise control temporarily.
2 b358621 3. Activate the cruise control and

adjust the speed.
Cruise control can be set at the desired vehicle speed and keeps
the vehicle speed unchanged without needing to use the
accelerator pedal.
The symbol lights up white when cruise control is

b206464
active.
Activating cruise control

Cruise control is activated via the instrument cluster with a
switch on the steering wheel.
The vehicle speed must be at least 15 km/h in order for cruise
control to be activated.
1. Press quick selection.
2. Select Cruise control.
3. Press the toggle switch.
The toggle switch has two steps in each direction.
172 Complete
− Press 1 step to adjust the vehicle speed by 1 km/h.
− Press 2 steps to adjust the vehicle speed by 5 km/h.
The symbol lights up white when cruise control is

b206464
active.
Disengaging cruise control

• Switch off the function via the instrument cluster.
• Press 0 on the switch in the steering wheel.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal.
• Activate the retarder.
• Activate the exhaust brake.
If you wish to return to the set speed, press the switch in the
steering wheel to return to the previously set speed.
If, however, you wish to engage the cruise control at your new
speed, press + or -.
Disengaging the cruise control temporarily

1. Press 0 on the switch in the steering wheel.
The set speed remains in the memory as long as the
engine is not switched off.
Complete
173
If you want to return to the preset vehicle speed, press the

switch on the steering wheel.
If you want to change the vehicle speed to your new vehicle
speed, press + or - on the switch.
Cruise control with active prediction
Note!
Cruise control must be set at a minimum of 50 km/h for
active prediction to be activated.
Active prediction
Cruise control with active prediction automatically adjusts for
hills, bends and traffic management of the road ahead of the
vehicle in order to optimise fuel economy.
1 2 1. The symbol lights up when

there is acess to map data.
85 91
2. The interval lights up green
b361481
-15 -10 -5 +5 +10 +15 when the function is active.
Active prediction regulates the set cruise control speed in an

economical way within a permitted speed range. Active
prediction is activated when you activate cruise control. When
the function is active, the permitted speed range is lit green in
174 Complete
Active prediction uses map data to determine when it is time to

change the vehicle speed. The map data shows what the terrain
ahead of the vehicle looks like.
The vehicle also uses map information to prioritise the choice
of gears to give more economic driving in relation to the
approaching terrain.
For example, the vehicle can:
• Change down before steep hills.

• Select a lower gear with a higher engine speed rather
than changing up and reducing the engine speed.
If neither map information nor GPS reception is available,

active prediction works like normal cruise control. The symbol
for available map data is not displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the adaptive cruise control is activated and there is a vehicle
within the set time window, vehicle speed will not be increased.
Cancel active prediction

You can cancel an increase or decrease in the speed by pressing
the switch in the steering wheel to return to the previously set
speed.
b412238
Return to the previously set speed.
Complete
175
1. Press the switch
Setting the lowest permitted speed for

active prediction
You can set the lowest permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
b387488
1. Press quick selection and navigate to Set minimum speed.

2. Set the minimum speed by using the navigation arrows.
− The right arrow sets a higher minimum speed
− The left arrow sets a lower minimum speed.
Eco-roll
Eco-roll is Scania’s function for automatic coasting in neutral.
If suitable, eco-roll will activate automatic coasting in neutral to
reduce fuel consumption. Eco-roll is activated when you
activate cruise control with active prediction. For more
information, see the Cruise control with active prediction section.
Conditions for eco-roll

For eco-roll to activate automatic coasting in neutral, the
following is required:
176 Complete
• The Opticruise lever is in automatic mode.

• Economy or standard performance mode is selected.
If the time window on the adaptive cruise control is set at level

1 or 2, eco-roll will operate in a restricted manner. For more
information, see the Adaptive cruise control section.
Eco-roll in progress
When automatic coasting in neutral is in progress, this is
indicated in the following way.
• The engine speed reduces to idling speed.
• N is displayed in the engaged gear field.
Cancelling eco-roll
Cancel automatic coasting in neutral by doing one of the
following.
• Switch off the cruise control.
• Use one of the vehicle brake systems.
• Change gear manually using the Opticruise lever.
• Change to a performance mode which does not support
eco-roll.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
Complete
177
Advanced emergency braking (AEB)
WARNING!
AEB is only an aid. AEB does not adapt to driving
conditions or the weather. The driver is always responsible
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner.
Tampering with the vehicle speed signal may cause the AEB
not to function as intended or to be activated incorrectly.
WARNING!
AEB is only an aid and may have difficulty identifying
vehicles and locating them correctly in certain traffic
conditions. AEB may overlook a collision risk or be
activated when there is no risk of collision.
Note!
The forward looking camera must be calibrated after the
windscreen has been renewed.
AEB is an advanced emergency braking system which uses a

camera and distance sensor to mitigate the effects of road
accidents with the vehicle in front.
AEB is activated automatically, when the power is switched on.
178 Complete
b361033
AEB, advanced emergency braking.
The diode in the switch lights up green. AEB is active when the
speed exceeds 15 km/h.
AEB collision warning

AEB collision warning is displayed with a warning symbol and
acoustic signal if there is a risk of collision. The driver can
cancel the collision warning.
b374154
Symbol for collision warning.
When AEB detects a collision risk, the system is activated in 3

stages:
1. A red warning with an audible signal is shown in the

instrument cluster.
2. If the driver does not react and the risk remains, AEB
brakes the vehicle slightly.
3. If there is no further reaction and the risk remains, AEB
brakes the vehicle with full force.
After the vehicle brakes with full force and is stationary, the
brakes will hold the vehicle for a few seconds to prevent the
Complete
179
vehicle from moving. The brakes are released if the driver

applies the brake or the accelerator pedal.
If adaptive cruise control is activated, it can indicate a collision
warning and try to alleviate the situation before AEB issues a
warning.
For more information, see the Adaptive cruise control section.
Cancelling the collision warning

The driver can always cancel the warning or braking.
The driver can always take over control of braking by pressing
the brake pedal. This cancels the warning and automatic
braking. The more critical the situation, the harder the brake
pedal needs to be pressed.
The collision warning can be cancelled at an early stage in the
following way:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Activate the direction indicators.
The warning and brake application can also be cancelled in the

following way:
• pressing the AEB switch on the instrument panel.
• Step on the accelerator pedal clearly and quickly.
• Press the accelerator pedal to the kickdown position.
180 Complete
Reasons for limitations of AEB

AEB may be limited or deactivated for various reasons.
• the distance sensor is blocked or faulty.
• the camera is blocked or faulty.
• there are faults with the brake system of the vehicle or
the trailer.
• the air suspension of the vehicle is set far outside the
normal drive position.
• the vehicle is driven in darkness.
The following messages may be displayed in the instrument

cluster:
• Advanced emergency braking system malfunction: AEB is
deactivated because of a fault with the distance sensor.
• Advanced emergency braking has limited functionality: AEB
is limited and still partly active. AEB may not brake or
warn of collision in time.
Deactivation of AEB
AEB can be deactivated using the switch.
b361033
AEB, advanced emergency braking.

The diode in the switch lights up yellow. The switch is
spring-loaded and the same switch resets AEB.
Complete
181
The AEB symbol lights up yellow
b377314
Limited or deactivated AEB.

1. Activate AEB or clean in front of the camera or radar.
The symbol for blocked camera lights up

yellow
b364578
Blocked camera.
1. Clean in front of the camera.
Defective camera.
The symbol for blocked radar lights up white

b364581
Blocked radar.
1. Clean in front of the radar.
182 Complete
The symbol for collision warning lights up

red
The symbol lights up red together with an acoustic signal.
b374154
Collision warning.
1. Apply the brakes.
If no action is taken, AEB will brake the vehicle.
Different traffic conditions and AEB

Traffic conditions which AEB has difficulty identifying.
When driving into and out of bends, it may be difficult for AEB
to identify the road ahead. AEB may therefore fail to issue a
warning about vehicles on the road or issue an incorrect
warning about vehicles off the road.
b338366
Bends
Complete
183
At slip roads and when vehicles are moving on the hard

shoulder it can be difficult for AEB to identify vehicles ahead.
b338368
Slip roads and the hard shoulder.
Vehicles that are switching lanes right in front of your vehicle

cannot be identified immediately by AEB until they are within
the identification zone.
b338369
Switching lanes
Adaptive cruise control
WARNING!
The vehicle will not brake automatically for stationary
obstacles. The adaptive cruise control only controls the
distance to moving vehicles ahead and not to stationary
obstacles on the road.
184 Complete
Note!
When the vehicle approaches a stationary or slow-moving
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control has limited possibilities
to regulate the distance. This is only possible when your
vehicle is moving at a low speed.
WARNING!
The vehicle will not brake automatically for stationary
obstacles. Adaptive cruise control only controls the distance
to moving vehicles ahead and not to stationary obstacles on
the road.
WARNING!
Do not use adaptive cruise control on slippery road
surfaces. The adaptive cruise control does not adjust the
distance to vehicles ahead in relation to the prevailing road
conditions.
Complete
185
WARNING!
Adaptive cruise control is only an aid and may have
difficulty identifying vehicles and locating them correctly in
certain traffic conditions. Adaptive cruise control may
overlook a collision risk or be activated when there is no
risk of collision.
Note!
The adaptive cruise control does not ignore AEB. AEB
works as usual even when the adaptive cruise control is
activated.
Adaptive cruise control helps the driver keep the distance to the
vehicle in front.
The vehicle decelerates automatically if the adaptive cruise
control detects that the vehicle in front is travelling more
slowly. The vehicle follows the vehicle in front with a preset
time window. The vehicle resumes the set cruise control speed
as soon as the traffic situation permits.
The function is customised for driving on motorways and main
roads.
If the adaptive cruise control senses a vehicle ahead, this is
displayed in the instrument cluster by the vehicle lighting up.
186 Complete
1 2
1. The vehicle lights up
b363531
2. Speed of the vehicle in front
Activating and deactivating cruise control

Cruise control is activated via the instrument cluster and a
steering wheel switch which also enables adjustment of the
vehicle speed.
The symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster when

b383383
the adaptive cruise control is active.
Proceed as follows to activate the function:

1. Press quick selection and navigate to the cruise control.
2. Select cruise control.
3. Press the toggle switch.
The switch has 2 steps in each direction.
− Press the switch 1 step to adjust the speed by
1 km/h.
− Press the switch 2 steps to adjust the speed by

5 km/h.
Complete
187
1. Return to the previously set

1 speed.
3
2. Switch off/disengage the
cruise control temporarily.
2 3. Activate the cruise control and
b358621
adjust the speed.
If you wish to disengage cruise control temporarily, press 0 on

the steering wheel switch.
If you wish to return to the set speed, press the switch in the
steering wheel to return to the previously set speed. If, however,
you wish to engage the cruise control at your new speed, press +
or -.
Switching from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control
changes the set speed to the actual vehicle speed if this is lower
than the previously set speed.
Manually reactivate the adaptive cruise

control
The adaptive cruise control can adapt the vehicle’s speed down
to stationary.
The function can be reactivated automatically after being
stationary for max. 3 seconds. After being stationary for a
longer period, the function must be reactivated manually by
pressing the return button (1) or by lightly depressing the
accelerator pedal. When this occurs, the following symbol is
188 Complete

the adaptive cruise control must be reactivated
b383382
manually.
The lowest settable speed is 15 km/h.

• Take over the control of the vehicle when you, at high
speed, get close to stationary or slow-moving vehicles.
• Reactivate the adaptive cruise control when the
difference in vehicle speed is low.
Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated

Situations in which adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
• directly after engine start
• at speeds of 3 km/h or lower
• when the clutch is being operated
• when the service brake is being used
• when safety belt has been unbuckled
• when open driver’s door is open
• when activating certain power take-offs.
The adaptive cruise control is disconnected if the safety belt is

unbuckled or the driver’s door is opened. If this is done when
the vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is applied at the same
time.
Complete
189
Change the time window for adaptive cruise

control
Decrease and increase the time window to the vehicle ahead.
b358730
Adaptive cruise control.
• Press the upper part of the switch to reduce the time

window to the vehicle ahead.
• Press the lower part of the switch to increase the time
window to the vehicle ahead.
b362095
The time window has 5 levels, with 1 dash being the shortest time and 5 dashes
being the longest time between your vehicle and the distance to the vehicle in
front.
190 Complete
The symbol for blocked distance sensor

lights up yellow
b362094
The distance sensor is blocked. This may cause adaptive cruise

control to be deactivated.
1. Check that nothing is blocking the distance sensor.
The symbol for collision warning lights up

red
In the event of a collision warning, the system performs limited
braking, although you must brake the vehicle yourself to use full
braking force.
b374154
The collision warning is shown when adaptive cruise control is

active.
The prevailing traffic situation may require you to brake
heavily.
1. Brake the vehicle.
The system only performs limited braking. You must
brake the vehicle yourself to use full braking force.
Complete
191
If AEB is activated and adaptive cruise control cannot alleviate

the situation, AEB may take over and apply heavy braking. AEB
is activated automatically, when the power is switched on.
For more information, refer to the section AEB.
Different traffic conditions

Traffic situations in which adaptive cruise control may struggle
to identify a vehicle ahead.
b338366
Bends
In bends as well as before and after bends it can be difficult for

the adaptive cruise control to identify vehicles ahead. The
vehicle may be braked unexpectedly or too late.
b338367
Sideways position
192 Complete
Problems may occur if your vehicle is to one side in relation to

the vehicle ahead. The adaptive cruise control may not identify
a vehicle ahead. You will have to brake yourself to increase the
distance.
b338368
Slip roads and the hard shoulder
At slip roads and when vehicles are moving on the hard

shoulder it can be difficult for the adaptive cruise control to
identify vehicles ahead. The vehicle may be braked
unexpectedly or too late.
b338369
Switching lanes
Vehicles that are switching lanes immediately in front of your

vehicle cannot be identified by the adaptive cruise control until
they are within the identification zone. You will have to brake
yourself to increase the distance to the vehicle which is
switching lanes.
Complete
193
The symbol for adaptive cruise control lights

up yellow
b374090
The adaptive cruise control does not work.

The symbol for adaptive cruise control lights

up white
The symbol lights up white and an acoustic signal sounds.
b374090
Adaptive cruise control has been switched off automatically.
Platooning
WARNING!
This function is only an aid which uses adaptive cruise
control to adjust the distance to the vehicle ahead.
194 Complete
WARNING!
Do not use the function in poor weather conditions. The
function does not adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
in relation to the prevailing road conditions.
IMPORTANT!
The driver is responsible for the vehicle maintaining the
distance to the vehicle in front and the vehicle speed
according to legal requirements.
Note!
Some vehicle types can be difficult to classify as suitable
heavy vehicles. In these cases, platooning will not provide
the desired reduction in fuel consumption despite the
function being activated. Examples of such vehicles include
car/caravan combinations, tankers and box trucks.
Complete
195
Note!
Do not use this function when there are bright lights ahead,
when it is dark or when visibility is poor. The function’s
performance deteriorates when it is difficult to identify the
vehicle ahead.
Note!
Do not use platooning in heavy traffic, as there is a risk of
small vehicles pulling in regularly and deactivating the
function. In these situations, it is better to use adaptive
cruise control.
Platooning adjusts vehicle speed and distance to the heavy

vehicle in front in order to reduce fuel consumption through
reduced air resistance and planned hill driving.
Platooning uses the adaptive cruise control, cruise control with
active prediction and map data to adjust the speed and distance
to the vehicle in front. The same conditions and limitations that
apply to these functions also apply to platooning. For more
information, see the Adaptive cruise control and Cruise control with
active prediction sections.
196 Complete
Conditions for platooning

Platooning can be activated if:
• all conditions for adaptive cruise control are fulfilled.

• adaptive cruise control is activated with time window 1
or 2.
• the vehicle speed is above 60 km/h.
• there is a heavy vehicle ahead that is suitable for
platooning.
• the weather conditions are sufficiently good to read the
vehicle ahead.
• there is map data available.
Activating platooning
Activating the function enables platooning.
Adaptive cruise control must be activated in order for
platooning to be activated.
b397058
Platooning
1. Press quick selection and navigate to platooning.

2. Select the symbol for platooning.
Platooning is activated if the correct criteria for
platooning are met.
Complete
197
1 1. The symbol shows that the

vehicle is platooning behind
b397057
the heavy vehicle in front.
• On a level straight, the distance will be less than when

driving in hilly terrain.
• The function will increase the distance to the vehicle in
front before a downhill slope to minimise the need of
braking.
• The function releases the brakes just before the end of
the hill to reduce the distance and catch up with the
vehicle ahead.
Cancelling platooning
It is possible to manually cancel platooning.
The function is cancelled:
• if platooning is switched off
• if adaptive cruise control is switched off
• if the time window for adaptive cruise control is raised to
higher than 2.
Platooning is deactivated
If the conditions for platooning are not fulfilled, the function is
deactivated. Adaptive cruise control is still active.
198 Complete
The function is cancelled and the symbol for platooning goes

out.
The conditions for platooning are not fulfilled.
Platooning will be resumed once the conditions are fulfilled.
Different traffic conditions when platooning

Different traffic conditions that may occur when platooning.
If a truck or a heavier vehicle drives in behind the vehicle ahead,
platooning will continue to be activated.
A truck drives in behind a vehicle

b397986
ahead.
If a car or a smaller vehicle drives in behind the vehicle ahead,

platooning is deactivated while adaptive cruise control remains
active.
A car drives in behind a vehicle

b397987
ahead.
Complete
199
If the vehicle loses map data due to a zone lacking map data or a
poor GPS signal, platooning is deactivated while adaptive cruise
control remains active.
b397985
Loss of map data or GPS.

b412148
Loss of map data or GPS.
Calibrating the distance sensor
WARNING!
During calibration, AEB and adaptive cruise control are
deactivated. The systems will not prevent collision or be
activated to alleviate the traffic conditions.
200 Complete
b377314
the vehicle’s distance sensor is being calibrated.
After renewing a distance sensor, a calibration is performed

before use.
If the vehicle has been to the workshop for distance sensor
renewal, the distance sensor must first calibrate itself for
approx. 10 minutes. A message is shown in the instrument
cluster when calibration is in progress. Calibration takes place
automatically. The final part of the calibration is carried out
while driving when the distance sensor reads the surrounding
area.
Lane departure warning (LDW)
IMPORTANT!
The lane departure warning is only an aid.
Keep the windscreen in front of the camera clean so as not
to impair the camera’s field of vision.
LDW is an aid that alerts the driver if the vehicle crosses any of
the lane side markings.
LDW monitors the lane in front via a camera in the windscreen
and alerts the driver when one of the side markings on the lane
Complete
201
is unintentionally crossed. The system does not warn you if you

actively steer over the side markings.
LDW gives a warning with acoustic signals in

the loudspeakers.
LDW gives a warning via an acoustic signal from the left- or
right-hand loudspeaker according to which side of the road you
cross the lane markings.
When the warning occurs, the volume of any music in the hi-fi
system is automatically reduced.
The LDW warning takes the form of an acoustic signal when:
• You unintentionally cross the lane markings of the lane

you are driving in.
The LDW does not warn when:
• You carry out an intentional steering wheel movement

during normal steering.
• You have activated the direction indicator and for 4
seconds after it has been switched off.
The symbol for blocked camera lights up

yellow
b364578
Blocked camera.
202 Complete
Defective camera.
The LDW symbol lights up yellow

b209851
The camera has been blocked for longer than 30 seconds.

LDW does not work.

1. Contact a Scania workshop for inspection.
Activating LDW
Activate and deactivate LDW by doing as follows:
b354537
LDW
• LDW is activated automatically when the ignition is

switched on. The lamp on the switch lights up green.
• LDW can be deactivated using the switch. When LDW
is deactivated, the lamp in the switch is lit yellow.
Complete
203
LDW is available when:
• The speed exceeds 60 km/h and the system can identify

at least 1 line.
• The function is switched off when the speed falls below
55 km/h.
LDW is limited when:
• The camera cannot read the lane markings because of

snow, gravel or similar on the road surface.
• There are no clear side markings.
• You are driving on a sharp bend.
• The sun is dazzling the camera.
• Rain, snow or fog obscures the camera’s field of vision.
Driver settings
It is possible to adjust when LDW warnings should occur with
driver settings.
It is possible to adjust how LDW should behave in different
situations. Carry out the change in the instrument cluster.
Warning distance
There are three different levels of sensitivity regarding when

LDW should gives a warning when the vehicle approaches the
lane side markings.
• Early
204 Complete
• Normal (default setting)

• Late
Advanced lane departure warning
This setting looks at driving behaviour and the situations in

which LDW gives a warning:
• Activated (default setting) – LDW does not give a
warning for intentional infringements.
• Deactivated – LDW always gives a warning, apart from
when the direction indicator is activated.
Scania Driver Support

Scania Driver Support makes it easier for you, the driver, to
develop and maintain a driving style that reduces fuel
consumption and wear.
Driver support is easy to use and gives tips and a driving score
in the instrument cluster display while driving.
Driver support gives you a driving score in 4 categories:
• Hill driving
• Use of brakes
• Anticipation
• Choice of gears
Complete
205
Driving downhill
The driving score is based on the increase in vehicle speed on
the slope, use of brakes and the reduction in vehicle speed
before the downhill slope started.
b363520
Symbol for hill driving.
1. Release the accelerator in good time before a downhill

slope or the top of a hill to minimise the need for
braking further down the slope.
Map information and driver support on

downhill slopes
If map information is available for the route, driver support can
give driving tips to release the accelerator before a downhill
slope starts.
How soon before the driving tips are provided before slope
depends on the performance mode selected.
Driving uphill
Perform the following before an uphill slope.
1. Increase the vehicle speed before an uphill slope to avoid
losing too much speed on the slope and to avoid
changing down gears unnecessarily.
206 Complete
The driving score is not adversely affected if you cannot

accelerate in this manner.
b363519
Symbol for gaining speed before an uphill slope.
A driving score is not given if:
− Adaptive cruise control is activated and there is a

vehicle in front of you controlling the speed.
− Cruise control with active prediction is activated.
Use of brakes
Driver support analyses use of the service brake, engine brake
and auxiliary brake.
b338032
Symbol for use of brakes
Driver support calculates how much power the engine brake

and auxiliary brake can contribute in different situations. The
engine brake and auxiliary brake give high driving scores.
During light braking with the service brake, the engine also
brakes. In these situations, a high driving score may be given
even though no auxiliary brake is activated. Repeated, short
braking and braking at low starting speeds do not generate a
Complete
207
driving score. Driver support encourages the use of the auxiliary

brake as much as possible.
The driving score for braking is given only when the braking
has finished. Braking is finished when the vehicle has stopped or
acceleration begins. In certain conditions the analysis is
switched off, if the automatic retarder is deactivated.
Use of brakes in hybrid vehicles

Driver support analyses use of brakes. Gentle braking gives a
high score.
b344979
Icon for use of brakes in hybrid vehicles
If the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle speed is

reduced, a high driving score may be awarded even when no
brakes are applied. Shorter braking episodes and braking at low
starting speeds will not generate a driving score.
The driving score for braking is given only when the braking
has finished. Braking is finished when the vehicle has stopped or
acceleration begins.
In the event of too hard braking, the driver support system gives
tips on how to improve braking next time.
208 Complete
Anticipation
High driving score in anticipation is awarded in situations
where you coast longer before you start braking or you adjust to
the speed in a traffic queue.
b363518
Symbol for anticipation.
Driving score for anticipation is given as soon as braking begins.

Braking that is done entirely using the engine brake is awarded
maximum points.
Choice of gears
Driver support analyses how the choice of gears affects fuel
consumption and suggests which gear is the most fuel-efficient.
b363517
Symbol for choice of gears
Use the suggested gears to obtain a high driving score.

Driver support encourages driving at low engine speeds. This
means that the advice to change to a lower gear can come fairly
late, for example when on an uphill slope.
Complete
209
Clutch use and driver support

Driver support evaluates the starting gear you have selected,
how much you slip the clutch and how you use the accelerator
pedal when driving off.
If the energy used when driving off is high, suggestions are
given as to what can be changed when you next drive off.
Performance modes and driver support

Select Economy mode or Standard mode for the best fuel
economy.
If Power or Off-road mode is selected, the driver support will
monitor the power usage and speed variations and analyse if the
selected performance mode is the most suitable choice. If this is
not the case, the driver support will give tips on this. If power
mode or off-road mode is selected no driver tips regarding gear
changing will be given. The analysis will remain the same.
Driver support and display in the instrument

cluster.
Driver support is always active and evaluates how the vehicle is
being driven even if other information is shown in the
instrument cluster.
The display in the instrument cluster must be activated
manually.
210 Complete
b363515
The menu for trip information
Driver support under the menu for trip information in the

instrument cluster. The view shows a driving score for each
category. When a score is given for a category, the other
categories are dimmed for a few seconds.
60 %
100 %
83 %
The view shows the score as a
56 %
b363933
percentage for each category.
It is also possible to add a driver assistance view in one of the

instrument cluster’s selectable fields. When a score is awarded
for a category it is displayed across the entire selectable field for
a few seconds.
60 % 100 %
83 % 56 %
b364510
Score view in a selectable field.
Driver support and driving tips

Driving tips from the driver support system are displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Complete
211
It is possible to set when driving tips from the driver support

system are to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
The following display selections can be set via the instrument

cluster’s settings:
• Driving tips are always displayed irrespective of view.

• Driving tips are only displayed when the view for driver
support is displayed.
• Driving tips are switched off completely.
Resetting driving score

The driving score can be reset manually by the instrument
cluster.
Proceed as follows to reset:
1. Navigate to the display view for driver assistance in the
instrument cluster.
2. Press the OK button in the steering wheel.
3. Select Reset in the menu shown and confirm with the
OK button.
The driving score is reset automatically when changing the

driver card.
Attention support
The function measures and shows how alert the driver is and
gives a warning when attention reaches a low level.
212 Complete
Attention support evaluates the driver’s way of driving during

the first 15 minutes of the journey. For the analysis to be as
correct as possible, the vehicle must be driven in the normal
manner.
The function bases its analysis on steering wheel movements,
lane keeping and day/night rhythm to remind the driver to take
a break.
Attention support is always active and evaluates the attention of
the driver even when the information is not shown in the
instrument cluster.
Attention support in the instrument cluster

The display in the instrument cluster must be activated
manually.
It is also possible to add attention support to the instrument
cluster’s selectable fields.
b364740
Instantaneous data
You will find the view for attention support under the menu for
Momentary data in the instrument cluster.
Complete
213
Attention support warning

If the driver’s attention wanes, the function gives an alert in the
instrument cluster.
Warnings are activated automatically, when the power is
switched on.
It is possible to completely deactivate display of the warnings by
adjusting this in the instrument cluster settings.
Warnings from attention support are not activated for display
until the vehicle’s speed exceeds 60 km/h. When the speed
drops below 55 km/h, the warnings are deactivated again.
b393125
Attention support
The symbol is green until the level of attention drops below

20% or a warning is displayed. It then changes colour to yellow.
Warnings are displayed in 2 steps:
1. The first time attention reaches a low level, an attention

warning is issued.
2. After another 10 minutes without improvement, a
request for a break is issued.
1 2
1. You seem inattentive
b393124
2. Time for a break?
214 Complete
Zone management
Scania Zone is an extra service in Scania Fleet Management,
and is Scania’s zone management system.
The service is linked to a driver card or ID button and any zone
entries are followed up in Scania Fleet Management.
This function adjusts the vehicle’s operations to restrictions
applicable in certain geographical or time-sensitive zones.
Different zones may have different restrictions, and they may
overlap one another such that there is a zone within a zone. As
soon as the vehicle leaves the zone, it automatically reverts to
normal operation.
Restrictions can either be advisory, in which case the driver
receives a reminder in the instrument cluster, or optional, which
means that the vehicle adjusts itself automatically. The driver
may always override automatic adjustment.
Restrictions can be adapted for three different zone types:
• Speed restriction zones

• Noise restriction zones
• Zero-emission zones
Complete
215
Speed restriction zones
b410313
The vehicle is situated in a speed restriction zone.
Violation of a speed limited zone

b410311
The vehicle speed is greater than the zone’s limit.

1. Reduce the speed to adjust the vehicle to the zone limit.
Speed restriction zone with automatic

adjustment
If the vehicle is situated in an automatic adjustment zone, the
vehicle speed will be automatically reduced to the zone limit.
216 Complete
b410309
The vehicle is in a speed limited zone with automatic

adjustment.
Overriding automatic adjustment in speed

limited zone
1. Depress the accelerator pedal into kickdown position to
override speed adjustment.
Adjustment is automatically reapplied when the vehicle
speed reduces to the zone limit.
Noise restriction zones

b410312
The vehicle is situated in a noise restriction zone.
Violation of a noise limited zone

b410312
Complete
217
The vehicle is situated in a noise restriction zone.
b405521
Prioritised electric drive
• Press the switch to adjust the vehicle by activating

prioritised electric drive and electric mode.
For more information, refer to the section Electric mode.
• Leave the zone if the vehicle cannot be adjusted to the
zone limit.
Zero-emission zones
b410310
The vehicle is situated in a zero-emission zone.
Violation of an emission free zone

b410310
The vehicle is situated in a zero-emission zone.

b405521
218 Complete
• Press the switch to adjust the vehicle by activating

prioritised electric drive and electric mode.
For more information, refer to the section Electric mode.
• Leave the zone if the vehicle cannot be adjusted to the
zone limit.
Multiple zones in zone management

b410308
The vehicle is in several different zones.

1. Navigate to the zone management menu page in the
instrument cluster to see which zones are active.
When entering any zone, the zone symbol will light up
yellow and a warning will be displayed.
Zone management settings

Zone management settings can be changed in the instrument
cluster.
All changes are linked to a driver card or ID button.
The following settings can be changed:
• Messages
− Set whether advisory messages that appear in the

instrument cluster are to be off or on.
Complete
219
− The display messages setting is on by default.
− Zone entry warnings will always be displayed.

• Automatic adjustment
− If automatic adjustment is on, the vehicle will adjust

automatically to zones which are advisory. A
message is displayed in the instrument cluster when
the vehicle has adjusted itself.
− Scania recommends that this setting is activated.
− The automatic adjustment setting is off by default.
220 Complete
Engine
Engine
Hand throttle
1. Return to previously saved
1 engine speed.
3
2. Shut off the hand throttle
function temporarily.
2 3. Activate the hand throttle

function and adjust the engine
b358621
speed.
The hand throttle works in a similar way to the cruise control.

The difference is that the hand throttle controls the engine
speed instead of the road speed.
You can, for example, use the function to set the engine speed
when operating a crane.
Activating the hand throttle function

You can activate the hand throttle function with the switch on
the steering wheel.
You can use the hand throttle function when the vehicle is
stationary and when driving at low speeds, max. 10 km/h.
Complete
221
Engine
Setting the engine speed with the hand

throttle function
Proceed as follows to change the hand throttle’s preselected
engine speed.
The hand throttle’s preselected engine speed is the engine
speed you get when you press the reset button (1).
1. Set the required engine speed by pressing + or - on the
steering wheel switch for cruise control (3).
A quick press on + increases the engine speed by 20 rpm.
A long press on + (at least three seconds) increases the
engine speed by 200 rpm.
A quick press on - decreases the engine speed by 20 rpm.
A long press on - (at least three seconds) decreases the
engine speed by 200 rpm.
2. Keep the reset switch (1) depressed for at least three
seconds.
The new preselected hand throttle engine speed will be
stored.
− Once the hand throttle speed has been preselected,
you can also change the engine speed while driving
with a short press on + or -.
Changes made with these short presses are not stored
when you switch off the engine.
222 Complete
Engine
Deactivating the hand throttle function

You can deactivate the hand throttle function in one of the
following ways.
• Press 0 on the steering wheel switch (2).
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Deactivate the function via the instrument cluster.
The function is off when it is set to 0.
The function is switched off automatically when the speed is

above 15 km/h.
Idling speed adjustment
Adjusting the idling speed

The idling speed can be adjusted using the brake pedal and the
same switch as for cruise control or by a Scania workshop.
1. Return to previously saved
1 engine speed.
3
2. Switch off the idling speed
adjustment function
temporarily.
2
b358621
3. Adjust the idling speed.
Complete
223
Engine
Make sure the cruise control or adaptive cruise control is

selected in the instrument cluster and the engine is at running
temperature.
1. Press down the brake pedal and hold it lightly depressed.
2. Hold in the reset button (1) for at least 3 seconds.
3. Adjust the engine speed with + or - (3).
4. Save the new idling speed by holding in the reset button
(1) for at least 3 seconds.
5. Release the brake pedal.
The idling speed set remains even when the engine is
switched off.
The idling speed can also be adjusted by a Scania workshop.
Adjusting idling speed with the idle stop and

start function
The idle stop and start function must be deactivated before the
idling speed is adjusted.
Deactivate and activate the idle stop and start function with the
switch.
b405522
Idle stop and start
After idling speed adjustment, the idle stop and start function
must be activated.
224 Complete
Engine
Idling speed range

The idling speed range can be adjusted according to the
following table.
Engine Fuel Idling speed

range
9 litre Diesel/Gas 500-700 rpm
13 litre Diesel 500-700 rpm
Idling speed range

The idling speed range can be adjusted according to the
following table.
Engine Fuel Idling speed

range
7-litres Diesel 600-700 rpm
9 litre Diesel/Gas 500-700 rpm
Complete
225
Engine
Adaptive idling
This function is automatically activated and deactivated when
the requirement for increased charging capacity has been met.
Electric power consumption which is too high in relation to the
alternator capacity can cause discharging of the vehicle
batteries.
Temporarily raised idling speed prevents discharging of the
batteries, because a higher rotational speed increases the
charging capacity.
Raised idling speed

If the engine runs at a low load for an extended period of time,
the filter is heated automatically. The heating causes an increase
in the idling speed.
The function is called periodic hydrocarbon evaporation and is
used to prevent damage to the particulate filter and the
oxidation catalytic converter.
It is possible to prevent the need to run the function. This is
done by warming up the vehicle before the next extended
period of idling. Approximately 10 minutes of driving, e.g. on a
motorway, is sufficient.
Complete or cancel raised idling speed

It is recommended to allow the function to be completed
automatically to prevent damage, but it can also be cancelled.
226 Complete
Engine
Complete the function:

• To prevent damage to the vehicle, the function should be
allowed to run until finished, which takes about 15-30
minutes. You do not have to do anything. The function
will run and end automatically.
Cancel the function by doing one of the following:

• Release the parking brake.
• Engage a gear.
Hybrid
The vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and fitted with both a
combustion engine and an electric machine for vehicle
operation.
The electric drive system recovers brake energy by storing the
energy as electricity in the propulsion battery. This energy is
used by the electric machine to facilitate driving off and to
reduce the need for gear changes.
Driving hybrid vehicles

To reap the benefits of the electric drive system, you should
drive gently and with good forward planning.
The vehicle can be driven like a normal vehicle without taking
the electric drive system into account. Yet to reap the benefits of
the system or to avoid damaging it, Scania recommends driving
Complete
227
Engine
gently and with good forward planning. Brake gently and avoid
braking purely in order to charge the propulsion battery.
Note!
If the accelerator pedal is released when driving uphill and
no brake is applied, the vehicle may roll backwards.
When the propulsion battery charge is 0%, the electric machine

cannot aid in driving off the vehicle unless the combustion
engine is used. Starting the vehicle will feel more difficult than
it does when the electric machine helps.
Display of electric drive system for hybrid

Display of the electric drive system in the instrument cluster
must be activated manually. Use the OK button to set the
desired view.
Display in the instrument cluster
when the vehicle is driven in
b405667
electric drive.
When the vehicle is driven in electric drive, green arrows move

from left to right. From the propulsion battery to the electric
machine. The number of arrows shows how much power is
being taken from the propulsion battery to drive the vehicle.
228 Complete
Engine

when the hybrid battery is
b405666
charged.
When the propulsion battery is charging, blue arrows move

from right to left. From the combustion engine to the
propulsion battery.
Display of the brake energy recovery

Here information is displayed on brake energy recovery from
brake application and too harsh brake application.
The electric drive system recovers brake energy from brake
application with the brake pedal.

b405665
after brake application.
When the electric drive system recovers brake energy from

brake application, blue arrows move from right to left. From
the electric machine to the propulsion battery. The number of
arrows shows how much energy is being fed back to the
propulsion battery.
Complete
229
Engine
b405664
after too harsh brake application.
Too harsh brake application means the electric drive system

cannot handle all the brake energy. The number of yellow
arrows shows how harsh the brake application is. For fuel
efficient driving, only blue arrows must be displayed during
brake application.
Retarder for hybrid

The behaviour of the retarder in hybrid vehicles.
The retarder is used during brake application. Use positions 1-3
in order to only use the electric machine for brake application.
Position 3 is maximum braking force from the electric machine.
From position 4 and onwards, the exhaust brake is also used.
For more information, refer to the Retarder section.
Exhaust brake for hybrid

The behaviour of the exhaust brake in hybrid vehicles.
If the exhaust brake is activated, it assists during brake
application when the electric machine is not sufficient. The
exhaust brake can be deactivated.
For more information, refer to the Exhaust brake section.
230 Complete
Engine
Extra power using the electric drive system

The electric drive system can temporarily give the vehicle more
propulsion power than can be generated by the combustion
engine if the driver presses down the accelerator pedal into
kickdown position. Fuel consumption will increase when the
function is used.
Display of state of charge and distance to

empty
The distance that is displayed is calculated based on historic
consumption, current consumption and vehicle speed.
1. The hybrid battery’s state of
1 2
charge.
60% 7km
2. Distance remaining to drive
b405663
with electric drive.
The symbol for fault in the electric drive

system lights up yellow
b405517
Fault in the electric drive system.

It is possible to drive on, but some vehicle properties
may be impaired.
Complete
231
Engine
The symbol for fault in the electric drive

system lights up red
b405517
Fault in the electric drive system.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately and safely.
3. Tow the vehicle to a workshop with the half shafts
disengaged.
The symbol for deactivated electric drive

system lights up white
b405668
The electric drive system is deactivated.

The symbol for a charging fault lights up

yellow
When battery charging is limited or not working, the symbol is
shown together with a message in the instrument cluster.
232 Complete
Engine
b374078
Charging fault. The 24 V system batteries are not charging.

It is possible to drive on for up to 15 minutes before
certain vehicle properties become impaired.
Electric mode
In electric mode, the vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
The combustion engine is then paused and is disengaged from
the powertrain.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode, the combustion engine is paused when the
driver or a help system does not need engine power.
Automatic mode is selected when the vehicle is started. It is
always activated unless the driver actively chooses to change
mode with one of the switches. The vehicle is driven by electric
drive until the engine power is needed and the combustion
engine starts again.
The vehicle can start in electric mode directly at start-up if the
vehicle has been recently used, the engine is warm and the
battery charge is sufficient.
Complete
233
Engine
Activating and deactivating prioritised

electric drive
Prioritised electric drive forces the vehicle into electric mode in
which only the electric machine is used for propulsion.
Only use prioritised electric drive where silence or emissions-
free driving is a requirement.
b405521
• Activate prioritised electric drive: Press the switch.

When electric mode is activated, this is displayed in the
instrument cluster by a lightning bolt symbol being
added to the symbol for the selected performance mode.
The switch’s light-emitting diode is on when the
function is activated.

b405519
for activated electric mode.
If it is not possible to activate electric mode when the

prioritised electric drive switch is pressed, this is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The switch’s light-
emitting diode does not come on.
If the vehicle cannot activate electric mode due to too
low battery charge, the propulsion battery’s state of
charge changes colour to yellow.
234 Complete
Engine
b405516
when electric mode is not possible.
Prioritised electric drive is deactivated in the following way:

• Press the switch.
• Press the accelerator pedal to the kickdown position.
When electric mode is deactivated, the vehicle returns to

automatic mode.
Prioritised battery charging

Battery charging is prioritised over fuel saving.
Combustion engine shutdown is prevented. The function does
not need to be used in normal driving. The function increases
fuel consumption and impairs the vehicle’s response when
driving off.
Activating and deactivating prioritised

battery charging
b405520
Switch for prioritised battery charging.
• Activate prioritised battery charging: Press the switch.

When prioritised battery charging is activated, this is
displayed in the instrument cluster by the colour of the
Complete
235
Engine
propulsion battery’s state of charge changing to blue.

The switch’s light-emitting diode is on when the
function is activated.
Battery charging is deactivated automatically after 30
minutes.
b405518
during prioritised battery charging.
• Deactivate prioritised battery charging: Press the switch.
Starting the vehicle in electric mode

If the vehicle needs to be started silently or emission-free, it is
possible to start the vehicle directly in electric mode.
1. Turn the starter key to the drive position.
2. Press the switch for prioritised electric drive.
b405520
Prioritised electric drive.
3. Turn the starter key to the home position.
Reasons for limitations in electric mode

Electric mode cannot be used in certain situations.
• The speed is above 45 km/h.
• The retarder lever is in positions 4-6.
• ED power take-off is activated.
236 Complete
Engine
• The powertrain is not ready. This may be due to another

function using it.
• The battery’s charge level is too low.
• The combustion engine’s coolant temperature is colder
than -15 degrees.
• There is a vehicle fault which makes it impossible to
switch off the combustion engine.
Information that the function is limited is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
Electric mode in idle stop and start

If the idle stop and start function is deactivated with the switch,
electric mode can still be used.
The combustion engine will then go to idling instead of
stopping.
For more information, refer to the Idle stop and start section.
Complete
237
Engine
Idle stop and start
WARNING!
The idle stop and start function means that the engine can
restart automatically. For all service work, the vehicle
should be switched off with the starter key or control
switch.
The idle stop and start function reduces fuel consumption by

switching off the combustion engine when the vehicle does not
require engine power for a certain amount of time and starting
the engine again when engine power is needed.
The electric machine starts the combustion engine. If the
electric drive system is not available, only the starter motor will
be used.
Deactivating idle stop and start

Idle stop and start is automatically activated when starting the
vehicle and can be deactivated with a switch.
b405522
Idle stop and start
238 Complete
Engine
Activated combustion engine

The combustion engine continues to run or is forced to start
even if the idle stop and start function is activated when the
following occurs.
• Any system needs engine power.
• The electric drive system is inoperative.
• An ED power take-off is activated.
There are occasions when the vehicle will be shut off while the
combustion engine is paused. The vehicle must then be
restarted with the key.
The vehicle will be shut off when:
• Engine start is not permitted.
• An engine start fails.
The symbol for idle stop and start lights up

white
A number of messages associated with idle stop and start may be
b343891
The engine will automatically pause
Complete
239
Engine
• Idle stop and start is activated and the engine can be

started or shut off automatically.
Engine start is prevented.

• Automatic restart of combustion engine failed.
The vehicle is shut off

• The vehicle has been shut off during a pause. Restart the
vehicle with the key.
Electrical engine heater

The engine heater counteracts engine wear when starting the
vehicle from cold and therefore increases the engine service life.
Connecting the electrical engine heater

Connect the electrical engine heater to facilitate starting the
engine in cold weather.
b359617
Electrical input for the electrical engine heater.
1. Connect a connection cable between the electrical input

for the electrical engine heater and a 230 volt electrical
socket.
240 Complete
Engine
The electrical input for the electric heater is located on

the frame behind the cab on the driver’s side.
Operating time for electrical engine heater

The operating time should be adjusted based on the outside
temperature.
The recommended minimum times are:
Outdoor temperature Operating time
0-10°C 1 hour
-10°C 2 hours
-20°C 3 hours
Engine air cleaner
Blocked air filter cartridge

When the engine’s air filter cartridge is blocked, the engine will
not get sufficient air to operate optimally.
The following negative effects can occur:
• Fuel consumption increases.

• The amount of soot in the exhaust gases increases.
• The turbocharger may be damaged.
Complete
241
Engine
Symbol for blocked air filter cartridge lights

up white
b213055
The air filter cartridge is starting to get clogged.

The air filter cartridge must be renewed at the next workshop
visit.
Symbol for blocked air filter cartridge lights

up yellow
b213055
The air filter cartridge is clogged.

Drive to the nearest Scania workshop to renew the air filter
cartridge.
Renewing the air filter cartridge

The blocked air filter cartridge must be renewed to avoid
negative effects on the engine.
1. Contact a Scania workshop to renew the air filter
cartridge.
242 Complete
Engine
Radiator blind
IMPORTANT!
Use the radiator blind when the outdoor temperature is
constantly below +5°C. The radiator blind must be
removed when the outdoor temperature is above +5°C.
The blind that is attached to the radiator to minimise the

buildup of ice in the charge air cooler.
Risks when using the radiator blind.
If the radiator blind is used at outdoor temperatures above +5°C
there is a risk of:
• Increased fuel consumption
• Reduced engine power
If the radiator blind is not used at outdoor temperatures below

+5°C there is a risk of:
• Reduced engine power
• Engine damage
Fitting the radiator blind

The radiator blind is located with the tool kit.
1. Hook the radiator blind’s metal hooks in the insect
protection.
Complete
243
Engine
Start with the hooks on the upper part and fit them as
illustrated. Then fit the lower section hooks in the same
way.
For the radiator blind to give the desired effect, it must
be fitted completely flat against the insect protection.
Use the pair of holes appropriate

b379267
for the width of the radiator blind.
Fitting the radiator blind

The radiator blind is located with the tool kit.
1. Remove the lower metal hooks before fitting the radiator
blind so that the bottom part can be lowered down
behind the bumper.
The radiator blind is only fitted with the upper metal
hooks.
2. Attach the radiator blind by hooking the metal hooks of
the radiator blind into the insect protection on the
vehicle radiator as shown in the illustration.
For the radiator blind to give the desired effect, it must
be fitted completely flat against the insect protection.
244 Complete
Engine
Use the holes appropriate for the
b379265
width of the radiator blind.
Complete
245
Road holding
Road holding
Air suspension
Automatic vehicle level control

The ELC system controls the vehicle level by checking and
controlling the air pressure in the bellows at the same time as
measuring the vehicle level.
This ensures that the current vehicle level is maintained
regardless of the load on the axles. The ELC system detects the
vehicle level via electric sensors which are fitted on the frame
and are connected to each respective axle.
Slow vehicle level control

This function ensures that the vehicle level remains constant
regardless of the load on the axles.
The vehicle level is automatically controlled once a minute.
Slow vehicle level control only takes place when the speed is
above 1 km/h.
Fast vehicle level control

This function adjusts the vehicle level automatically to retain
the desired vehicle level during unloading and loading.
246 Complete
Road holding
Fast level control only takes places when the speed is lower than
1 km/h.
When the vehicle is completely stationary, the vehicle level is
automatically controlled once a second. Level control operates
automatically even when the standby function is activated.
Vehicle level when the power is activated

When the power is activated, the vehicle returns to the vehicle
level it was at before the power was switched off.
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, other alternatives may
apply.
Parking brake during vehicle level control

Applies during rear vehicle level control.
The front axle parking brake is released automatically during
rear level control and during load transfer and tag axle lift,
provided that the vehicle is stationary and the power is switched
on. This is intended to facilitate vehicle level control and
protect the frame.
The parking brake is applied again if any of the following occur:
• The speed is not 0.

• The Stop button on the operation unit is pressed.
Complete
247
Road holding
Axle weight distribution

The axle weight distribution function controls the load
distribution between the half shaft and tag axle.
The function can control the distribution in 2 ways depending

on the vehicle’s specification:
• Constant relation of distribution between the tag axle

and the half shaft.
• Distribution primarily to the half shaft.
The symbol for air suspension lights up

yellow
b373614
Fault in the air suspension system.

Alternative vehicle levels
Note!
The maximum permitted speed for changing vehicle levels
is 30 km/h.
248 Complete
Road holding
Note!
When the trailer is connected, the entire vehicle will return
to the preselected vehicle level. If the trailer is loaded when
it is connected, the load and the coupling may be damaged.
This symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster when

b373615
the vehicle is not at normal vehicle level.
An alternative vehicle level is a pre-defined vehicle level which

is different from the normal vehicle level.
Switching between alternative vehicle levels

You can switch between normal vehicle level and alternative
vehicle level using the switch. The switch adjusts the level of the
entire vehicle.
b358785
Alternative vehicle level switch.
• When you press the upper part of the switch, the vehicle
adopts the normal vehicle level.
• When you press the lower part of the switch, the vehicle
adopts an alternative vehicle level.
Complete
249
Road holding
Saving alternative vehicle levels

The switch allows you to set the vehicle at a previously saved
vehicle level. When you press the saved vehicle level, the
vehicle adopts that vehicle level.
b358724
Saved vehicle levels switch.
1. Set the axles to the required position

2. Hold the switch in for at least 5 seconds.
The symbol for vehicle level lights up yellow

b373615
• The vehicle is not at normal vehicle level, or

• Vehicle level 1 or vehicle level 2 is activated.
250 Complete
Road holding
Tag axle lift
b358781
Tag axle lift switch.

b358778
Tag axle lift, first axle.

b358780
Tag axle lift, last axle.

b358779
Tag axle lift on trailer.
The tag axle lift is a function to lift a tag axle from the ground.
Complete
251
Road holding
Raising and lowering the tag axle

The wheels must point straight ahead in the direction of travel
when raising or lowering the tag axle.
• Press the upper part of the switch to raise the tag axle.
When the tag axle is raised, the vehicle level can be
raised.
• Press the lower part of the switch to lower the tag axle.
When the vehicle is loaded, the options for lifting the tag axle
are limited.
The symbol for raised tag axle lights up

yellow
For tag axle on towing vehicle.
b374036
The tag axle on the towing vehicle is raised.
The symbol for raised tag axle lights up

yellow
For tag axle on full trailer.
252 Complete
Road holding
b200301
The tag axle on the full trailer is raised.
The symbol for blocked tag axle lift lights up

yellow
b374079
The tag axle lift cannot be used; it may cause the half shaft to be
overloaded.
Displaying vehicle weights
Displaying vehicle weight

The vehicle weights display shows you a snapshot of the
vehicle’s axle weight, load weight and gross weight.
You bring up the display by using the OK button and browsing
through the vehicle information menu.
b364742
Vehicle information
Complete
253
Road holding
The following applies to displaying vehicle weights:
• The axle weight is shown for those axles that have air
suspension.
• Load weight and gross weight are only shown for
vehicles with air suspension on all axles. The exception is
tractors with front leaf spring suspension and rear air
suspension in the following configurations 4x2, 6x2, 6x4,
6x2/2 and 6x2/4. In those cases, the load weight is shown
if the trailer has an axle weight display.
Displaying trailer weights

To get a complete display for different types of trailers, the
tractor must have EBS.
Resetting and calibrating the load weight

Reset the load weight with the vehicle unladen to see how much
a new load weighs.
You can also reset the cargo weight to see how much a number
of new items weigh when adding them to an existing load. Reset
before loading. Note that in this situation you can only see the
weight of the new load. The display of the other weights is not
affected by resetting.
1. Use the OK button when you are on the Load display
page to view the reset menu.
2. Under Settings there is the Axle weight calibration option.
Use this to calibrate the axle weight with an unladen
vehicle on a vehicle weighbridge.
254 Complete
Road holding
Calibration can give more exact values as the air bellows

can become stretched over time.
Examples of vehicle weights display

The illustration shows a complete display of all weights.
1 20.0
1. Load weight
2. Axle weight
5.0 2.0 3.0 10.0
3 3. Bogie weight
2 5.0
4
b401051
ton 40.0 4. Gross weight
The gross weight gives the vehicle’s weight at a specific time

and can therefore be different from time to time. The gross
weight must not be higher than the gross vehicle weight for
which the vehicle is designed and the vehicle weight that the
current road can carry. The gross vehicle weight is stated in the
vehicle registration document.
• For trailers, one weight is shown for the axles even if
there are several axles. The value refers to the combined
axle weight of all the axles.
• A lifted tag axle always gets a value of 0 kg.
• The axle weight can only be shown for those axles that
have air suspension.
Complete
255
Road holding
Axle weight regulation, tag axle
Note!
The other axles are loaded heavily if you empty the air
bellows when the vehicle is heavily laden. Manual
regulation should therefore only occur in the event of acute
need of increased grip with the driving wheels.
Note!
Reverse the vehicle carefully to prevent damage to the air
bellows of the tag axle from sharp or hard objects. Carry
out one of the following during loading.
1 2
1. Manual and automatic mode.
2. Regulate the axle weight on

b358625
the tag axle.
Using the switches, you can manually or automatically regulate

axle weight on the tag axle.
This is done by changing the air pressure in the air bellows.
The air pressure in the air bellows has only two modes – full or
empty. In empty mode, a low air pressure remains to protect the
air bellows from folding damage.
256 Complete
Road holding
Automatic mode for axle weight regulation

In automatic mode, axle weight regulation is completely
automatic.
The switch (1) is in automatic mode when the upper part of the
switch is depressed. The air bellows are filled when the vehicle
is heavily laden and emptied when the load is tilted.
Manual mode for axle weight regulation

Driving wheel grip increases when the tag axle air bellows are
emptied.
If automatic regulation is not satisfactory, or if the vehicle’s
driving wheels spin against the surface, use manual mode to
manually regulate the air pressure in the air bellows. The switch
(1) is in manual mode when the lock knob is pulled down MAN.
Activating and regulating manual axle

weight regulation
Proceed as follows to regulate air pressure in the air bellows.
1. Pull down the lock knob on the switch (1) and press the
lower part of the switch, MAN.
Manual mode is now activated.
2. Regulate the air pressure in the bellows with the switch
(2).
− Press the lower part of the switch (2) to fill the air
bellows.
Complete
257
Road holding
− Press the upper part of the switch to empty the air

bellows.
Important information about the tag axle

when loading
• Park the vehicle so that the wheels stand straight forward
in the direction of travel.
• Distribute the load evenly on the platform so that the
load is properly distributed on all axles.
• Avoid turning the steering wheel when the vehicle is
stationary.
Operation unit for air suspension
Note!
When the trailer is connected, the entire vehicle will return
to the preselected vehicle level. If the trailer is loaded when
it is connected, the load and the coupling may be damaged.
Note!
When blackout lighting is active, it is impossible to adjust
vehicle level with the air suspension operation unit. Use the
switches on the instrument panel when blackout lighting is
active.
258 Complete
Road holding
1 2 1. Front axle on vehicle
2. Rear axle on vehicle

3 4 3. Front axle on semi-trailer
5 6 4. Rear axle on semi-trailer
5. Adjusting height
7 8
6. Stop button
7. Memory levels
b401915
8. Return to normal vehicle level
You can use the operation unit to raise and lower the vehicle
and semi-trailer levels.
Activate the operation unit by pressing one of the axle selection
buttons. The vehicle speed must be less than 30 km/h in order
to change level.
Changing the vehicle level with the

operation unit for air suspension
1. Choose one or more axles that you want to change the
level of.
Corresponding indicator lamps come on for the selected
axles.
2. Press the buttons to raise or lower to the required level.
Complete
259
Road holding
Release the button to cancel. Press the stop button to

cancel an ongoing chassis movement.
Using memory levels for the operation unit

for air suspension
You can save 4 memory levels by programming them using the
operation unit.
Proceed as follows to save memory levels:
1. Activating the operation unit
2. Setting the axles to the required position
3. Press the memory level button for 5 seconds.
When the operation unit flashes, the level has been
saved.
Proceed as follows to activate a memory level:

1. Activate the operation unit.
2. Press the relevant memory level button.
Activating and deactivating standby for air

suspension
You can use the standby function to change and maintain the
vehicle and semi-trailer levels even if the vehicle’s power is
switched off.
• Activate: Press one of the level adjustment buttons
within 15 seconds of switching off the power with the
starter key.
260 Complete
Road holding
When the standby function is activated, the text Level

adjustment activated is displayed in the instrument cluster
for 5 seconds.
• Deactivate:
− Press the stop button for at least 2 seconds when
the operation unit is activated.
− Switch on the power.

The function is cancelled automatically after 59 minutes
or if there is a fault in the system.
At a workshop you can change the setting for the period after
which the standby function is cancelled. You can choose to have
it cancelled after 15 or 30 minutes instead.
Manual level control
Note!
When rapidly unloading heavy loads, in which tractors or
cranes lift the whole load in one go, it is advisable to lower
the vehicle level as much as possible. This is to avoid shock
to the air bellows when they expand.
Note!
The vehicle speed must be less than 30 km/h in order to
change vehicle level.
Complete
261
Road holding
Raising and lowering the vehicle level, rear

part
b358783
Raise and lower the rear part of the vehicle.

The vehicle’s rear section is raised or lowered.
If a change of vehicle level passes driving height, the function

stops automatically. To continue raising or lowering, press the
switch again.
Raising and lowering the vehicle level, front

part
b358782
Raise and lower the front part of the vehicle.
262 Complete
Road holding
The vehicle’s front section is raised or lowered.
If a change of vehicle level passes driving height, the function

stops automatically. To continue raising or lowering, press the
switch again.
Activating and cancelling the standby

function for vehicle level
You can change and retain the vehicle and semi-trailer levels
even if the vehicle’s power is switched off.
Activate the standby function:
1. Press one of the level adjustment buttons within
15 seconds of switching off the power with the starter
key.
When the standby function is activated, the text Level
adjustment active is displayed in the instrument cluster
for 5 seconds.
Cancel the standby function in one of the following ways:

• By pressing the stop button on the operation unit for at
least 2 seconds when the operation unit is activated.
• Switching on the power supply
• After 59 minutes.
Complete
263
Road holding
• If there is a fault in the system.
At a workshop the setting can be changed for the period after

which the standby function is cancelled. You can select to have
it cancelled after 15 or 30 minutes instead.
264 Complete
Mobility
Mobility
Selectable front wheel drive
IMPORTANT!
Only engage front wheel drive when the wheels have a
good grip on the road surface. If the wheels are skidding on
the road surface, the truck must be stationary before you
engage front wheel drive.
Examples of rotary controls for

differential locks and selectable
front wheel drive. The appearance
of the rotary control may vary
slightly from vehicle to vehicle
depending on the number of
b358898
differential locks.
The vehicle is equipped with selectable front wheel drive.

Selectable front wheel drive allows you to influence the
vehicle’s operating efficiency and mobility.
Engage front wheel drive when you are driving:
• off made-up roads (off-road).

• on slippery surfaces.
Complete
265
Mobility
• on very steep gradients.
Drive without front wheel drive on a normal road surface. It

provides better operating efficiency and makes the truck easier
to manoeuvre, especially at low vehicle speeds.
Engaging front wheel drive

Disengage front wheel drive as follows.
Only engage front wheel drive when the wheels have a good
grip on the road surface. If the wheels are skidding on the road
surface, the truck must be stationary before you engage front
wheel drive.
1. Use the differential lock rotary control.
Front wheel drive is engaged.
You can engage front wheel drive when the vehicle is moving,
but not when the wheels are spinning on the ground. Avoid
engaging front wheel drive at high vehicle speed or at high
engine speed as this puts a heavy load on the clutch and power
transmission.
Disengaging front wheel drive

Disengage front wheel drive as follows.
Disengage front wheel drive when it is not required.
1. Turn the rotary control
Front wheel drive is disengaged.
266 Complete
Mobility
The clutch does not need to be used.
If the vehicle is equipped with ABS, the front wheel drive will
be disengaged when the ABS system is controlling braking.
This is because the brake system needs to measure the
difference in speed between the front and rear axles. When ABS
control of the braking has finished and the wheels are rotating
at the same speed, the differential lock can be engaged again.
Front wheel drive status

The engagement sequence is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
1. Front wheel drive not
engaged.
2. Front wheel drive is engaged.
3. Front wheel drive engaged.
4. Front wheel drive is

disengaged.
5. Front wheel drive not

b212948
engaged.
Differential lock
WARNING!
The steering of the vehicle is impaired when the
differential lock is engaged.
Complete
267
Mobility
b358255
Rotary control for differential lock.
b387277
Rotary control for differential lock.
The differential lock is a device whose purpose is to counteract

different rotational speeds in the half shafts.
You can engage and disengage the differential lock via the
rotary control while driving provided that no wheels are
spinning. If you engage the differential lock when the wheels
are spinning, there is a risk of it being damaged. The
instrument cluster indicates whether the differential lock is
engaged or not.
Driving on good road surfaces with the differential lock
continually engaged increases fuel consumption and tyre wear
and can also shorten the service life of vehicle components.
268 Complete
Mobility
Symbol displayed in the instrument cluster when a
b374066
differential lock is engaged.
Differential lock on front axle

The differential lock on the front axle forces the right and left
front wheels to rotate at the same speed to increase mobility.
Differential lock on rear axle

The differential lock on the rear axle forces the right and left
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed to increase mobility.
Sequence of differential lock engagement

The differential lock engagement sequence on double-drive
bogie and transfer gearbox is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
1. Differential lock is not
engaged.
2. The differential lock is

engaged.
3. Differential lock is engaged.

disengaged.

b212741
engaged.
Complete
269
Mobility
Differential lock on double-drive bogie

The differential lock on the double-drive bogie forces the front
and rear half shafts to rotate at the same speed. The differential
lock provides better mobility without affecting the steering of
the vehicle.
Differential lock on the transfer gearbox

The differential lock in the transfer box forces the front and
rear axles to rotate at the same speed to improve mobility.
If the vehicle is equipped with ABS, the differential lock in the
transfer gearbox will be disengaged when the ABS system is
controlling braking. This is because the brake system needs to
measure the difference in speed between the front and rear
axles. When ABS control of the braking has finished and the
wheels are rotating at the same speed, the differential lock will
be automatically engaged again.
Sequence of differential lock engagement

The differential lock engagement sequence on double-drive
bogie and transfer gearbox is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
270 Complete
Mobility

engaged.

engaged.
3. Differential lock is engaged.

disengaged.

b212948
engaged.
The symbol for differential lock lights up

yellow
b374066
One or more longitudinal differential locks are engaged, but no

lateral differential lock.
The symbol for differential lock flashes

yellow
b374066
The symbol flashes yellow.
One or more lateral differential locks are engaged.

Also longitudinal differential locks may be engaged when the
symbol flashes.
Complete
271
Mobility
Low gear in transfer gearbox
IMPORTANT!
Low gear should be engaged in the transfer gearbox when
the vehicle is used off-road so as not to cause damage to the
transfer gearbox.
b358726

b390486
Engaging and disengaging low gear

You engage and disengage low gear in transfer gearbox with the
switch. The instrument cluster indicates whether low gear is
engaged or disengaged.
In order to engage and disengage low gear in transfer gearbox,
the following conditions must be met:
• Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
• The vehicle must be completely stationary.
• The normal gear lever must be in neutral.
272 Complete
Mobility
Drive wheel disengagement
IMPORTANT!
If the vehicle is without power or without compressed air,
the propeller shafts on both the front and rear axle must be
detached before towing. This must be done when towing
both with and without a raised front axle.
IMPORTANT!
As long as drive wheel disengagement is activated, the main
gearbox must also be in neutral. Otherwise the transfer
gearbox will be damaged due to a lack of lubrication. This
does not apply to special models which are equipped with a
power take-off or integrated oil pump.
b358899
Drive wheel disengagement switch
Symbol that is displayed when the transfer gearbox is in

b383892
the neutral position.

b390487
Complete
273
Mobility
Symbol that is displayed when the transfer gearbox is in

b383892 the neutral position
Drive wheel disengagement means that you can put the transfer
box into neutral during towing or when you are using a power
take-off on the transfer gearbox.
The transfer gearbox symbol lights up white

b383892
Symbol lights up white
The transfer gearbox is in neutral.
Activating drive wheel disengagement

Avoid damage to the main gearbox and the transfer gearbox
when towing by first taking the following action.
If the transfer gearbox is fitted with a power take-off, take the
following action before activating the power take-off.
2. Put the gear lever in neutral position and the range
switch in its upper position, high range area.
− If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox,
put the drive mode selector in neutral.
274 Complete
Mobility
3. Activate the switch for drive wheel disengagement.

The instrument cluster indicates that the drive has been
disengaged.
Deactivating drive wheel disengagement

Deactivate drive wheel disengagement in order to engage the
drive on the wheels.
1. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox,
activate the gearbox neutral position.
3. Depress the brake pedal and hold it in the depressed
position.
4. Reset the drive wheel disengagement switch to inactive
position.
The green LED of the switch goes out.
The instrument cluster indicates that the drive is
engaged.
Complete
275
Mobility
ESP
WARNING!
Do not connect to several trailers with different brake
systems. If this occurs it can create dangerous traffic
conditions.
ESP activates the service brake on the relevant wheel and the
trailer brakes.
ESP can also reduce the engine torque. ESP reduces the risk of
the vehicle skidding or overturning.
Drive carefully when you have a moving load or when the load
has a high centre of gravity.
If you experience ESP is activated sooner or later than expected,
this may be due to one of the following:
• Choice of tyre
• Load
• Vehicle wear
• Driving style
The symbol flashes in the instrument cluster when ESP

b357932
is activated.
276 Complete
Mobility
ESP cannot be switched off

ESP on your vehicle cannot be switched off.
On some vehicles, the ESP settings can be changed so that it
can be switched off using the Traction Control (TC) switch.
Contact your Scania workshop.
Switching off ESP temporarily

ESP on your vehicle can temporarily be switched off.
b387278
Switch for traction control.
1. Hold in the switch for 3 seconds to switch off ESP.

The following symbol lights up yellow in the instrument
cluster when ESP is switched off.
b387274
The symbol shows a yellow light when ESP is off.
For more information, see the Traction Control (TC) section.
Switching off ESP temporarily

ESP on your vehicle can temporarily be switched off.
Complete
277
Mobility
Rotary control for differential locks
b387277
with a button for traction control.
1. Hold in the button for 3 seconds to switch off ESP.

The following symbol lights up yellow in the instrument
cluster when ESP is switched off.
For more information, see the Traction Control (TC) section.
The symbol for ESP lights up yellow

b357932
This is a fault in the vehicle’s Electronic Stability Programme

(ESP).
For more information, refer to the section ESP.
Traction Control (TC)

Traction control is a function that prevents wheels from
skidding.
278 Complete
Mobility
Traction control prevents wheel spin on the driving wheels by

reducing the engine torque and braking spinning wheels.
Traction control also prevents the driving wheels from locking
if you brake with the retarder or release the accelerator pedal
too rapidly. This is achieved by increasing the engine torque
when there is a tendency for the wheels to lock.
Overall this provides the following benefits:
• Better stability with a reduced risk of skidding.

• Improved hill-climbing ability.
• Easier to drive off from a stationary position.
• Reduced wear on tyres and powertrain.
• Maintained steerability when driving with the
differential lock engaged.
Traction control is normally engaged.
Traction control symbol

The symbol flashes in the instrument cluster when traction
control is activated.
b357932
Traction control symbol.
Complete
279
Mobility
The symbol may also flash in the instrument cluster when ESP
is active. For more information, refer to the section ESP.
If there is a risk of the wheels locking when you change down or
use the retarder with a gear engaged, the engine torque
increases automatically.
Control for traction control

The control for the traction control is located in the rotary
control for the differential locks or in a separate switch. The
vehicle’s powertrain, gearboxes and all-wheel drive (if fitted)
determine the design and location of the controls.
b353466

b358255
Control for traction control

The control for the traction control is located in the rotary
control for the differential locks or in a separate switch. The
280 Complete
Mobility
vehicle’s powertrain, gearboxes and all-wheel drive (if fitted)

determine the design and location of the controls.
b387278

b387277
Activating traction control off-road mode

Activate off-road mode to maximise vehicle mobility in difficult
driving conditions on uneven roads or off-road.
1. A short press on the control will activate off-road mode.
Use off-road mode when driving in sand, gravel or deep
snow, for example.
The symbol lights white when off-road mode is

b387276
activated.
Complete
281
Mobility
When off-road mode is active, more wheel spin is

allowed.
Off-road mode when Opticruise performance

mode is activated
Off-road mode is activated automatically if O performance
mode, off-road is activated.
1. A short press on the control will return to normal mode.
For more information, refer to the section Opticruise. The

functionality can be adjusted at a Scania workshop.
Switching off traction control

1. Press the control to switch off traction control.
A symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Switching off traction control

1. Press on the control and keep it pressed in for 3 seconds
to switch off traction control.
A symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Traction control switched off symbol

This symbol is shown in the instrument cluster when the
traction control is switched off.
282 Complete
Mobility
The symbol shows a yellow light when traction control

b387275
is off.
Traction control switched off symbols

The following symbols are shown in the instrument cluster
when the traction control is switched off.

b387274
is off.

b387275
is off.
Activating roller brake test mode

This mode can be used during roller brake tests or when
washing wheels.
The TC function can be deactivated and the wheel allowed to
rotate at different speeds in relation to the front axle.
1. Depress the brake pedal. At the same time, press the
switch for six seconds and less than nine seconds.
The symbol is displayed with a text in the instrument

b387275
cluster when roller brake test mode is activated.
Complete
283
Mobility
When the roller brake test mode is activated, the hill

hold, autohold and bus stop brake functions are
deactivated.
Roller brake test mode can be used when performing a
roller brake test or when washing wheels.
Deactivating roller brake test mode

• Short press on the switch.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h, roller brake test
mode is deactivated automatically.
Activating workshop mode

Workshop mode should not be activated in normal operating
conditions.
In workshop mode, vehicle braking is based on maximum
permitted load and the calibrated functions in the brake system.
• Depress the brake pedal. At the same time, press the
switch for more than nine seconds. The wheel speed on
the front axle may not exceed 5 km/h
Deactivating workshop mode

• Short press on the switch.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h, workshop mode is
deactivated automatically.
284 Complete
Mobility
EST
WARNING!
Never stay in the vicinity of the tag axle wheel housing
without the battery master switch being off, as there is a
risk of crush injury.
EST, electrohydraulic steered tag axle, which enables a smaller

turning radius and reduces tyre wear when manoeuvring.
Self-test of EST
• When the power is turned on the EST system carries

out a self-test which takes about 5 seconds. During the
test, whining and clicking sounds may occur. This is
normal.
The symbol for EST lights up yellow

b200356
There is a fault in the steered tag axle in the EST system.

The vehicle may still be driven but increased tyre wear
may occur.
Complete
285
Mobility
The EST symbol lights up red
b200356
There is a serious fault in the steered tag axle in the EST

system.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe place.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Switch off the voltage.
4. Switch on the voltage.
When the voltage is activated again, the system will
automatically troubleshoot and perform diagnostics
itself. Whining and clicking sounds may occur. This is
normal and troubleshooting takes approximately 1
minute. Allow the test to complete.
5. Contact a Scania workshop if the fault persists after
troubleshooting.
− If it is possible to raise the tag axle, raise the tag axle
and drive to a Scania workshop.
− If it is not possible to raise the tag axle, the vehicle

must not be driven. Request recovery.
286 Complete
Gear changing and braking

Gear changing
IMPORTANT!
The engine must be running and the clutch pedal must be
released when towing or moving. Otherwise the oil pump is
not driven, which may cause the gearbox to be damaged. If
it is not possible to run the engine, the propeller shaft or
half shafts must be removed.
Gearbox
The gearbox consists of a 4-speed main gearbox with crawl
gear, a 2-speed range part and a reverse gear.
5 3
1 8
RL 6 4
2
b203761
C
Gear lever position
Complete
287
Gearbox
The gearbox consists of a 4-speed main gearbox with a 2-speed
range part and a reverse gear.
H
8
7
7
6
H
5
L 4
3
2 8
L
141 506
1
b204295
Gear lever position
Gearbox
The gearbox consists of a 3-speed main gearbox with crawl
gear, 2-speed range part, 2-speed splitter gear and a reverse
gear.
288 Complete
5H
5L
1 2H
2L
6H
6L
RH 4H
3H
RL 4L
2 3L
1H
1L
CH
CL
b203762
1. Splitter
2. Range
Gearbox
The gearbox consists of a 3-speed main gearbox with a 2-speed
range part, 2-speed splitter gear and a reverse gear.
Complete
289
5H
1 5L
2H
2L
6H
6L
2 RH 4H
3H
RL 4L
3L
1H
b203760
1L
1. Splitter
2. Range
Servo-assisted gear shift system

The vehicle is equipped with a servo-assisted gear shift system.
The servo-assisted gear shift system facilitates gear changing by
strengthening the power applied to the gear lever. This means
that less power than normal is required to change gear.
If too much power is applied to the gear lever, the servo-assisted
gear shift system will shut down to protect the gearbox. It is
activated again once the power on the gear lever is reduced. If
the servo-assisted gear shift system is shut down, gear shifting
will become very stiff.
290 Complete
Engine overspeed protection

To protect the engine and clutch against engine overspeed, the
vehicle comes with engine overspeed protection.
It prevents gear shifting if the speed is too high for the desired
gear by locking the gear lever in the neutral position. Select a
higher gear or reduce the speed to release the gear lever.
Crawl gear
The crawl gears are for extremely heavy starts and operating at
crawling speed.
Do not use the crawl gears to come loose when the vehicle has
got stuck. The crawl gears are so low that they are only
required in exceptional circumstances.
Crawl gear
The crawl gears are for extremely heavy starts and operating at
crawling speed.
Do not use the crawl gears to come loose when the vehicle has
got stuck. The crawl gears are so low that they are only
required in exceptional circumstances.
You can choose between high and low splitter gear ratio when
driving in crawl gears.
Complete
291
Changing gear with the range gear

The range gear doubles the gear steps in the main gearbox. The
switch between high and low range takes place when the gear
lever passes the neutral position.
Reverse gear must be used only in low range so that the gearbox
is not damaged.
Always start in low range with first gear selected when the
vehicle is loaded to prevent overloading of the clutch and
gearbox.
Proceed as follows to change between high and low range:
1. Select high or low range using the switch on the gear
lever.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Move the gear lever to the neutral position and then on
to the required gear position (e.g. back to the previous
position).
4. Release the clutch pedal.
Gear shift interlock when engaging range

gear
The vehicle is equipped with a gear shift interlock that locks the
gear lever in neutral position while engaging range gear.
292 Complete
When the range gear is engaged, the catch releases and gear
shifting can continue.
In cold climates it can sometimes be a problem when changing
down to the low range. The gear shift interlock will then release
after 3 seconds to allow the gear lever to be moved to a gear
position. The gear lever must then be moved back to neutral
position to start making a new attempt to change down to low
range.
Changing gear with the splitter gear

The splitter gear splits each gear ratio into high and low. The
switch between high and low splitter gear ratio takes place when
you depress the clutch pedal.
Do the following to change between high and low splitter gear
ratio:
1. Select splitter gear using the switch on the gear lever.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
Low range interlock

The low range interlock is engine overspeed protection that
prevents application of the low range if the vehicle speed is too
high.
To protect the engine and clutch against engine overspeed, the
vehicle comes with low range interlock. It prevents changing
Complete
293
down to the low range, if the speed is too high, by locking the
gear lever in the neutral position. The gear lever is locked until
the speed is reduced and the low range can be engaged, or until
the high range is selected.
The symbol for a gear change system fault is

displayed
With certain faults in the gear change system, range gear
changing is blocked completely.
b374155
The symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Fault in the gear change system. Range gear changing is

blocked completely.
If high range is blocked and you must switch to low range to
drive the vehicle to the workshop, you can test the following
procedure.
4. Release the clutch.
5. Turn the key to the drive position.
294 Complete
6. Engage low range within 10 seconds of turning the key

to the drive position.
Gear when parking

Always park with the gear lever in the neutral position and the
low range selected.
Gear when towing

High range must be engaged when tow-starting and shunting
the vehicle.
The engine must be running and the clutch pedal must be
released when towing or moving. Otherwise the oil pump is not
driven, which may cause the gearbox to be damaged. If it is not
possible to run the engine, the propeller shaft or half shafts
must be removed.
Adjusting the gear lever

Contact a Scania workshop if you want to adjust the position of
the gear lever.
The symbol for the clutch lights up yellow

when driving
b374059
Complete
295
Unintended clutch slippage.

• The engine power is temporarily reduced for some
engine types.

when starting
b374059
The clutch has been exposed to unnecessary wear.
The symbol for the gearbox lights up white

b374109
Information about the gearbox.
The symbol for the gearbox lights up yellow

b374155
Fault on the gearbox.
296 Complete

Pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster
display.
The symbol for the gearbox temperature

lights up yellow
b374074
High oil temperature in gearbox.

1. Select neutral and increase the engine speed to approx.
1,500 rpm.
After a couple of minutes the temperature returns to
normal levels.
Clutch monitoring
Clutch monitoring reduces wear and tear on the clutch by
limiting engine speed when starting from a stationary position.
The clutch is exposed to wear when starting with a heavy load.
The function affects the engine speed so that it will not be too
high when starting from a stationary position. The maximum
engine speed is limited to 750 rpm by the function. In some
situations it will be necessary to increase engine speed.
Complete
297
Increasing the maximum engine speed for

clutch monitoring
In some situations where more performance is needed, you can
increase the maximum engine speed for clutch monitoring in
the following way.
If you lock one of the differential locks in a rear axle, the
maximum engine speed limit is increased to 1,100 rpm.
Performance increases in this mode. You can only increase the
engine speed when the differential lock is locked.
1. Select one of the differential locks for the rear axle.
It may take a while before the differential lock is locked.
Temporarily increasing the engine speed for

clutch monitoring
In some situations where more performance is needed, you can
temporarily increase the engine speed for clutch monitoring in
the following way.
• Press down and hold the accelerator pedal in kickdown
position.
The engine speed then slowly increases, reaching 1,100
rpm at the most.
• Release the accelerator pedal.
The increase in engine speed stops. The temporary
increase in engine speed is active until the vehicle
reaches 10 km/h.
298 Complete
Collapsible gear lever

The gear lever is collapsible to free up space in the cab.
Folding the collapsible gear lever up and

down
Fold down the gear lever to free up space in the cab.
1
b384706
Collapsible gear lever
Fold up the gear lever:

1. Fold the gear lever up until it clicks.
The gear lever is now locked in the upright position.
Fold down the gear lever:

1. Pull the catch upwards.
The gear lever’s folding mechanism is now unlocked.
2. Fold the gear lever down towards the floor.
Complete
299
Opticruise
Opticruise is a system which allows a manual gearbox to change
gear automatically.
The vehicle may be equipped with a low cruising speed
function. Low cruising speed means that the vehicle calculates
when it is possible to save fuel by reducing the engine speed
more than normal at low loads. Low cruising speed is only
engaged if you drive with Opticruise in automatic mode.
Using the Opticruise lever

With the Opticruise lever you can choose drive mode, change
gear and switch between automatic and manual gear changing.
1 2
1. Drive mode selector.
2. Changing up and down.
3. Automatic gear changing, A ,

b363530
3
or manual gear changing, M .
• Move the drive mode selector towards the steering wheel

before turning it to position R.
• Move the Opticruise lever towards you to change up (+)
or away from you to change down (-).
300 Complete
• Select between automatic gear changing, A, or manual

gear changing, M.
The Opticruise lever can appear differently depending on the

vehicle’s configuration.
Displaying Opticruise
The instrument cluster shows information and error messages
for Opticruise.
1. Current gear
2. Drive position
3
2
b363536
3. Next gear
for Opticruise.
1 1. Current gear
2
3 2. Drive position
b363949
3. Next gear
Starting the vehicle

The drive mode selector must be in the neutral position, N,
when starting the vehicle.
Complete
301
1. Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to

neutral position, N.
2. Turn the key to the start position.
forward drive mode, D.
4. Accelerate and drive off.
The vehicle will only start with the drive mode selector in
Parking
The drive mode selector must be in neutral position, N, when
parking the vehicle.
If the drive mode selector is not in neutral position when the

key is turned to the lock position, the system puts the gearbox
into neutral position. However, the drive mode selector on the
Opticruise lever remains in the position you left it.
Selecting drive mode

The selected drive mode enables reversing, driving forwards or
idling.
There are three drive modes:
302 Complete
• Drive D
• Neutral N
• Reverse R
• Drive: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to forward drive mode, D.
The behaviour in Drive, D, depends on whether you
have selected automatic or manual gear changing. Do
not leave the vehicle stationary in forward drive mode,
D.
• Neutral: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to neutral position, N.
• Reverse: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to reverse mode, R.
You can select R while driving, but reverse gear will not
be engaged until the vehicle has stopped.
Activate low reverse and high reverse

On gearboxes with a splitter gear, you can select between low
reverse (R1) and high reverse (R2).
• To select low reverse, move the Opticruise lever away
from you.
Complete
303
• To select high reverse, move the Opticruise lever

towards you.
You can switch between low reverse and high reverse when the
vehicle is moving. Opticruise will automatically select the
reverse gear you used last, the next time you select reverse, R.
Gear changing positions

The vehicle has two gear change modes, automatic and manual
gear changing.
Automatic gear changing
• In automatic gear change mode, A, Opticruise changes

gear automatically. You can influence the choice of gear
within certain limits by moving the Opticruise lever
towards or away from you.
• You can influence the behaviour of automatic gear
changing by choosing a performance mode.
Manual gear changing
• In manual gear change mode, M, you select the gear

manually but Opticruise changes gear, provided the
selection is reasonable in relation to the vehicle speed.
• Opticruise will change the same number of gears up or
down as the number of times you move the Opticruise
lever towards or away from you. Opticruise can skip
gears.
304 Complete
Switching between automatic and manual

gear changing
Use the A/M button for switching between automatic and
manual gear changing.
1. Press the A/M button on the Opticruise lever.
In the standard and economy performance modes,
manual gear changing can be blocked at speeds above
50 km/h.
Activating kickdown
Activate kickdown to change down when you need more power.
1. Activate automatic gear changing.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal completely.
It is not possible to use kickdown in economy mode.
The vehicle can be set so that kickdown is deactivated. Contact

a Scania workshop to activate kickdown.
Performance modes
There are 4 performance modes in total and a vehicle can be set
to have 1, 2 or 3 performance modes.
• Standard mode: In standard performance mode the
vehicle is adapted for driving to suit most situations.
• Power mode: In power mode, traction and acceleration
performance are prioritised over fuel consumption.
Power mode is adapted for driving on roads with many
Complete
305
hills. When power mode is combined with automatic

gear changing, A, gear changing takes less time and takes
place at higher engine speeds. This improves the pulling
power. Changing down will take place earlier than in
standard mode as well.
• Economy mode: In economy mode, low fuel
consumption and driver comfort are prioritised above
acceleration and vehicle performance. Economy mode is
adapted for long distance haulage and for driving in light
traffic at a steady speed. A speed limitation may be added
in this mode. It is not possible to use Kickdown.
• Off-road mode: In off-road mode, the vehicle is adapted
for driving on hilly roads with poor surfaces. Quick gear
changing and closed powertrain are prioritised.
The vehicle can be set so that one or more performance modes

cannot be selected. Contact a Scania workshop to change
performance mode availability.
Selecting performance mode

The active performance mode is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
1. Press on quick choice to select a performance mode.
The symbol for standard mode lights up

white
In standard performance mode the vehicle is adapted for driving
to suit most situations.
306 Complete
b363535
The standard mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
The symbol for power mode lights up white

When power mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is blue.
b363534
The power mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
The symbol for economy mode lights up

white
When economy mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is green.
b363533
The economy mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
Complete
307
The symbol for off-road mode lights up

white
When off-road mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is brown.
b363532
The off-road mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
Manoeuvring mode, m
Manoeuvring mode is used, e.g. for shunting, precision driving
and when coupling a trailer.
When manoeuvring mode is activated, m is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The manoeuvring mode is automatically
deactivated in high range.
Behaviour when manoeuvring mode is active:
• Accelerator pedal behaviour is adapted for precision

driving.
• The clutch opens automatically when the engine speed
approaches idling speed.
• When changing between reverse gear and forward gear,
the vehicle remembers the latest forward gear engaged
rather than the set starting gear, provided that the
forward gear is lower than the set or automatic starting
gear.
308 Complete
Activate and deactivate manoeuvring mode

Use the Opticruise lever to activate and deactivate manoeuvring
mode.
1. Activate: Press down and hold the Opticruise lever until
m is displayed for the selected gear in the instrument
cluster.
2. Deactivate: Press the Opticruise lever up once.
m will go out in the instrument cluster.
Limp home mode, L

Limp home mode is an emergency gear changing mode that is
activated manually in the event of a serious vehicle fault and
which allows the vehicle to be driven, sometimes at a reduced
speed.
Limp home mode is used to move the vehicle short distances.
Limp home mode must only be used if both manual and
automatic gear changing are not operational.
Activating limp home mode

Activate limp home mode to move the vehicle short distances.
Complete
309
IMPORTANT!
Check that there is enough clutch fluid before driving in
limp home mode. The clutch must be operable. Otherwise
the powertrain could be exposed to further damage.

2. Turn the key to the lock position.
3. Make sure that the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever is in neutral position.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Move the Opticruise lever away from you and keep it in
that position.
6. Turn the key to the drive position and wait until you
hear a buzzer.
7. Release the Opticruise lever.
8. Move the Opticruise lever immediately away from you
again.
When limp home mode is activated, NL is displayed in
310 Complete
WARNING!
Release the Opticruise lever and move it away from you as
soon as the buzzer tone is heard, otherwise the limp home
mode will not be activated.
Limp home mode is active until the key is turned to the locked
position.
Driving in limp home mode
WARNING!
Be prepared to turn the key to the locked position when
you stop. There is a risk that you will not be able to engage
neutral when driving in the limp home mode. If that
occurs, the vehicle will continue forwards as long as the
engine is running.
1. Turn the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to

drive position.
The lowest possible starting gear is selected
automatically.
2. Select manual gear changing, M.
3. Keep your foot lightly on the accelerator pedal and turn
the key to the start position.
Complete
311
The vehicle starts moving forward with the help of the

starter motor and the engine starts.
4. Change up to a suitable gear.
5. To deactivate limp home mode, turn the key to the
locked position.
Limited performance, C
Limited performance is activated in the event of certain
Opticruise faults.
Limited performance, C, cannot be manually selected via the
Opticruise lever; instead it is activated in the event of certain
Opticruise faults. When the mode is active, gear changes are
carried out more slowly.
For information on actions when limited performance is active,
see the The symbol for Opticruise faults lights up yellow section.
Setting the starting gear

Depending on the vehicle configuration the selection
possibilities for the starting gear may differ.
When vehicles are heavily laden, 1st or 2nd gear must be used
as the starting gear. Otherwise the clutch will be exposed to
excessive wear.
312 Complete
2. Select the starting gear in the instrument cluster.

Navigate in the menu Settings > Vehicle > Starting gear
and select gear.
If you want to start in another gear than that set, engage the
desired gear and then start the vehicle. The setting is not saved.
Contact a Scania workshop to change starting gear availability.
Starting in a gear other than the automatic

gear
With automatic starting gear, the vehicle selects the starting
gear according to factors such as road gradient and total vehicle
weight.
Proceed as follows if you want to start in a gear other than the
automatic gear:
1. Engage the desired gear and then start the vehicle.
The setting is not saved.
Engaging crawl gears

There are two crawl gears, low crawl CL and high crawl CH.
Note that m for manoeuvring mode will not be shown in the
instrument cluster if a crawl gear is selected.
Complete
313
IMPORTANT!
Avoid selecting a crawl gear while the vehicle is in motion.
This can cause a scraping noise in the gearbox and at worst
damage to the gearbox. The reason for this is that the crawl
gears have no synchromesh and are extremely low.

2. Push the Opticruise lever away from you until the
required crawl gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When a crawl gear is engaged, you can change up both
with automatic gear changing, A, and manual gear
changing, M.

b374109
314 Complete
The symbol for Opticruise fault lights up

yellow
b374155
Opticruise faults.
2. Turn the key to the lock position and wait for a few
seconds so that the vehicle is switched off completely.
If neither manual nor automatic gear changing is operable, you

can activate the limp home mode to move the vehicle. For more
information, see Activate limp home mode in the Opticruise
section.

lights up yellow
b374074
Complete
315

1,500 rpm.
normal levels.
Opticruise
Opticruise is a system which allows a manual gearbox to change
gear automatically.
The vehicle may be equipped with a low cruising speed
function. Low cruising speed means that the vehicle calculates
when it is possible to save fuel by reducing the engine speed
more than normal at low loads. Low cruising speed is only
engaged if you drive with Opticruise in automatic mode.
Using the Opticruise lever

With the Opticruise lever you can choose drive mode, change
gear and switch between automatic and manual gear changing.
1 2
1. Drive mode selector.
2. Changing up and down.
3. Automatic gear changing, A ,

b363530
3
or manual gear changing, M .
• Move the drive mode selector towards the steering wheel

before turning it to position R.
316 Complete
• Move the Opticruise lever towards you to change up (+)

or away from you to change down (-).
• Select between automatic gear changing, A, or manual
gear changing, M.
The Opticruise lever can appear differently depending on the

vehicle’s configuration.
for Opticruise.
1. Current gear
2. Drive position
3
2
b363536
3. Next gear
for Opticruise.
1 1. Current gear
2
3 2. Drive position
b363949
3. Next gear
Complete
317
Starting the vehicle

The drive mode selector must be in the neutral position, N,
when starting the vehicle.
2. Turn the key to the start position.
forward drive mode, D.
4. Accelerate and drive off.
Parking
The drive mode selector must be in neutral position, N, when
parking the vehicle.
If the drive mode selector is not in neutral position when the

key is turned to the lock position, the system puts the gearbox
into neutral position. However, the drive mode selector on the
Opticruise lever remains in the position you left it.
318 Complete
Selecting drive mode

The selected drive mode enables reversing, driving forwards or
idling.
There are three drive modes:
• Drive D
• Neutral N
• Reverse R
• Drive: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to forward drive mode, D.
The behaviour in Drive, D, depends on whether you
have selected automatic or manual gear changing. Do
not leave the vehicle stationary in forward drive mode,
D.
• Neutral: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to neutral position, N.
When you set the drive mode selector to the neutral
position, N you can select high split (+) or low split (-)
on gearboxes fitted with a splitter gear.
• Reverse: Set the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever to reverse mode, R.
You can select R while driving, but reverse gear will not
be engaged until the vehicle has stopped.
Complete
319
Activate low reverse and high reverse

On gearboxes with a splitter gear, you can select between low
reverse (R1) and high reverse (R2).
• To select low reverse, move the Opticruise lever away
from you.
• To select high reverse, move the Opticruise lever
towards you.
You can switch between low reverse and high reverse when the
vehicle is moving. Opticruise will automatically select the
reverse gear you used last, the next time you select reverse, R.
Gear changing positions

The vehicle has two gear change modes, automatic and manual
gear changing.
The clutch pedal only needs to be used when required. To
assume manual control of the clutch with the clutch pedal, press
it down completely. The control is maintained until the clutch
pedal is released completely.
Automatic gear changing
• In automatic gear change mode, A, Opticruise changes

gear automatically. You can influence the choice of gear
within certain limits by moving the Opticruise lever
towards or away from you.
• You can influence the behaviour of automatic gear
changing by choosing a performance mode.
320 Complete
• If you have taken manual control of the clutch with the

clutch pedal and slip the clutch, Opticruise is allowed to
change gear. The control is then handed back to you.
Manual gear changing
• In manual gear change mode, M, you select the gear

manually but Opticruise changes gear, provided the
selection is reasonable in relation to the vehicle speed.
• Opticruise will change the same number of gears up or
down as the number of times you move the Opticruise
lever towards or away from you. Opticruise can skip
gears.
• If you have taken manual control of the clutch with the
clutch pedal and slip the clutch, Opticruise is not allowed
to change gear until the clutch pedal is completely
depressed or released.
Switching between automatic and manual

gear changing
Use the A/M button for switching between automatic and
manual gear changing.
1. Press the A/M button on the Opticruise lever.
In the standard and economy performance modes,
manual gear changing can be blocked at speeds above
50 km/h.
Activating kickdown
Activate kickdown to change down when you need more power.
Complete
321
1. Activate automatic gear changing.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal completely.
It is not possible to use kickdown in economy mode.
The vehicle can be set so that kickdown is deactivated. Contact

a Scania workshop to activate kickdown.
Performance modes
There are 4 performance modes in total and a vehicle can be set
to have 1, 2 or 3 performance modes.
• Standard mode: In standard performance mode the
vehicle is adapted for driving to suit most situations.
• Power mode: In power mode, traction and acceleration
performance are prioritised over fuel consumption.
Power mode is adapted for driving on roads with many
hills. When power mode is combined with automatic
gear changing, A, gear changing takes less time and takes
place at higher engine speeds. This improves the pulling
power. Changing down will take place earlier than in
standard mode as well.
• Economy mode: In economy mode, low fuel
consumption and driver comfort are prioritised above
acceleration and vehicle performance. Economy mode is
adapted for long distance haulage and for driving in light
traffic at a steady speed. A speed limitation may be added
in this mode. It is not possible to use Kickdown.
322 Complete
• Off-road mode: In off-road mode, the vehicle is adapted

for driving on hilly roads with poor surfaces. Quick gear
changing and closed powertrain are prioritised.
The vehicle can be set so that one or more performance modes

cannot be selected. Contact a Scania workshop to change
performance mode availability.
Selecting performance mode

The active performance mode is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
1. Press on quick choice to select a performance mode.
The symbol for standard mode lights up

white
In standard performance mode the vehicle is adapted for driving
to suit most situations.
b363535
The standard mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
The symbol for power mode lights up white

When power mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is blue.
Complete
323
b363534
The power mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
The symbol for economy mode lights up

white
When economy mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is green.
b363533
The economy mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
The symbol for off-road mode lights up

white
When off-road mode is active, the background lighting in the
instrument cluster is brown.
b363532
The off-road mode is active and is shown in the instrument

cluster.
324 Complete
Manoeuvring mode, m
Manoeuvring mode is used, e.g. for shunting, precision driving
and when coupling a trailer.
When manoeuvring mode is activated, m is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The manoeuvring mode is automatically
deactivated in high range.
Behaviour when manoeuvring mode is active:
• Accelerator pedal behaviour is adapted for precision

driving.
• The clutch opens automatically when the engine speed
approaches idling speed.
• When changing between reverse gear and forward gear,
the vehicle remembers the latest forward gear engaged
rather than the set starting gear, provided that the
forward gear is lower than the set or automatic starting
gear.
Activate and deactivate manoeuvring mode

Use the Opticruise lever to activate and deactivate manoeuvring
mode.
1. Activate: Press down and hold the Opticruise lever until
m is displayed for the selected gear in the instrument
cluster.
2. Deactivate: Press the Opticruise lever up once.
m will go out in the instrument cluster.
Complete
325
Limp home mode, L

Limp home mode is an emergency gear changing mode that is
activated manually in the event of a serious vehicle fault and
which allows the vehicle to be driven, sometimes at a reduced
speed.
Limp home mode is used to move the vehicle short distances.
Limp home mode must only be used if both manual and
automatic gear changing are not operational. When the limp
home mode is activated, Opticruise will disregard the clutch
pedal.
Activating limp home mode

Activate limp home mode to move the vehicle short distances.
2. Turn the key to the lock position.
3. Make sure that the drive mode selector on the Opticruise
lever is in neutral position.
5. Move the Opticruise lever away from you and keep it in
that position.
6. Turn the key to the drive position and wait until you
hear a buzzer.
7. Release the Opticruise lever.
326 Complete
8. Move the Opticruise lever immediately away from you

again.
When limp home mode is activated, NL is displayed in
WARNING!
Release the Opticruise lever and move it away from you as
soon as the buzzer tone is heard, otherwise the limp home
mode will not be activated.
Limp home mode is active until the key is turned to the locked
position.
Driving in limp home mode
WARNING!
Be prepared to turn the key to the locked position when
you stop. There is a risk that you will not be able to engage
neutral when driving in the limp home mode. If that
occurs, the vehicle will continue forwards as long as the
engine is running.
1. Turn the drive mode selector on the Opticruise lever to

drive position.
The lowest possible starting gear is selected
automatically.
Complete
327
2. Select manual gear changing, M.
IMPORTANT!
Do not engage a too low gear while driving. This can result
in engine overspeed.
3. Keep your foot lightly on the accelerator pedal and turn

the key to the start position.
The vehicle starts moving forward with the help of the
starter motor and the engine starts.
4. To deactivate limp home mode, turn the key to the
locked position.
Limited performance, C
Limited performance is activated in the event of certain
Opticruise faults.
Limited performance, C, cannot be manually selected via the
Opticruise lever; instead it is activated in the event of certain
Opticruise faults. When the mode is active, gear changes are
carried out more slowly.
For information on actions when limited performance is active,
see the The symbol for Opticruise faults lights up yellow section.
Setting the starting gear

Depending on the vehicle configuration the selection
possibilities for the starting gear may differ.
328 Complete
When vehicles are heavily laden, 1st or 2nd gear must be used
as the starting gear. Otherwise the clutch will be exposed to
excessive wear.
2. Select the starting gear in the instrument cluster.
Navigate in the menu Settings > Vehicle > Starting gear
and select gear.
If you want to start in another gear than that set, engage the
desired gear and then start the vehicle. The setting is not saved.
Contact a Scania workshop to change starting gear availability.
Starting in a gear other than the automatic

gear
With automatic starting gear, the vehicle selects the starting
gear according to factors such as road gradient and total vehicle
weight.
Proceed as follows if you want to start in a gear other than the
automatic gear:
1. Engage the desired gear and then start the vehicle.
The setting is not saved.
Engaging crawl gears

There are two crawl gears, low crawl CL and high crawl CH.
Complete
329
Note that m for manoeuvring mode will not be shown in the

instrument cluster if a crawl gear is selected.
IMPORTANT!
Avoid selecting a crawl gear while the vehicle is in motion.
This can cause a scraping noise in the gearbox and at worst
damage to the gearbox. The reason for this is that the crawl
gears have no synchromesh and are extremely low.

2. Push the Opticruise lever away from you until the
desired crawl gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the clutch was released when the gearbox was in
neutral, crawl gear is engaged after an intentional delay.

b374109
330 Complete
The symbol for Opticruise fault lights up

yellow
b374155
Opticruise faults.
1. Opticruise ensures that 2-pedal mode is activated.
If the clutch pedal is used when a fault occurs, you will
be prompted to engage neutral, N. Driving is not
engaged before neutral is engaged. When the driving is
not engaged, the vehicle cannot be driven away and
there is a risk of the vehicle rolling away if it is on an
incline.
When 2-pedal mode is activated, Opticruise will
disregard the clutch pedal.
2. Stop the vehicle to try to reset Opticruise.

section.
Complete
331

lights up yellow
b374074

1,500 rpm.
normal levels.
The symbol for fault in clutch system lights

up yellow
In the event of an Opticruise fault, the symbol for the clutch
system is also shown together with a message in the instrument
cluster.
b377573
Fault in clutch system.

1. Opticruise ensures that 2-pedal mode is activated.
Acknowledgement may be required depending on the
situation.
332 Complete
2. Stop the vehicle to try to reset Opticruise.


section.

when driving
b374059
Unintended clutch slippage.

• The engine power is temporarily reduced for some
engine types.
Complete
333

when starting
b374059
The clutch has been exposed to unnecessary wear.
Exhaust brake
WARNING!
Use the exhaust brake with care on slippery roads or with
light loads.
The exhaust brake is an auxiliary brake and brakes the driving

wheels.
The exhaust brake is most effective at high engine speeds and
low gears.
In order to check the engine and emissions, the engine
management system may sometimes use a moderate amount of
exhaust brake, even when all auxiliary brakes are off.
If the vehicle continues to accelerate at maximum exhaust
braking with downhill speed control, Opticruise with change
down.
334 Complete
Activating the automatic exhaust brake
The exhaust brake is integrated

b364518 into the auxiliary brake lever.
1. Activate the automatic exhaust brake using the slide

control on the auxiliary brake lever.

b381015
into the auxiliary brake lever.

Complete
335
b364517 The exhaust brake is integrated



b381014


b364521
Switch for activating the exhaust brake.
336 Complete
1. Press the switch to activate the automatic exhaust brake.
When the automatic exhaust brake is activated and you depress

the brake pedal, the exhaust brake and wheel brakes work
together to achieve the best braking effect possible.
The exhaust brake can also be activated by the downhill speed
control to increase the brake effect.
Activating the manual exhaust brake

b364519
1. Activate the manual exhaust brake by moving the

auxiliary brake lever down.
Activating the manual exhaust brake

b364520
1. Activate the manual exhaust brake by moving the

auxiliary brake lever down.
Complete
337
Increasing the exhaust braking effect

gradually
The auxiliary brake lever has 3 positions. When you move the
auxiliary brake lever downwards, the braking effect gradually
increases.
1. Move the auxiliary brake lever up to position 1 when you
have finished braking.
Otherwise the auxiliary brake will brake again as soon as
you stop accelerating.
Increasing the exhaust braking effect

gradually
increases.
Exhaust brake with ABS activated

When the ABS is working actively, the exhaust brake is
automatically disengaged. The exhaust brake is engaged again
as soon as the brake system permits. For more information
about ABS, refer to the ABS section.
338 Complete
Exhaust brake with EBS activated

When the EBS is working actively, the exhaust brake is
automatically disengaged. The exhaust brake is engaged again
as soon as the brake system permits. For more information
about EBS, refer to the section EBS.
Retarder
WARNING!
Do not use retarder on slippery road surfaces. There is a
risk of the wheels locking.
The retarder is an auxiliary brake and brakes the driving wheels.

Use the retarder for long brake applications For the retarder to
work as efficiently as possible the engine speed must exceed
1,800 rpm.
Activating the automatic retarder
The retarder is integrated into the

b362685
auxiliary brake lever.
Complete
339
1. Activate the automatic retarder using the slide control on

the auxiliary brake lever.

b362684
1. Activate the automatic retarder using the slide control on

the auxiliary brake lever.

b362683
Switch for activating the automatic retarder.
1. Press the switch to activate the automatic retarder.
340 Complete
Activating the manual retarder
b364519
1. Activate the automatic retarder with the auxiliary brake

lever.
Activating the manual retarder

b364520
1. Activate the automatic retarder with the auxiliary brake

lever.
Adjusting the braking effect of the auxiliary

brake
increases.
Complete
341
Retarder with ABS

When the ABS is working actively, the retarder is automatically
disengaged. The retarder is engaged again as soon as the brake
system permits. For more information, refer to the ABS section.
Retarder with EBS

When the EBS is working actively, the retarder is automatically
disengaged. The retarder is engaged again as soon as the brake
system permits. For more information, refer to the EBS section.
The retarder symbol lights up green

b200303
The symbol lights up green.
The retarder is activated.
The symbol for retarder fault lights up

yellow
b200357
Retarder fault; no retarder braking available.

342 Complete
The symbol for retarder temperature lights

up yellow
b374075
High oil temperature in retarder.

Downhill speed control

Downhill speed control activates the retarder to maintain the
vehicle speed that you select on downhill slopes.
Downhill speed control is designed for long periods of braking
on downhill slopes. When downhill speed control is operating,
the wheel brakes on the vehicle are completely passive and cool.
This enhances both safety and operating economy.
The ABS must work for the downhill speed control to work.
You can, however, still activate the retarder.
Some vehicles can be set so that you can always use the exhaust
brake during cruise control. The exhaust brake is used by
downhill speed control as an additional help to maintain speed.
Otherwise the exhaust brake switch must be on in order to
activate the exhaust brake.
Complete
343
Activating downhill speed control
b358728
Downhill speed control
1. Press + or - to change the set speed at which the vehicle

will begin to brake.
2. Press 0 to disengage the downhill speed control.
3. Press the arrow to activate the downhill speed control at
the previously set vehicle speed.
The vehicle can be set so that downhill speed control functions

in one of the following ways.
• Press the downhill speed control button
• Press both the downhill speed control button and the
brake pedal.
The option of activating downhill speed control can be disabled

in the workshop.
On some vehicles there is a programming option which ensures
that the brake lamps do not come on during downhill speed
control.
344 Complete
The symbol for downhill speed control lights

up white
b373608
Symbol lights up white
Indicates that downhill speed control is activated.
Using downhill speed control

1. Set the AUT button in position 1 on the retarder.
2. Apply the brakes on the vehicle until you reach desired
speed or press the plus or minus part of the downhill
speed control button.
Downhill speed control is activated.
3. Change gears so that the engine speed is over 1,800 rpm
to achieve the best braking effect.
The engine speed is automatically regulated if you drive with

Opticruise.
Your vehicle will maintain the current speed until you accelerate
and have fully released the clutch or begin to brake again.
If it is not possible to maintain vehicle speed when going
downhill, it is likely that the engine speed is too low:
1. If so, change down and restart the downhill speed
control.
Complete
345
If it is still not possible to maintain vehicle speed when going

downhill:
1. Lower the vehicle speed.
Downhill speed control with offset

Some vehicles have a function, brake offset, which you can use
to set a difference in speed between the downhill speed control
and cruise control.
To use this function, the retarder must be in position AUT 1.
The display shows the set speed

b361240
when the vehicle starts braking.
Setting brake offset

Proceed as follows when you are descending a hill and wish to
set the brake offset.
1. Press the plus or minus part of the downhill speed
control button.
The brake offset speed is set each time the button is
pressed. If you hold down the plus or minus part, this is
similar to pressing the button several times in succession.
346 Complete
When you press the plus or minus part, the display in the
instrument cluster lights up for a few seconds and you can see
the speed at which the vehicle will start to brake.
Brake offset can only be activated when cruise control is
engaged.
Disengaging brake offset

You can disengage the brake offset at any time by doing the
following.
• Press the OFF part of the downhill speed control switch.
• Press the OFF part of the cruise control switch.
Both brake offset and cruise control are switched off.
Cruise control is disengaged. Downhill speed control
will still be active, however.
Temporarily disengage downhill speed

control with offset
You can save fuel by temporarily disengaging downhill speed
control at the end of a downhill slope.
This gives the vehicle a little extra speed into the coming uphill
slope.
Proceed as follows to temporarily disengage downhill speed
control:
Complete
347
1. Press the accelerator pedal at the end of the downhill

slope when the retarder is working.
Downhill speed control is temporarily disengaged.
Downhill speed control is automatically activated during
the next uphill slope when the cruise control starts
working. Downhill speed control is now ready to brake
during the next downhill slope.
− Press the RES part of the downhill speed control
button if you change your mind and want to
activate the downhill speed control immediately.
Parking brake
WARNING!
Always apply the parking brake before leaving the driver
area.
WARNING!
Check that the vehicle combination does not move when
parking on a slope. Connect the trailer parking brake and
chock the wheels if necessary.
348 Complete
1. Drive position
2. Emergency brake position

b211736
3. Parking brake
1. Drive position
2. Emergency brake position
3. Parking brake
b211737
4. Test position
The parking brake is intended to keep the vehicle in a

stationary position independently of the service brake.
The parking brake lever is located on the instrument panel.
Drive mode for parking brake

When the lever is in the farthest forward position 1, the parking
brake is released as long as there is enough air pressure in the
system.
Complete
349
Parking brake emergency brake position

Emergency brake position can be used to gradually apply the
tractor’s parking brake during emergency braking.
By moving the lever from the farthest forward position 1 to the
pressure point 2, the tractor parking brake and trailer service
brake are gradually applied. This can be used when emergency
braking a tractor and trailer. The parking brake lamp is lit as
long as the brake is applied.
Applying the parking brake

1. Pull the lever past pressure point 2 to position 3.
The tractor unit’s parking brake will then be applied and
the trailer brakes will be released.
2. Check that the parking brake is locked into position 3 by
pressing in on it.
The lever springs out 2-3 mm when you release it.
3. Check that the vehicle combination does not move when
parking on a slope.
4. Connect the trailer parking brake and chock the wheels
if necessary.
Releasing the parking brake

If the parking brake lever is set to position 3, proceed as follows
to release the parking brake.
1. Pull the lever towards you.
350 Complete
2. Release the lever back into position 2.

The parking brake will be released.
Drive mode for parking brake

When the lever is in the farthest forward position 1 the parking
brake is released as long as there is enough operating pressure
in the system.
Parking brake emergency brake position

Emergency brake position can be used to gradually apply the
tractor’s parking brake during emergency braking.
By moving the lever from the foremost position 1 to the
pressure point 2, the tractor parking brake and trailer service
brake are gradually applied. This can be used when emergency
braking a tractor and trailer. The parking brake lamp is lit as
long as the brake is applied.
Applying the parking brake

1. Pull the lever past pressure point 2 to position 3.
The tractor unit’s parking brake will then be applied and
the trailer brakes will be released.
2. Check that the parking brake is locked into position 3 by
pressing in on it.
The lever springs out 2-3 mm when you release it.
Complete
351
3. Check that the vehicle combination does not move when

parking on a slope.
4. Connect the trailer parking brake and chock the wheels
if necessary.
Releasing the parking brake

If the parking brake lever is set to position 3, proceed as follows
to release the parking brake.
2. Release the lever back into position 2.
Applying parking brake control position

1. Pull the lever to position 4.
The trailer’s brakes will be released.
2. Check that the vehicle does not roll away.
3. Let the lever spring back into position 3.
The tractor unit parking brake is still applied.
The symbol for the parking brake lights up

red whilst driving
b374067
The symbol turns red while driving.
352 Complete
Brake pressure in the parking brake circuit is too low and it is

starting to be applied.
The symbol for the parking brake flashes red

with an acoustic signal
b374067
The symbol flashes red with an acoustic signal.
The parking brake is not applied and the voltage has been
switched off or the door opened.

b374067
The symbol flashes red.
Serious fault in the parking brake.

Complete
353

red
b374067
The parking brake is applied.

1. Release the parking brake before driving off.

green
b374067
Autohold is activated.
The parking brake is not applied.
Parking brake
WARNING!
Always check that the parking brake is applied before
leaving the driver area.
354 Complete
WARNING!
Check that the vehicle does not move when parking on a
slope. Apply the trailer parking brake and lock the wheels
with wheel chocks when necessary.
WARNING!
When the parking brake system is used to emergency brake
the vehicle, all electronic functions such as ABS, TC and
ESP are disengaged.
Automatic application of parking brake

The parking brake is applied automatically in order to facilitate
handling of the vehicle.
The parking brake is applied automatically when the vehicle is

stationary and one of the following occurs:
• the power is switched off

• the driver’s door is opened
• the voltage is switched off with the battery master
switch.
Applying the parking brake manually

Always apply the parking brake before leaving the driver area.
Complete
355
The parking brake control is positioned on the instrument

panel.
b381013
The parking brake control.
1. Make sure that the power is on.

2. Pull the control to the maximum position.
When the parking brake is applied, the control diode
lights up and the following symbol is shown in the
instrument cluster.
b364592
Release the parking brake manually

The parking brake must be released before the vehicle can be
driven off.
The parking brake control is positioned on the instrument
panel.
356 Complete
b381013
The parking brake control.
1. Press the control as far in as it will go while also:

− putting your foot on the brake pedal or
− depressing the accelerator pedal with a gear

engaged.
The parking brake will not release

If the parking brake will not release, this may be because the air
pressure in the pneumatic system is too low or the control is not
working.
The parking brake does not release even though the control is
depressed or all requirements are satisfied for it to release
automatically.
The air pressure in the compressed air system is too low.
1. Wait a while until the vehicle has managed to build up
sufficient air pressure.
2. Try releasing the parking brake again.
Complete
357
If the air pressure is not sufficiently high to release the

parking brake, there may be leakage in the pneumatic
system. Contact a Scania workshop.
Problem with the electrics, the sensors or communication to the

control.
At this time, the parking brake is controlled
automatically using information from the brake and
accelerator pedals. This allows transport to a workshop.

b374067
The symbol flashes red.
Serious fault in the parking brake.


red
b374067
The parking brake is applied.

1. Release the parking brake before driving off.
358 Complete

red whilst driving
b374067
The symbol turns red while driving.
Brake pressure in the parking brake circuit is too low and it is

starting to be applied.

green
b374067
Autohold is activated.
The parking brake is not applied.

with an acoustic signal
b374067
The symbol flashes red with an acoustic signal.
Complete
359
The parking brake is not applied and the voltage has been
switched off or the door opened.
The symbol for the brake system lights up

red
b200343
Fault on the vehicle electronic brake system (EBS) or the brake

pressure in the circuit for the parking and trailer brake is too
low.
Applying the parking brake test position

The test position is used to check that the vehicle remains
stationary even if the trailer service brake is released.
The trailer service brake can be released if the vehicle is parked
for a longer period and the trailer service brake pressure is too
low.
1. Apply the parking brake and return the control to its
original position.
The trailer service brake is then applied.
360 Complete
2. Pull the control to the application position and hold it

there.
A fault message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
3. Hold the control for a further three seconds.
The trailer service brake is now released.
4. Check that the vehicle does not roll away.
When performing the test, you must not have your foot
on the brake pedal. If the vehicle starts rolling during the
test, the brake pedal can be used.
5. Release the control to cancel the test.
The parking brake is still applied in the towing vehicle.
The service brake is still applied in the trailer.
The parking brake control as an emergency

brake
The parking brake system can be used to brake the vehicle if
anything goes wrong with the standard brake system.
For the towing vehicle and trailer, the service brake is moved
slowly from the control’s original position to the application
position. This can be used for emergency braking of the towing
vehicle and trailer.
The standard brake system is used first for emergency braking.
If anything goes wrong with the standard brake system, the
parking brake system is instead used to brake the vehicle. This
may lead to altered behaviour and delay in brake application.
Complete
361
Filling air in the trailer’s brake circuit
b382585
Filling air in the trailer brake circuit.
When the vehicle’s parking brake is applied, you can fill air in
the trailer brake circuit by using the switch. This means you do
not have to be in the vehicle when air filling occurs.
Filling air in the trailer brake circuit

When you press the switch, the entire compressed air circuit of
the trailer is filled.
1. Make sure the vehicle’s parking brake is applied.
2. Press the switch to fill the trailer’s brake circuit with air.
This can take a few minutes. As the brake circuit is filled
with air, the parking brakes are released and the service
brakes are applied.
3. When air filling is completed you can release the
vehicle’s parking brake and drive away.
Trailer brake
WARNING!
The trailer brake lever only actuates the brakes of the
trailer.
362 Complete
WARNING!
Never use the trailer brake while parking.
WARNING!
Remember that the wheels can lock during heavy braking.
b358777
Trailer brake
The trailer brake brakes the trailer without braking the vehicle
itself.
Activating the trailer brake

1. Press the switch to activate the trailer brake.
The diode in the switch is lit when the function is active.
You cannot activate the trailer brake if the vehicle speed is

greater than 4 km/h. The trailer brake is automatically
deactivated if the vehicle speed exceeds 7 km/h.
Complete
363
The trailer brake lever

The trailer brake lever is located on the instrument panel.
The trailer brake is applied gradually the more the trailer brake
lever is tilted.
b360742
Trailer brake lever
The symbol for the trailer’s ABS lights up

yellow
b208677
Fault on trailer anti-lock brake system (ABS) – only applies at

speeds over 10 km/h.
364 Complete
The symbol for the trailer’s ABS lights up

white
b208676
There are no anti-lock brakes (ABS) on the trailer attached to

the vehicle.
The symbol for the trailer’s brake system

lights up red
b208579
Low brake pressure in the trailer brake system.

2. Check connections to the trailer.
Complete
365
The symbol for the trailer’s brake system

lights up white
b208579
The trailer brake has been applied via the trailer brake switch.
Interlock valve
The purpose of the interlock valve is to limit maximum flow in
a cable; it is used in the control for the parking brake.
Releasing the parking brake when the

interlock valve is triggered
If the pressure in the brake system drops below the interlock
valve setting value when the parking brake is applied, the
interlock valve is triggered.
1. Press in the interlock valve.
In order to release the parking brake, a system pressure above

the interlock valve setting value is required.
Releasing the parking brake with the

interlock valve
1. Press the interlock valve.
366 Complete
Air is supplied to the parking brake circuit to allow the

parking brake to be released.
PUSH TO SUPPLY
b200950
Interlock valve
Filling air in the brake circuits and releasing

the parking brake with the interlock valve
On vehicles equipped with a trailer brake the interlock valve has
a double function.
Interlock valve with double

b203867
functions.
1. Set the parking brake lever to the parking brake position.

2. Pull out the interlock valve.
It can take a few minutes to fill the trailer’s brake circuits
with air.
At the same time the brake circuits are filled with air, the
parking brakes are released and the service brake applied.
3. Press in the interlock valve.
Complete
367
The trailer’s parking brake is applied and the service

brakes are released.
4. Moving the parking brake lever to drive mode.
The parking brakes on the entire vehicle are released.
Hill hold
IMPORTANT!
Do not use hill hold in wintry road conditions because of
the risk that the vehicle will skid with locked wheels.
Note!
Hill hold is not activated if the brake pressure is too low or
if ABS has been activated at the end of braking.
WARNING!
area.
b358725
Hill hold switch
Use hill hold to make hill starts easier.
368 Complete
Hill hold is available until the function is switched off via the
switch.
If the function was activated when the vehicle was shut down,
hill hold will be activated the next time the vehicle is started.
Using hill hold for hill starts

1. Start the engine.
2. Press the switch, which lights up when hill hold is
activated.
3. Depressing the brake pedal.
When you depress the brake pedal, a click can be heard,
after which the brake pressure is maintained so that you
can release the brake pedal.
The harder the brake pedal is applied, the harder hill
hold is applied.
Brake pressure for hill hold

The brake pressure is retained until the vehicle is driven away
or the clutch is released completely with the gear in the neutral
position.
Situations when the hill hold releases

Hill hold releases a few seconds after the pedals are completely
released. The vehicle can then start moving. A warning signal
Complete
369
and a warning text appears in the display before hill hold

releases.
Hill hold releases immediately when you engage a gear, release
the brake and lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
The symbol for hill hold lights up white

b373612
Hill hold will be released soon.
Hill start aid
WARNING!
area.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use hill start assistance in wintry road conditions
because of the risk that the vehicle will skid with locked
wheels.
370 Complete
Note!
Hill start assistance is not activated if the brake pressure is
too low or if ABS has been activated at the end of braking.
Use hill start aid to make hill starts easier.

This function keeps the vehicle stationary by maintaining brake
pressure from the service brake for a few seconds after you
release the brake pedal until you drive off.
The hill start aid is available until you switch off the function
via the switch.
If the function was activated when the vehicle was shut down,
hill start aid will be activated the next time the vehicle is started.
Using hill start aid for hill starts

2. Press the switch, which lights up when hill start aid is
activated.
b358725
Switch for hill start aid.
3. Depressing the brake pedal.

When you depress the brake pedal, a click can be heard,
after which the brake pressure is maintained so that you
can release the brake pedal.
Complete
371
The harder you depress the brake pedal, the harder hill
start aid is applied.
Hill start aid releases without warning a few seconds after the
brake pedal is released.
Automatic neutral position

If the parking brake or service brake is applied when the hill
hold switch is active, the gearbox is automatically set to neutral.
The gear previously selected flashes in the instrument cluster.
When you release the brake, the gearbox returns to D. On
some vehicles, you may need to engage neutral first and then D
before continuing.
If you change the position of the drive mode selector when the
function is active, automatic neutral position is disengaged.
Before you can continue, you must engage neutral position and
then D.
ABS
ABS regulates braking force in a vehicle so that the wheels do
not lock upon harsh brake application.
The vehicle is equipped with anti-lock brakes. Anti-lock brakes
reduce the braking distance and improves the steering.
The improved steering with ABS reduces the risk of jack-
knifing accidents.
372 Complete
This is how ABS works

If any wheel is beginning to lock up, the control unit decreases
the brake pressure to that wheel so that locking of the wheel
ceases. In this way very quick pump action braking is achieved.
• Once the starter lock has been turned to drive mode, the
control unit performs a self-test and several clicks are
heard.
• The ABS symbol for the vehicle should go out after
approx. 3 seconds if the system is fault-free.
• If a fault occurs, all or part of the ABS system will be
disconnected. If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic exhaust brake or foot-operated retarder, these
functions are always disconnected when the warning
lamp is illuminated.
• Depending on the type of full trailer, the trailer ABS
symbol may remain on until the vehicle reaches a vehicle
speed above 10 km/h.
• After repair, the ABS symbol will only go out after the
system has received signals from the wheel speed
sensors. The vehicle must have attained a vehicle speed
of 5-7 km/h for this to occur.
The symbol for ABS lights up yellow

b374080
• Fault in vehicle anti-lock brake system (ABS).
Complete
373
• One or more wheel hubs are abnormally hot.


red with an acoustic signal
b200343
The symbol lights up red and an acoustic signal sounds.
This is because brake pressure is too low, which means the

braking force may be considerably impaired.

yellow
b200343
• Fault which affects the brake system.

• The vehicle has full braking effect, but not full EBS
functionality.
• The brake discs are too warm.
• Fault in the air processing system (APS).
374 Complete
• High air consumption in the brake system.

The symbol for the pneumatic system lights

up yellow
b203192
Critical air consumption in the pneumatic system.

1. Check for any leakages over the entire road train.

up white
b203192
High air consumption in the pneumatic system.

1. Check at the next workshop visit.
Complete
375
The symbol for brake linings lights up yellow
b374077
• The brake linings are worn.

• Fault in brake lining wear sensors.
EBS
WARNING!
EBS is affected by bodywork, conversions of the steering or
steering column and adjustments of the control unit
parameters.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle if the low brake pressure warning
lamp is flashing or if the brake pressure gauges show that
the pressure is too low. Contact a Scania workshop if you
cannot increase the pressure so that the warnings go out.
376 Complete
Note!
A fault message is displayed for 5 seconds when the trailer
is connected. This does not mean that there is a fault but is
only a check to ensure that the fault message works. If the
fault message disappears within a set time, the system is
working correctly. The fault message is only displayed if the
trailer is equipped with EBS.
EBS is an electronic brake system, which means that the brakes

are applied more rapidly resulting in a shorter braking distance.
During normal braking, the EBS braking force is distributed
between the wheels so that the wear on the brake linings is
equalised. During heavy braking, the braking force is
distributed so that the vehicle's stability remains as good as
possible.
EBS includes, among other things, the functions ABS, ESP and
traction control (TC). For more information, see the ABS, ESP
and Traction Control (TC) sections.
If you depress the brake pedal when the vehicle’s power is
switched off, EBS is activated.
Complete
377
Brake adaptation with EBS

Brake adaptation between the traction unit and trailer.
Regulating the power in the trailer connection provides
automatic brake adaptation between the tractor unit and trailer.
The trailer’s braking force is adjusted automatically during
driving.
Backup system for EBS

Pneumatically operated backup system.
If there is a serious fault in the EBS, a red brake warning is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Then, a pneumatically
operated backup system is engaged automatically. When the
back-up system is engaged, the brake pressure to the wheel
brakes is no longer controlled by electronic signals but by
compressed air. The brake system still has the same braking
force but the brake pedal feels different and it requires
considerably more pedal force than normal to brake the vehicle.
WARNING!
When the back-up system is engaged, all electronic
functions, e.g. ABS and TC and ESP, are also disengaged.
378 Complete
Wear control for EBS

Wear control helps to distribute the braking force so that the
brakes are evenly worn.
You can check how much brake lining is left on each wheel in
the instrument cluster. For more information, see the
Instrument cluster section.
Emergency brake assist with EBS

EBS reinforces the brake pressure during emergency braking in
emergency situations.

red with an acoustic signal
b200343
The symbol lights up red and an acoustic signal sounds.
This is because brake pressure is too low, which means the

braking force may be considerably impaired.
Complete
379

red
b200343
Fault on the vehicle electronic brake system (EBS) or the brake

pressure in the circuit for the parking and trailer brake is too
low.

yellow
b200343
• Fault which affects the brake system.

• The vehicle has full braking effect, but not full EBS
functionality.
• The brake discs are too warm.
• Fault in the air processing system (APS).
• High air consumption in the brake system.
380 Complete

up yellow
b203192
Critical air consumption in the pneumatic system.

1. Check for any leakages over the entire road train.

up white
b203192
High air consumption in the pneumatic system.

1. Check at the next workshop visit.
The symbol for brake linings lights up yellow

b374077
• The brake linings are worn.

• Fault in brake lining wear sensors.
Complete
381
Performing a brake test for EBS

Follow the instructions displayed in the instrument cluster in
order to carry out the brake test.
Carry out the brake test when there is a message in the
instrument cluster that requests this. Stop the vehicle and
acknowledge all warnings before you carry out the brake test.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
If the brake system is working correctly, the warning
goes out. If it does not go out or it comes on again,
contact a Scania workshop.
The test may fail due to:
• Incorrect pedal movement.

• Time expired
• The vehicle is in motion.
If the test failed, carry out the test again.
382 Complete
Lighting
Lighting
Main beam, dipped beam and
direction indicators
1. Direction indicators.
b409850
1 2
2. Main and dipped beam.
Switching between main and dipped beam

Main beam illuminates a long stretch of road ahead of the
vehicle. Dipped beam illuminates the road without dazzling
oncoming traffic.
Using direction indicators

Direction indicators are used to let other road users know
which direction you are turning.
1. Move the lever up or down to indicate which direction
you are turning.
Complete
383
Lighting
The main beam symbol lights up blue
b374035
The symbol lights up blue.
Main beam is on.
Standard lighting
1. Spotlamps in the front grille
1 2 3
panel
2. Spotlamps on roof
6 3. Work light
4
4. Front foglight
5
9 5. Rear foglight
12 10
8 6. Headlamp levelling control
11
7. Rotary control for headlamps
8. Position 0
7
9. Position lamp position
10. Main and dipped beam

position
11. Mode A
b357397
12. Light sensor
384 Complete
Lighting
1. Hazard warning signal
2 3 4 2. Resetting the trip meter
3. Adjusting the instrument

panel lighting
b358902
4. Night lighting in the
instrument panel
Daytime running light

Daytime running lights are a function that, in conjunction with
warning lamps, make the vehicle easier to see when it is driven
during daylight hours.
The daytime running lights are on when the engine is running
and the headlamp rotary control is in position 0 or in the A
position.
When the daytime running light is on in the 0 position, the
background lighting in the instrument panel will switch off. If it
is difficult to see the switch symbols, there is also a risk that it is
too dark for your vehicle to be seen clearly.
Headlamp levelling control

Headlamp levelling control is a function for setting the level of
the headlamp’s beam.
The light level is set to the normal position when the LED-
lamp lights up green at the button for levelling control.
Complete
385
Lighting
• To lower the beam level.
− Press the button for levelling control backwards.

• To raise the beam level.
− Press the button for levelling control forwards.
The beam must be adjusted according to how the vehicle is

loaded. When the vehicle is loaded, the beam must be lowered
to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic. When the vehicle is
unloaded, the levelling control must be set to the normal
position.
The headlamp symbol lights up yellow with

an acoustic signal
b374093
The symbol lights up yellow with an acoustic symbol.
The headlamp rotary control is in the dipped beam or position

lamp position when the voltage is switched off.
The headlamp symbol lights up yellow

b374093
386 Complete
Lighting
Main or dipped beam fault.

Check whether a bulb is defective. For more information, refer
to the section Lamps. Contact a Scania workshop if the fault
persists.
Work light
Work light is a function to activate working lamps.
The work light only works if the position light is on.
It is not permitted to drive on public roads with the work light
switched on.
Your vehicle is pre-programmed so that the work light is
automatically switched off if the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
You can activate the Work light function together with
reversing lights. This function automatically activates the work
light when reverse gear is engaged. The function is activated by
holding down the work light button for at least 3 seconds.
When the function is switched on, the work light button will
flash when you engage reverse gear. To deactivate the function,
press the work light button for at least 3 seconds.
Complete
387
Lighting
The working lamp symbol lights up white
b373658
Working lamp active.
The left-hand work light symbol lights up
The colour of the symbol depends on the vehicle

b387942
specification.
Work light, left-hand.
The right-hand work light symbol lights up

The colour of the symbol depends on the vehicle specification.

b387935
specification.
Work light, right-hand.
388 Complete
Lighting
Foglight
Foglight is a set of lighting functions that aims to better
illuminate the road in poor visibility or to make the vehicle
easier to see.
The front foglamps work in combination with the position
lamps or main and dipped beams. The use of foglight in
combination with dipped beam is forbidden on certain markets.
The rear foglight can only be on when the front foglight or
dipped beam is on.
The rear foglamp symbol lights up yellow

b374068
Rear foglamp is on.
Spotlamps
Spotlamps are auxiliary lamps that can be positioned high or
low at the front of the vehicle.
The spotlamps work in combination with the main beam.
Spotlamps on the roof and spotlamps in the front grille panel
cannot be on at the same time.
Complete
389
Lighting
The spotlight symbol lights up

b387941
specification.
Spotlight activated.
Cornering light
The cornering light comes on when you switch on the direction
indicators or turn the steering wheel considerably.
The cornering light cannot be used in combination with
foglights.
External convenience lighting

External convenience lighting illuminates the area around the
vehicle in order to guide the driver to or from the vehicle.
You can allow the position lamps or dipped beam to remain
active for a short period after the vehicle has been parked. The
function can be activated within 10 seconds of switching off the
engine and turning the starter key to the locking position or
radio position.
390 Complete
Lighting
Lever position Lighting
Right-hand direction Dipped beam

indicator
Left-hand direction indicator Position lamps
Main beam flasher Dipped beam and position

light
The external convenience lighting is on for 45 seconds after

activation. The external convenience lighting then goes out
automatically. You can switch off the external convenience
lighting by moving the lever again within the 45 seconds that
the external convenience lighting is on.
Other lighting
Any external storage boxes are fitted with lamps that come on
when the boxes are opened and go out when the doors are
closed. Storage compartments with hatches in the roof shelf are
also equipped with lamps that come on when the hatches are
opened and go out when closed. The lamps in open storage
compartments in the roof shelf come on when the general
lighting is turned on.
Using the remote control for central locking and alarm, you can
check all the vehicle’s lamps and switch on the safety light. For
more information, see the Central locking or Central locking and
alarm section, depending on the specification of the vehicle.
Complete
391
Lighting
The lighting system symbol lights up yellow
b201945
Lighting system fault.

2. Check the fuses and the battery master switch.
The flashing light symbol lights up

b387936
specification.
Flashing light activated.
The reversing light symbol lights up

b387937
specification.
Reversing light activated.
392 Complete
Lighting
Lighting in the cab
IMPORTANT!
Switch off all lighting in the cab with the switch when using
long-term parking.
Note!
If the lighting in the cab is on despite the vehicle being shut
down, the lighting is switched off after a delay so as not to
drain the vehicle battery. This only occurs if the vehicle
does not detect driver activity, e.g. button presses or opened
doors.
The general lighting in the cab comes on automatically when

the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or when the
doors are opened.
A delay function keeps the general lighting on for a while
longer after the doors have been closed. The general lighting
also comes on for a time when the starter key is removed from
the starter lock.
The lighting in the cab can be set manually using the switches.
The vehicle saves the settings and uses them until they are
changed.
Complete
393
Lighting
Switch for lighting in the cab

1 2 3
1. General lighting
2. Reading lamp, driver
b371126
3. Ceiling lighting

doors are opened.
the starter lock.
changed.
394 Complete
Lighting

1. General lighting
1 2 3 4
3. Ceiling lighting
4. Background lighting under
b371125
instrument panel

doors are opened.
the starter lock.
changed.

1. General lighting
1 2 3 4 5
3. Ceiling lighting

instrument panel
b371124
5. Background lighting in ceiling
Complete
395
Lighting
Switch for lighting by the bed

1
1. Ceiling lighting
b371690
2
2. Lighting off

1 2
1. Ceiling lighting

instrument panel
3. Lighting off
b371691
3 4
4. Night lighting

1. Ceiling lighting
1 2 3
instrument panel
3. Background lighting in ceiling
4. Lighting off
b370993
4 5
5. Night lighting
396 Complete
Lighting
Setting the general lighting

Use the switch to make settings for the general lighting.
b359328
Switch for general lighting.
• Position 0 deactivates all general lighting. The lighting is

off even if the doors are open. All internal lighting and
lighting in storage boxes is switched off and cannot be
switched on using other switches.
• The middle position of the switch activates the
automatic mode of the interior lighting. It is possible to
manually activate and adjust all internal lighting. The
lighting is switched off automatically when the vehicle
doors are locked on the outside with the remote control
or the key.
• Maximum brightness is activated via the lower, spring-
loaded button of the switch. One press on the switch
activates maximum roof lighting brightness. It is possible
to manually deactivate and adjust all internal lighting. A
further press of the switch returns the lighting to its
previous position.
Reading lamp for driver

Use the switch to switch the reading lamp on or off.
Complete
397
Lighting
b359324
Switch for driver reading lamp.
Switching on the ceiling lighting

Press the switch to switch the ceiling lighting on or off.
b359327
Switch for ceiling lighting.
1. Press the switch in the middle to switch the ceiling

lighting on or off.
The up arrow or the down arrow is used to dim the lighting

until the desired brightness has been attained.
Setting general lighting

b359328
398 Complete
Lighting

or the key.
previous position.

b359327
Complete
399
Lighting

lighting on or off.

Switching on the background lighting under

the instrument panel
The background lighting under the instrument panel consists of
a soft red light and can be used e.g. when driving at night.
b359326
Switch for background lighting under instrument panel.
1. Press the switch in the middle to switch the background

lighting under the instrument panel on or off.


400 Complete
Lighting
b359328

or the key.
previous position.
Reading lamp for driver

b359324
Switch for driver reading lamp.
Complete
401
Lighting

b359327

lighting on or off.

Switching on the background lighting under

the instrument panel
The background lighting under the instrument panel consists of
a soft red light and can be used e.g. when driving at night.
b359326
Switch for background lighting under instrument panel
402 Complete
Lighting

lighting under the instrument panel on or off.

Switching on the background lighting in the

ceiling
The background lighting in the ceiling consists of a soft red
light and can be used when e.g. sleeping overnight in the cab.
b359325
Switch for background lighting in ceiling.

lighting in the ceiling on or off.

Switches for lighting in the passenger door

There are two different switches in the passenger door.
b358185
Ceiling lighting
Complete
403
Lighting
b359368
Reading lamp, passenger
Switching off all lighting

1. Press the lighting switch to switch off all lighting in the
vehicle, apart from the reading lamp and lighting in
storage boxes.

storage boxes.
Activating night lighting

The night lighting makes it easier to enter and exit the vehicle
or move around the cab at night without drawing attention to
the vehicle.
Carry out one of the following to activate night lighting:
• Press the switch for night lighting.
• Lock the doors with key or remote control.
When night lighting is activated, the general lighting does not

come on automatically when, for example, the doors are
opened.
404 Complete
Lighting

storage boxes.
Activating night lighting

The night lighting makes it easier to enter and exit the vehicle
or move around the cab at night without drawing attention to
the vehicle.
Carry out one of the following to activate night lighting:
• Press the switch for night lighting.
• Lock the doors with key or remote control.
Night lighting is deactivated by pressing the switch in again or

by locking the door with a key or remote control.
Map reading lamp

The map reading lamp can be positioned on the right-hand
side, left-hand side or on both sides in the cab.
The switch on the map reading lamp has three positions:
• Blue
• Lighting off
• White
Complete
405
Lighting
1
b406350
1. Switch

b360573
• Position 0: all lighting is off. The lighting is off even if

the doors are open. All internal lighting and lighting in
storage boxes is switched off and cannot be switched on
using other switches.
• Middle position: The general lighting comes on when
the doors are opened and goes off when they are closed.
• Lower position: The general lighting is on.
406 Complete
Lighting

b360572
1. Press the switch to switch the ceiling lighting on or off.
Switching on the reading lamp

b360571
Switch for reading lamp.
1. Press the switch to switch the reading lamp on or off.
Rotating beacon
The rotating beacon on the vehicle’s roof can be used to alert
other road users to an emergency situation or other danger on
the road.
Complete
407
Lighting
b371929
The light-emitting diode lights up when the rotating beacon is

activated.
The rotating beacon symbol lights up

b387939
specification.
Rotating beacon is activated.
408 Complete
Locks and alarm
Locks and alarm

Central locking
The function for simultaneously locking or unlocking all of the
vehicle’s doors and, in some cases, hatches with a key or remote
control.
The central locking does not work if the battery voltage is
disconnected using the battery master switch.
Remote control for the central locking
1 2
3 1. External convenience lighting.
2. Lock the doors.
3. Testing the external lighting.

4
b362744
4. Unlock the doors.

b364488
Switch in the door trim panel for central locking
Unlocking the central locking

You can unlock the central locking in one of the following ways.
Complete
409
Locks and alarm
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to unlock the door.
• Open the door from the inside with the door handle.
It is only the door that is opened which is unlocked.
• Press the unlock button on the switch in the door trim
panel.
It does not work if the central locking is locked with a
remote control or key.
• For separate unlocking:
− Press the remote control’s unlock button once to
unlock the driver’s door.
− Press twice within 2 seconds to unlock both doors.

• For simultaneous unlocking:
− Press the remote control’s unlock button once to
unlock both doors.
You can select separate or simultaneous unlocking in the

instrument cluster. The option is found under Settings > Vehicle.
For more information, refer to the Menus in the display section.
Locking the central locking

The doors must be completely closed for them to lock.
You can lock the central locking in one of the following ways.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to lock all doors.
• Press the lock knob on the switch in the door trim panel
to lock all doors.
410 Complete
Locks and alarm
• Press the remote control’s lock knob to lock all doors.

The direction indicators flash once.
If a door is not closed properly when you lock it, the direction
indicators will flash rapidly four times.
If all doors are closed properly and lock, the direction indicators
will flash twice and the light-emitting diode in the door will
start to light up. If the starter key is in the starter lock’s drive
position, the light-emitting diode lights up continuously;
otherwise the light-emitting diode lights up for 5 seconds.
Automatic relocking
The vehicle is fitted with automatic relocking.
If you unlock the vehicle using the remote control, the vehicle
will be automatically relocked after a set time if you do not open
a door and the starter key is not in the drive position.
You can activate or deactivate the function in the instrument
cluster. The option is found under Settings > Vehicle. For more
information, refer to the Menus in display section.
Security central locking

The vehicle is equipped with security central locking, which
prevents unauthorised individuals from opening the vehicle’s
doors during brief stops or at low speed.
Complete
411
Locks and alarm
Security central locking automatically locks the vehicle doors

when you start driving.
You can activate or deactivate the function in the instrument
cluster. The option is found under Settings > Vehicle. For more
information, refer to the Menus in display section.
External convenience lighting

The vehicle is fitted with external convenience lighting that
makes access to the vehicle safer if there are no other light
sources near the vehicle.
External convenience lighting is activated with the remote
control and turns on position lamps and direction indicator
lamps. The internal lighting also comes on if the switch is not
set to position 0.
When testing external lighting, all lamps come on in sequence
to simplify checking of the function.
The safety light and test of external lighting are automatically

switched off:
• after 1 minute.
• after pressing each button again
• when the starter key is moved to the drive position
• when the vehicle is driven off.
412 Complete
Locks and alarm
Renewing the battery in the central locking

remote control
The battery is a lithium battery, 3V CR 2430; the battery lid is
located on the rear of the remote control.
1. Open the lid by carefully inserting a screwdriver in the
hole by the Scania logotype and prising open.
2. Insert the battery and replace the lid.
Ensure that the gasket is correctly positioned when
replacing the lid.
PIN code for central locking remote control

Take the PIN code to a Scania workshop if you need help in the
event of loss, replacement or supplementation of the remote
control for the central locking.
Contact a Scania workshop if:
• you have lost a remote control or want to block it.

• the remote control needs to be replaced.
• you need to have more remote controls programmed for
the vehicle.
If you have lost a remote control and require it to be blocked, a

Scania workshop can carry this out. Bring along the PIN code,
which is common to the remote control and immobiliser. The
PIN code is kept by the vehicle owner. The vehicle owner can
enlist the help of a Scania workshop if the PIN code has been
misplaced.
Complete
413
Locks and alarm
Central locking and alarm
Note!
The doors must be completely closed for them to lock.
Central locking will not operate if battery voltage is
interrupted at battery master switch.
The central locking is a function for simultaneously locking or

unlocking all of the vehicle’s doors and, in some cases, hatches
with a key or remote control.
The sticker indicates that the vehicle is equipped with

b204384
an alarm.
You can activate or deactivate the alarm at the same time as

locking or unlocking the doors with the remote control.
414 Complete
Locks and alarm
Remote control
1. External convenience lighting.

1 2
2. Lock doors and activate the
alarm.
6 3. Testing the external lighting.
4. Lock doors and activate the

3 alarm in transport mode.
5. Unlock doors and deactivate

4 the alarm.
5 6. Lock doors and activate the
alarm in perimeter protection
b362745
mode.
You can use the switch in the door trim panel to lock and
unlock the doors from inside the vehicle without activating the
alarm.
Locking the doors and activating the alarm

You can lock the doors and activate the alarm with the remote
control.
• Press any of the lock buttons on the remote control to
lock the doors and activate the alarm.
If all doors and hatches are closed properly, the direction
indicators will flash twice and the light-emitting diode in
the door will start flashing.
Complete
415
Locks and alarm
If the starter key is in the starter lock’s drive position, the

light-emitting diode flashes continuously; otherwise the
light-emitting diode flashes 5 times.
If any door or hatch is not properly closed, the direction
indicators will flash rapidly 4 times.
If a door is not properly closed, the direction indicators
will flash rapidly 5 times. This door remains unlocked
and will not be monitored by the alarm.
Locking doors without activating the alarm

• Press the lock knob on the switch in the door trim panel
to lock all doors.
• Turn the starter key in the door lock to lock all doors.
Locking the vehicle with the starter key in

the drive position
The vehicle is programmed so that you can lock it with the
starter key in the drive position, e.g. when you are using the tail
lift.
In this case, it is recommended to activate the alarm in
transport mode, which allows minor vehicle movements
without triggering the alarm.
1. Leave the starter key in the drive position. Apply the
parking brake.
2. Lock the vehicle and activate the alarm by pressing the
remote control’s button for transport mode.
416 Complete
Locks and alarm
Automatic relocking
If you unlock the vehicle with the remote control, the vehicle
will automatically lock after a set time.
Automatic relocking happens if the starter key is not in drive
position and you do not open a door. You can activate or
deactivate the function in the instrument cluster. The option is
found under Settings > Vehicle. For more information, refer to
the Menus in the display section.
Deactivating the alarm and unlocking the

doors
You can deactivate the alarm and unlock the doors with the
remote control or the starter key.
• Press the remote control unlocking button to deactivate
the alarm.
The lamps on the direction indicators flash once.
If the alarm has been triggered, switch off the alarm
using the remote control’s unlocking button or put the
starter key in drive position.
Deactivating the alarm and unlocking the

doors separately or simultaneously
You can deactivate the alarm and unlock the door on the
driver’s side or both doors simultaneously.
• For separate unlocking: Press the remote control
unlocking button once to deactivate the alarm and
Complete
417
Locks and alarm
unlock the driver’s door. Press twice within 2 seconds to

unlock both doors.
• For simultaneous unlocking: Press the remote control
unlocking button once to deactivate the alarm and
unlock both doors.
You can select separate or simultaneous unlocking in the

instrument cluster. The option is found under Settings > Vehicle
> Locking. For more information, refer to the Menus in the
display section.
Security central locking

The vehicle is equipped with security central locking, which
prevents unauthorised individuals from opening the vehicle’s
doors during brief stops or at low speed.
Security central locking automatically locks the vehicle doors
when you start driving. You can activate or deactivate the
function in the instrument cluster. The option is found under
Settings > Vehicle. For more information, refer to the Menus in
the display section.
External convenience lighting and testing

external lighting
External convenience lighting makes access to the vehicle safer
when there are no other light sources near the vehicle.
418 Complete
Locks and alarm
External convenience lighting turns on position lamps and

direction indicator lamps. The internal lighting also comes on if
the switch is not set to position 0.
Testing the external lighting. All lamps come on in sequence to
simplify checking the function.
External convenience lighting and the test of external lighting

are automatically switched off:
• after 1 minute.
• if the relevant button is pressed again
• when the starter key is moved to the drive position
• when the vehicle is driven off.
Renewing the battery in the central locking

and alarm remote control
The battery is a lithium battery, 3V CR 2430, and is located on
the rear of the remote control.
• Open the lid of the battery by carefully inserting a
screwdriver in the hole by the Scania logotype and
prising it open.
• Renew the battery and ensure that the gasket is correctly
positioned when replacing the lid.
Complete
419
Locks and alarm
PIN code for remote control

The PIN code is common to the remote control and
immobiliser. Take the PIN code to a Scania workshop if you
need help with the remote control, immobiliser or the alarm.
Bring the alarm PIN code if you want a Scania workshop to
reprogram, upgrade or add new functions to the alarm. The
code is also needed to renew the remote control and for the
workshop to program additional remote controls for the
vehicle.
If you have lost a remote control and require it to be blocked, a
Scania workshop can carry this out. Bring along the PIN code,
which is common to the remote control and immobiliser. The
PIN code is kept by the vehicle owner. The vehicle owner can
enlist the help of a Scania workshop if the PIN code has been
misplaced.
The PIN code is needed if the Scania workshop has to help you
with:
• adding more starter keys or remote controls for locks

and alarms.
• adjusting parameters in the locking and alarm system.
• reprogramming, upgrading or supplementing the alarm
with new functions.
• the remote control needs to be renewed.
• the workshop has to program more remote controls for
the vehicle.
420 Complete
Locks and alarm
• if you have lost a remote control or want to have it

blocked.
The PIN code is kept by the vehicle owner. The vehicle owner
can enlist the help of a Scania workshop if the PIN code has
been misplaced.
Perimeter protection mode

Locks the doors and activates the alarm without activating the
cab’s motion detector.
Panic alarm
The driver can trigger the panic alarm in the event of attack.
The panic alarm makes the vehicle’s lamps flash and a siren
sound.
b359160
Panic alarm switch
The switch does not unlock the doors; it only activates the
panic alarm.
Trigger the panic alarm

You can start the panic alarm in two ways.
Complete
421
Locks and alarm
• Press the panic alarm switch in the cab for at least 4

seconds. The siren sounds and the direction indicators
flash.
b359160
Panic alarm switch.
• Press and hold any button on the remote control for at

least 4 seconds.
Turning off the panic alarm

You can turn off the panic alarm in two ways.
• Press the panic alarm switch in the cab for at least 4
seconds.
• Press and hold any button on the remote control for at
least 4 seconds.
Emergency shutdown of the panic alarm

If you activated the alarm using the remote control, and the
remote control is then lost or damaged, you can turn off the
alarm using the ordinary starter key.
• Insert the starter key in the starter lock and turn it to the
drive position. The alarm is switched off when the key is
checked and approved.
422 Complete
Locks and alarm
Siren
The siren gives a warning using a backup battery if the regular
electric power supply is cut and the alarm is activated.
Transport mode
Locks doors and activates the alarm without activating the cab’s
motion detector and the vehicle’s inclination indicator.
Transport mode
motion detector and the vehicle’s inclination indicator.
Transport mode
motion detector, fuel theft alarm and the vehicle’s inclination
indicator.
Fuel theft alarm

The alarm is triggered if the fuel level in a tank is reduced by
more than a preset value while the vehicle is parked and locked
with the alarm system activated.
If the power is interrupted via the battery master switch when
the alarm is activated, the fuel theft alarm will be triggered. If
the battery has to be disconnected instead, activate the alarm in
Complete
423
Locks and alarm
transport mode or activate the alarm after the battery master

switch has been turned off.
Motion detector
The vehicle is fitted with a motion detector for the cab.
The motion detector is only activated when the alarm is in
standard mode. The motion detector is not sensitive to small
material objects or air movements. This means that short-stop
ventilation can be switched on when the alarm is activated
without activating the motion detector.
Inclination indicator
The vehicle is fitted with an inclination indicator for the cab.
The inclination indicator is only activated when the alarm is
activated in standard mode or in perimeter protection mode. If
the vehicle is expected to tilt or move with the alarm activated,
e.g. during transport or using the platform or tail lift, it is
therefore recommended that the vehicle be locked and the
alarm activated in transport mode.
Symbols and codes in event of an alarm

The alarm is triggered when one of the alarm’s sensors is
activated. The direction indicators will flash and the siren will
sound.
424 Complete
Locks and alarm
You can see which sensor has triggered the alarm by checking
the alarm codes in the display. For more information, refer to
the Menus in the display section. Alarm symbols are displayed in
the display for 5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated.
Alarm codes can be cleared by a Scania workshop.
When the alarm is triggered, this is displayed on the instrument
cluster as a yellow symbol. The symbol for the sensor that
triggered the alarm is displayed with a flashing indication.
If you forget to close a door or hatch before activating the
alarm, no fault code is generated.
M
b358006
Sensor that triggered the alarm.
Symbol Alarm
Main electrical power

b358013
Starter key is in drive position

b358012
Panic alarm
b358011
Complete
425
Locks and alarm
Symbol Alarm
Extra sensor
b358010
Cab motion detector

b358009
Inclination indicator
b358008
Siren
b358007
Symbol Alarm
Fuel theft alarm

b403723
426 Complete
Locks and alarm
Starter lock
Note!
Always remove the key from the lock when leaving the
vehicle to prevent unauthorised persons from setting the
vehicle in motion.
The starter key positions in the starter lock are lock position,
radio position, drive position and start position.
Lock position
When the starter key is in the lock position, you can take the
starter key out.
b209847
You stop the engine by turning the key to this position or the
radio position. When you have removed the key, turn the
steering wheel until the steering lock engages.
Position lights, hazard warning signals and some other
functions can be used when the starter key is in the lock
position.
Complete
427
Locks and alarm
Radio position
When the starter key is in the radio position, the vehicle radio
works without any time limit.
b209848
Drive position
When the starter key is in the drive position, the whole
electrical system is engaged. The warning lamps for battery
level, oil pressure, brake pressure, etc., light up.
b209849
Start position
When the starter key is in the start position, the starter motor is
engaged.
b209850
When you release the key, it springs back to the drive position.
The vehicle has an electronic restart inhibitor. This means that
if you fail to start the engine, you can try to start it again
428 Complete
Locks and alarm
immediately. You do not need to turn the key back to the radio
position.
Drive mode selector in neutral when starting

neutral position.
Immobiliser
Note!
Only put one starter key on your key ring. This applies to
all vehicle types and makes. Several keys on the same key
ring may cause malfunctions which may prevent the vehicle
from starting.
The immobiliser is a means of electronic theft protection which

only allows the vehicle to be started with the correct starter key.
The sticker indicates that the vehicle is equipped with

b204367
an immobiliser.
Immobiliser codes
The vehicle is supplied with a bag containing codes for the
immobiliser and an encryption code that is used on different
occasions.
Complete
429
Locks and alarm
Your PIN code for the immobiliser etc, and an encryption code
are provided in the bag. There is only one PIN code and one
encryption code for each key set. Keep the codes in a safe place.
If any of the codes has been lost, the vehicle owner can contact
a Scania workshop for assistance.
The PIN code is needed when:
• several starter keys or remote control for locks and

alarms are added
• renewing the coordinator or engine control unit
• adjusting parameters in the locking and alarm system.
The encryption code and PIN code are required when:
• renewing the coordinator or engine control unit

• renewing the door control unit or alarm system-
• software update of the door control unit or alarm system.
Starter keys for immobiliser

You must use the correct starter key to start the vehicle.
The vehicle checks that the key is correct whenever it is started.
430 Complete
Locks and alarm
New starter keys

When the vehicle is supplied, you will receive 2 or more starter
keys.
New starter keys must be programmed using a PIN or
encryption code for the vehicle immobiliser.
Lost starter keys

If you lose a starter key, you should consult a Scania workshop
in order to renew all the starter keys and lock cylinders.
The immobiliser symbol lights up yellow

b374040
There is a fault in the immobiliser.

Complete
431
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
IMPORTANT!
Risk of damage to the touch screen.
Never use sharp or hard objects when handling a touch
screen.
IMPORTANT!
Distraction can cause accidents. Never enter data while
driving.
Use navigation with caution while driving. Always be
observant of the traffic conditions and the traffic rules.
Important information about the

infotainment system
This manual is a summary. A complete manual is available for
download from www.scania.com/manuals.
Read the instructions before using the infotainment system for
the first time. All examples of menu choices in the instructions
are in English. The menu options in the infotainment system
are in the selected language.
432 Complete
Infotainment system
Controls and basic functions for the

infotainment system
1 2 3 4 5
15 6
14 7
13 8
12 9
b364658
11 10
Overview of the infotainment system.
1. Left and right arrows
In radio mode:
− Short press: Select saved radio station
− Long press: Choose between all radio stations
In music mode:
− Short press: Select track
− Long press: Fast forward/rewind

2. Touch screen
3. SD card 1 (map data or media files)
4. SD card 2 (media files)
Complete
433
Infotainment system
5. PHONE: Phone functions

6. CAMERA: Camera functions
7. DISPLAY: Light settings
− Press to switch between Auto – Day – Night

8. SETUP: Settings
9. Back button
10. Right-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Select and change
− Press: Acknowledge
11. Left-hand multi-function button
− Turn: Adjust volume
− Long press: Switch the infotainment system on/off
− Short press: Mute on/off

12. NAVI: Navigation mode
13. TRAFFIC: Traffic information
14. MEDIA: Switch between different audio sources
15. RADIO: Start radio mode and switch between different
sources
434 Complete
Infotainment system
Menu options and navigation for

infotainment system
The descriptions in this manual provide examples of how to
navigate the infotainment system menus. In some cases a menu
may have several input paths.
You can navigate using the touch screen and by using the multi-
function button.
The radio can be controlled via steering wheels, buttons and
menus which are displayed on the touch screen.
Navigating in the instrument cluster using

the touch screen
The infotainment system has a touch screen that can be
controlled with a single finger.
Some parts can be operated via the switches on the steering
wheel. For more information, see the steering wheel section of
the Driver’s Manual.
• Activate a menu option by tapping the touch screen.
• Change position in a scroll bar by moving it with your
finger.
Navigating in the instrument cluster using

the multi-function button
To navigate between menu options:
Complete
435
Infotainment system
• Rotate the right-hand multi-function button clockwise

or anti-clockwise.
To activate the selected menu item:

• Press the right-hand multi-function button.
Remote control for auxiliary heater

Some of the infotainment system functions can also be
controlled by the remote control for the auxiliary heater. For
more information, refer to Remote control for auxiliary heater.
Opening settings for the infotainment

system
1. Press the SETUP button to open the settings.
In the upper part of the screen there are 5 main menus. Under
each main menu there are a number of sub-headings which help
you to set the infotainment system as you desire.
1. Sound
5 1 2 3 4
2. System settings
3. Display
4. Application settings
b364657
5. Telephone
436 Complete
Infotainment system
Adjusting audio properties on the

infotainment system
It is possible to adjust the following audio properties.
b364894
Sound symbol.
• Speed-based volume
− The volume is automatically compensated for wind

noise. A low value produces a barely noticeable
change while a higher value produces a great
volume change at different speeds.
• Frequencies: High, medium, low
• Volume control
• Balance: distribution of volume between left- and right-
hand audio channels.
• Fading: distribution of volume between front and rear
audio channel.
• Audio sound when pressing
• Navigation volume during calls
• Muting or unmuting music during calls
1. Adjust the values using the plus and minus symbols on
the display.
Complete
437
Infotainment system
System settings for infotainment system

From this menu you can set the infotainment system’s basic
settings.
b364893
Settings symbol.
• Language
• Units
• Automatic text scrolling
• Start screen and overview
• Factory settings
− Confirm to reset to factory settings.
If Automatic is selected for language, then the language is set in

the instrument cluster. Refer to the Instrument cluster section for
more information.
Display for infotainment system

Some of these settings can also be accessed with the DISPLAY
button from the infotainment system panel.
b364892
Display symbol.
438 Complete
Infotainment system
• Display brightness
• Screen saver
• Proximity sensor
Application settings for infotainment system

b364891
Application settings symbol.
Settings for:
• Navigation
• Telephone
• Radio: Traffic messages and Radio
• Media: Traffic messages and Bluetooth (set and pair the
devices)
• Camera
Phone in infotainment system

b364895
Telephone button symbol.
This menu is accessed via Phone settings under Settings.
Complete
439
Infotainment system
Driver profiles in the infotainment system

The selected settings are saved to the driver card currently used
in the vehicle. When a new driver card is used in the vehicle,
the infotainment system is set according to these settings.
Starting the infotainment system and

selecting listening mode
• Turn the infotainment system on and off with a long
press on the left multi-function button.
If the unit was on when the ignition was switched off, it comes
on automatically when the key is turned to the radio position.
If the infotainment system is turned on without the key, it
switches itself off after one hour.
The following audio modes can be selected:
• Radio, press the RADIO button.

• Other audio sources, press MEDIA.
Using the radio in the infotainment system

It is possible to save radio stations that the infotainment system
finds.
• Press the RADIO button and select SRC.
− Select the desired band, AM, FM or DAB.
The infotainment system automatically searches for
radio stations.
440 Complete
Infotainment system
1
1. Press the symbol to see radio
stations that the infotainment
system finds.
2 2. Select a radio station by
b403700
pressing it.
There are two ways of saving a radio station.
1. Press the symbol to save a

1 radio station that has already
2 been selected.
2. Press and hold on a radio

station. Press until the name
of the radio station or
b403699
frequency is displayed.
Using other audio sources with the

infotainment system
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, the number of inputs
may vary. The system does not support all versions of media
available in the market.
1. Press the MEDIA button and select SRC.
− Select desired available audio source.
Complete
441
Infotainment system
AUX input Play audio files
b394527
from a device with
3.5 mm connector.
USB port Play audio files

b394528
from a USB
device. The port
also supplies the
USB device with
1.5 A when the
radio is switched
on.
Bluetooth Play audio files

from a paired
Bluetooth device.
b394681
Memory card Play audio files

from a memory
card (SD card).
b394680
442 Complete
Infotainment system
TV/EXT The selectable

option is displayed
b394679
if the vehicle is
prepared for TV.
The radio only
controls the sound,
the picture is
shown on a
different unit.
The infotainment system’s navigator

The navigator suggests routes and provides guidance with a
voice, map or symbols.
The infotainment system’s navigator helps you to plan your
trip. The navigator shows information on estimated remaining
driving time and distance.
For some countries in the SD card map directory, the navigator
can suggest a route that is suited to the vehicle’s properties:
length, height, weight and cargo. The case of the accompanying
SD card contains information about the map areas or countries
which have support for vehicle properties.
Installing navigator map data

The map data required for navigation is stored in the
accompanying SD card.
Complete
443
Infotainment system
1. Insert the SD card with map data into card slot 1.

If an SD card is already in card slot 1, gently press the
SD card to release it.
The map data held on the card is not always up to date. To

obtain the latest map data, you can order a new SD card
through your dealer or update your map data via scania.com/
maps.
SD card for navigation

The infotainment system must be fitted with an SD card for
navigation in order for the map function and navigation to
work.
The following information applies to vehicles fitted with an SD
card.
Contact your dealer for more information about the SD card
which is required for your region.
Starting the navigator and selecting

destination
The navigator calculates and shows the route in the navigator’s
display.
1. Press the NAVI button.
2. Press the following symbols.
444 Complete
Infotainment system
1 2
b400744
Symbols for navigation.
3. Select to write an address or search for another

destination.
4. Confirm the route on the display when the map is
displayed.
5. The navigator calculates the route and starts showing it
in the navigator display.
Controlling the infotainment system from

the steering wheel switches
1 4
2
5 Left-hand switch on the steering
b364937
3
wheel.
1. SRC – Selection of audio source

In radio mode:
− Long press: Automatic radio station search
In music mode:
− Short press: Change track
Complete
445
Infotainment system
− Long press: Quick search

3. Adjust the volume
4. Voice control
− Short press: Scania voice control via the

infotainment system
− Long press: Voice control via compatible mobile

device
5. Lower the volume.
Controlling the infotainment system from

the steering wheel switches
1
2
4
b403511
3
Steering wheel switches.
1. SRC – Selection of audio source.

In radio mode:
− Long press: Automatic radio station search
In music mode:
− Short press: Change track
446 Complete
Infotainment system
− Long press: Quick search

3. Adjust the volume
4. Lower the volume.
Camera
Rear view camera

The rear view camera films the area behind a stationary or
reversing vehicle.
The rear view camera is activated when the reverse gear is
engaged. The image from the rear view camera is displayed in
the infotainment system.
Rear view camera

The rear view camera films the area behind a stationary or
reversing vehicle.
The rear view camera is activated when the reverse gear is
engaged. The image from the rear view camera is displayed in
the driver area.
Complete
447
Infotainment system
Front view camera

The front view camera films the area closest to the front of the
vehicle.
The front view camera is positioned in the sun visor. The front
view camera is active up to 30 km/h. The image is displayed in
the infotainment system.
Front view camera

The front view camera films the area closest to the front of the
vehicle.
The front view camera is positioned in the sun visor. The front
view camera is active up to 30 km/h. The image is displayed in
the driver area.
General camera
The general camera can be used to display concealed angles,
e.g. when working at the side of the vehicle.
The infotainment system is prepared for a general camera.
Activating the general camera

1. Press camera in the infotainment system.
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, the camera can also be

activated when the direction indicator is activated.
448 Complete
Loading and unloading

Tail lift
The tail lift is a device on the back of a truck platform for lifting
goods up onto and down from the platform.
Activating the tail lift

b372730
Tail lift switch
The switch is located on the instrument panel.

1. Press the tail lift switch to activate the tail lift.
Fixed tail lift operation unit

Using the fixed operation unit, you can adjust the tail lift from
the cab.
Complete
449
1 3 1. Pushbutton
2. Raise
4
3. Open
b372729
4. Lower
Tail lift operation unit with spiral cable

Using this operation unit, you can adjust the tail lift outside of
the cab.
1 2
3 1. Raise
2. Open
b392177
3. Lower
Adjusting the tail lift using the operation

unit
Proceed as follows to adjust the tail lift. On the fixed operation
unit, you need to hold the pushbutton in to open and close the
tail lift.
• Hold the pushbutton in while pressing the Open and
Lower buttons to open the tail lift.
• Press the Raise button to raise the tail lift.
450 Complete
• Press the Lower button to lower the tail lift.

• Hold in the pushbutton and while pressing the Raise
and Close buttons to return the tail lift to the initial
position.
The symbol for tail lift lights red

b213676
Tail lift lowered.
Towing unit
WARNING!
Always check that the tow hook is locked before driving.
WARNING!
When the tow hook opens, the drawbar can fall down and
cause personal injury.
The vehicle is fitted with a tow hook that can be used for
towing.
Complete
451
Opening and closing the tow hook

Open and close the tow hook to connect the trailer.
1. Pull out the latch handle and secure it by turning it one-
quarter turn anticlockwise.
b215774
2. Slide out the control handle and the tow hook opens.
3. The tow hook closes automatically when the drawbar is
inserted into the tow hook coupling mouth.
If the tow hook does not lock automatically: pull the
control handle backwards until the latch handle goes
into the catch position.
Always check that the tow hook is locked before driving away.
Disconnecting the trailer from the tow hook

Open the tow hook to disconnect the trailer.
1. Pull out the latch handle and secure it by turning it one-
quarter turn anticlockwise.
452 Complete
b215774
2. Slide out the control handle and the tow hook opens.
b215775
The drawbar could fall down when the tow hook opens
and cause injury.
3. If the control handle jams because the tow hook is under
load, it can be loosened by carefully prising with a lever
or similar tool.
Complete
453
The symbol for unlocked towing unit lights

up red
b209611
The towing unit is unlocked.
Remote controlled trailer coupling

The trailer coupling is controlled by a rotary control that is
fitted at the rear of the vehicle near the tail lamp.
454 Complete
Unlocking the trailer coupling
1 2 3
b397202
1. Open the hatch and lower the lever.
2. Keep the lever pressed in and turn a quarter of a turn anticlockwise.
3. Release the pressure, turn the lever back and close the hatch.
Locking the trailer coupling

1. Reverse carefully towards the trailer.
The trailer coupling locks automatically when it makes
contact with a locking pin.
Locking sensor on trailer coupling

There is a locking sensor, which is positioned on the trailer
coupling. This is displayed when the trailer coupling is closed
or open.
Complete
455
1 2
1. Trailer coupling open, locking

sensor extended.
2. Trailer coupling open, locking
b397200
sensor retracted.
The trailer coupling symbol lights up green

b397483
When the trailer coupling is locked, a green symbol is displayed

in the instrument cluster.
The trailer coupling symbol lights up red

b397483
The trailer coupling is unlocked

Switch off the symbol by pressing the following switch.
b397484
Switch to turn off symbol.
456 Complete
Trailer socket
There are 2 different trailer sockets behind the cab, one 7-pin
and one 15-pin.
b215451
Trailer socket, 15-pin and 7-pin
There are trailer sockets on the vehicle for electric connection

to civil and military vehicles.
The vehicle has a 15-pin trailer socket for civilian trailers, a 7-
pin trailer socket for ABS and two 12-pin electrical sockets for
military vehicles. The 12-pin electrical sockets are located at the
front and rear of the vehicle, at the front for connection and at
the rear for connecting to a trailer.
The location of the trailer sockets varies depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Use the vehicle’s 12-pin trailer socket to connect the electrical
systems of two vehicles such as a truck and trailer. The trailer
socket can also be used when towing to provide electricity to
the towed vehicle. Always use the electrical cable designed for
the purpose when connecting.
Complete
457
The 12-pin electrical sockets are

located at the front and at the rear
b212226
of the vehicle.
Front 12-pin electrical socket with

b212227
open cover.
b215451
Trailer socket, 15-pin and 7-pin
Spiral cables for trailer socket

The vehicle can be supplied with spiral cables with the
following types of pin plugs.
458 Complete
• 7-pin
• 15-pin
• 15-pin to 2x7-pin
The spiral cables are supplied in the cab from the factory.
Spiral cable durability

The spiral cables last longer if you avoid loading them
unnecessarily. Preventive actions can be performed.
Risk Preventative measure
If the spiral cables are Make sure that the spiral

subjected to a temperature cables do not come into
above 105°C. contact with e.g. the gearbox
or engine by fitting the spiral
cables in the parking sockets
when driving without a
trailer.
If the spiral cables are pulled Fit the spiral cables in the
out for a prolonged period of parking sockets before tilting
time. the cab.
If dirt or moisture penetrates Fit the spiral cables in the

the pin plugs. parking sockets when driving
without a trailer.
Complete
459
b215453
Parking socket
Fitting the spiral cable in the trailer socket.

A fitted spiral cable must be locked with a latch clamp.
1. Press the spiral cable pin plug into the trailer socket.
2. Close the latch clamp.
3. Check that the spiral cable pin plug is locked in the
trailer socket.
The spiral cable is secured in the

b215452
trailer socket.
460 Complete
Compressed air, trailer connection
WARNING!
Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer wheels to
prevent the trailer from beginning to roll during work.
b213049
Trailer connection, ISO

b213050
Trailer connection, BSI
Complete
461
b213051
Trailer connection, Nordic
Disconnecting the trailer

It is important that you follow the instructions to prevent the
trailer from starting to roll during work.
1. Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer before
disconnecting the trailer.
Otherwise the trailer may start moving before the trailer
parking brake has been applied.
2. Detach the red line first (supply line).
3. Then detach the yellow line (control line).
Connecting the compressed air line for the

trailer
Proceed as follows to connect the compressed air line.
1. Attach the yellow line first (supply line).
2. Then attach the red line (control line).
462 Complete
Disconnecting the trailer

It is important that you follow the instructions to prevent the
trailer from starting to roll during work.
1. Apply the parking brake and chock the trailer before
disconnecting the trailer.
Otherwise the trailer may start moving before the trailer
parking brake has been applied.
2. Pull the handle down and detach the trailer connection.
Fifth wheel
IMPORTANT!
The turning disc on the fifth wheel must be lubricated with
grease that withstands high pressure, e.g. EP with MoS2 or
grease with graphite additive.
For fifth wheels with Teflon-coated turning discs, a thin
coating of grease must be applied after cleaning.
The fifth wheel is a large plate with a locking device that sits
behind the tractor and enables the coupling of a semi-trailer.
Always check that the fifth wheel is locked properly after
coupling up a semi-trailer.
Maintenance of the fifth wheel is very important. A poorly
lubricated and dirty locking device increases the risk of the fifth
wheel not locking properly. As driver, you are responsible for
Complete
463
ensuring that the fifth wheel is in such a condition that it

functions properly.
Fifth wheel maintenance includes the following:
1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing
For more information, see the manufacturer’s manual.

behind the vehicle and enables the coupling of a semi-trailer.
wheel not locking properly. As the driver, you are responsible
for the maintenance of the fifth wheel and ensuring that it is
working safely.
For more information on maintenance and lubricating
instructions, see Fifth wheel in the Maintenance chapter.
Unlocking the fifth wheel

The fifth wheel must be unlocked when coupling the semi-
trailer.
464 Complete
1
2 5 4
b377230
1. Press the lever downwards.
2. Pull the handle backwards.
3. Pull the handle straight out.
4. Pull the handle backwards.
5. Release the handle and make sure that the catch engages
in the fifth wheel.
Coupling a semi-trailer
coupling a semi-trailer.
1. Lock the semi-trailer’s wheels using wheel chocks.
2. Check that the fifth wheel is unlocked.
Complete
465
b216022
The fifth wheel is unlocked.
3. Check that the level of the semi-trailer is immediately

below the level of the fifth wheel.
The level of the semi-trailer should

be immediately below the level of
b201361
the fifth wheel.
4. Reverse carefully towards the semi-trailer.

The fifth wheel locks automatically when the trailer
kingpin of the semi-trailer comes into contact with the
locking mechanism of the fifth wheel.
5. Check that the fifth wheel is locked.
b216023
The fifth wheel is locked.
466 Complete
Uncoupling a semi-trailer
Always check that the fifth wheel is unlocked when uncoupling
the semi-trailer.
1. Lock the semi-trailer’s wheels using wheel chocks.
3. Drive carefully away from the semi-trailer.
The fifth wheel remains unlocked and you can immediately

couple up a new semi-trailer.
Fifth wheel
IMPORTANT!
behind the vehicle and enables the coupling of a semi-trailer.
Complete
467
wheel not locking properly. As driver, you are responsible for

ensuring that the fifth wheel is in such a condition that it
functions properly.
1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing

wheel not locking properly. As the driver, you are responsible
for the maintenance of the fifth wheel and ensuring that it is
working safely.

trailer.
1. Remove the carabiner.
468 Complete
b201331
2. Press the fifth wheel handle approximately 25 mm in the
vehicle’s direction of travel.
b201332
3. Pull the fifth wheel handle all the way out.

b201333
The handle should remain extended when you release it.
Complete
469
WARNING!
If the carabiner cannot be fitted, the fifth wheel is not
locked properly. You must then repeat the coupling
procedure from the beginning.
1. Chock the semi-trailer wheels.

3. Make sure that the semi-trailer plate is immediately
below the level of the fifth wheel.
The level of the semi-trailer plate

should be immediately below the
b201361
level of the fifth wheel.

5. Fit the carabiner.
470 Complete
If the carabiner cannot be fitted, the fifth wheel is not

locked properly. You must then repeat the coupling
procedure from the beginning.
Always check that the fifth wheel is unlocked when coupling the
semi-trailer.
3. Slowly drive away from the semi-trailer.
Fifth wheel
IMPORTANT!
Complete
471
Maintenance of the fifth wheel is very important. A badly

lubricated and extremely dirty locking device increases the risk
that the fifth wheel will not lock properly. As driver, you are
responsible for ensuring that the fifth wheel is in such a
condition that it functions properly.
1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
3. Greasing

that the fifth wheel will not lock properly. As the driver, you are
responsible for the maintenance of the fifth wheel and ensuring
that it is working safely.
472 Complete

trailer.
The fifth wheel is fitted with an indicator which means that you
can clearly see whether the fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
b411964
2. Pull the handle in the vehicle’s direction of travel.

b411814
3. Pull the handle out as far as possible and pull it in the

Complete
473
b411813
4. Check that the fifth wheel is locked properly.
the semi-trailer.
1. Chock the wheels of the semi-trailer before you start to
uncouple it.
474 Complete
Check that the fifth wheel is locked

The fifth wheel is fitted with a lock indicator which shows
whether the fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
When the fifth wheel is locked, the

lock indicator is angled vertically
b201328
towards the handle.
When the fifth wheel is unlocked,

the lock indicator is angled parallel
b201329
to the handle.
The locked fifth wheel symbol lights up

white
A magnetic sensor detects whether the fifth wheel is locked.
b374073
Complete
475
Fifth wheel
IMPORTANT!
that the fifth wheel will not lock properly. As driver, you are
responsible for ensuring that the fifth wheel is in such a
condition that it functions properly.
1. Cleaning
2. Check for wear
476 Complete
3. Greasing

that the fifth wheel will not lock properly. As the driver, you are
responsible for the maintenance of the fifth wheel and ensuring
that it is working safely.

trailer.
1. Lift up the catch.
b411963
2. Pull the handle in the vehicle’s direction of travel.
Complete
477
3. b411841
Pull out the handle until it stops and pull it in the
b411840
The fifth wheel is fitted with a catch which shows whether the
fifth wheel is locked or unlocked.
478 Complete

the catch is angled parallel to the
b201327
handle.
3. Carefully reverse the tractor unit towards the semi-

trailer.
4. Check that the fifth wheel is locked properly.
When the fifth wheel is locked, the

catch is angled vertically towards
b201326
the handle.
the semi-trailer.
1. Chock the wheels of the semi-trailer before you start to
uncouple it.
Complete
479

the catch is angled parallel to the
b201327
handle.
The locked fifth wheel symbol lights up

white
A magnetic sensor detects whether the fifth wheel is locked.
b374073
Fifth wheel, sliding

The fifth wheel can be moved lengthwise by pushing it along its
frame.
It is very important that you carry out maintenance of the rails
to which the sliding fifth wheel is attached. Poorly lubricated
and extremely dirty rails increase the risk that the fifth wheel
will not lock properly.
480 Complete
Clean and lubricate the rails and the fifth wheel at the same
time. For more information on maintenance and lubricating
b391415
Sliding fifth wheel.
Press the switch to lock or unlock the fifth wheel position. The
vehicle’s parking brake must be applied. The fifth wheel
position is locked automatically when vehicle speed is above
5 km/h.
When the fifth wheel position is unlocked, the LED in the
switch lights red and the following symbol is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
b391414
If the fifth wheel position could not be locked, a message is also

displayed. When the fifth wheel position cannot be locked, the
vehicle speed is limited to 10 km/h.
Moving the fifth wheel position

Adjust the fifth wheel’s position by pushing it lengthwise along
its frame.
Complete
481
1. Apply the trailer’s parking brake.

2. Connect the trailer to the fifth wheel and connect the
vehicle’s connections.
3. Unlock the fifth wheel position with the switch.
4. Drive forward or reverse carefully depending on in
which direction you want to move the fifth wheel.
5. Lock the fifth wheel position with the switch. Make sure
the fifth wheel is locked between 2 cogs on the rails.
6. Check that the fifth wheel position is locked by first
driving forwards and then reversing carefully.
The symbol for unlocked fifth wheel lights

up red
b391414
The fifth wheel position is unlocked.

1. Check that the fifth wheel lock is located between two
cogs on the rails.
2. Lock the fifth wheel using the switch.
If the symbol indicates an unlocked fifth wheel even if
the fifth wheel is locked, the sensor may be broken.
Contact a Scania workshop to have the broken sensor
renewed.
482 Complete
When the fifth wheel position cannot be locked, the

vehicle speed is limited to 10 km/h.
Disabling the speed limitation at a locked

fifth wheel
The fifth wheel position can be locked despite the warning for
unlocked sliding fifth wheel being displayed in the instrument
cluster, If this occurs you must perform a sequence that switches
off the speed limiter before you can drive the vehicle to the
nearest Scania workshop to renew the broken sensor.
WARNING!
You must make sure that the fifth wheel position is locked
before disabling the speed limitation. If the fifth wheel
position is unlocked, you must not drive the vehicle away.
Make sure the fifth wheel position is locked by checking the

locking arm’s location in accordance with the following
illustrations. The locking rod must be inserted completely into
the cylinder for the fifth wheel position to be locked.
Complete
483
1 2
b394251
1. The fifth wheel position is unlocked.
2. The fifth wheel position is locked.
When you have made sure that the fifth wheel position is
locked, proceed as follows to switch off the speed limitation:
1. Start with the sliding fifth wheel switch in the neutral
position.
2. Press the switch so that the LED lights red. Keep it
depressed for 1 minute.
3. Press the switch again. Wait for 1 minute.
4. Press the switch again so that the LED lights red. Keep
it depressed for 1 minute.
5. Finally, press the switch again and leave it in this
position.
The speed limitation is now deactivated until you switch
off the power with the starter key.
484 Complete
Fifth wheel, sliding

The fifth wheel can be moved longitudinally. Use the handle at
the front of the fifth wheel to lock and unlock the fifth wheel
position.
It is very important that you carry out maintenance of the rails
to which the sliding fifth wheel is attached. Poorly lubricated
and extremely dirty rails increase the risk that the fifth wheel
will not lock properly.
Clean and lubricate the rails and the fifth wheel at the same
time. For more information on maintenance and lubricating
instructions, see Fifth wheel in the Maintenance section.
Moving the fifth wheel position

Use the handle at the front of the fifth wheel to lock and unlock
the fifth wheel position.
1. Apply the trailer’s parking brake.
2. Connect the trailer to the fifth wheel and connect the
vehicle’s connections.
3. Unlock the fifth wheel position.
See the Unlocking the fifth wheel position section.
4. Drive forward or reverse carefully depending on in
which direction you want to move the fifth wheel.
Complete
485
5. Locking the fifth wheel position.

See the Locking the fifth wheel position section.
6. Check that the fifth wheel position is locked by first
driving forwards and then reversing carefully.
Unlocking the fifth wheel position

1. Loosen the carabiner. b395688

b411893
3. Hook the cut-out in the handle’s arm into the

carabiner’s bracket.
486 Complete
b411892
Locking the fifth wheel position
It is very important that you check that the fifth wheel is locked
after changing the fifth wheel position.
1. Loosen the handle from the bracket and let it slide back
to the start position.
b396629
Make sure the fifth wheel is locked between 2 cogs on

the rails.
2. Attach the carabiner.
b411894
Complete
487
Securing the vehicle during transport
Securing the vehicle on a ferry

Do as follows to prepare the vehicle for lashing when being
transported on a ferry:
b360490
Attachment points for the tow pins.
1. Remove the rubber protectors.

2. Fasten the tow pins in the attachment points.
To secure the vehicle on a ferry, both front attachment points

must be used. The tow pins can be ordered from your Scania
dealer as a spare part.
488 Complete
Checks
Checks
Check points
Daily maintenance
Perform a check of the following points each day.
• Test the brake and apply the parking brake.
• Drain the compressed air tanks.
• Air pressure in each tyre of the vehicle.
• Lighting and lamps.
• That windows and mirrors are completely clean.
• That there is no leakage from the vehicle.
• Check that the load is correctly positioned and secured.
• Check that the pressure in the gas tanks is below
17.5 bar. For more information, refer to the section
Vehicle gas (LNG).
Perform a check of the following points for the vehicle’s fifth

wheel.
• That the fifth wheel locking device is fully open before
coupling the semi-trailer to the tractor.
• That the fifth wheel is locked properly after coupling up
a semi-trailer.
Complete
489
Checks
For more information on the locking device, see Fifth wheel in

the chapter Loading and unloadingor the manufacturer’s manual.
Perform a check of the connected trailer each time before
driving off.
• That the trailer is correctly connected.
A check of the following points must be performed if the

vehicle is fitted with a tow hook.
• That the locking device on the tow hook is fully open
before coupling a semi-trailer to a tractor or a trailer to a
truck.
• That the locking device on the tow hook is properly
locked after you have coupled a semi-trailer.
• Daily check of the tail lift. Refer to the tail lift’s
manufacturer’s manual for information on maintenance
items.
WARNING!
Always use a platform strut when working under the
platform to avoid bodily injury.
• Lubricate the tipping cylinder joints and all the

platform’s moving parts such as flaps and hinges.
490 Complete
Checks
Weekly maintenance
Perform a check of the following points once a week.
• Engine oil level
• Coolant level and radiator.
• Power steering fluid level
• Water separating fuel filter. See the Water separating fuel
filter section for more information.
• The smoke detector. See Checking the smoke detector for
more information.
• The tail lift lifting, lowering and swing functions using
the operation units.
• The speed required to lower and swing the tail lift.
• That the hydraulic hoses can move freely.
• The tail lift switch in the cab.
• The tail lift warning lamp.
• Damage or cracking on the frame bracket, pipe
attachments and the tail lift attachments.
• Damage or wear to the under-run protection, bearing
arrangements and bolts.
Monthly maintenance
Perform a check of the following points each month.
• Wheel nuts. Check tighten if necessary.
Complete
491
Checks
• Tyre wear.
• Lubricate the tail lift’s moving parts such as the tilt or lift
cylinder bearings.
Maintenance depending on the outdoor

temperature
Perform a check of the following points if necessary.
• Radiator blind. Use a radiator blind when the outdoor
temperature is always below +5°C, otherwise remove it.
See the Radiator blind section for more information.
• Snow protection air intake. Set the snow protection air
intake to the normal position when the road surface
permits it. See the Snow protection air intake section for
more information.
• The fuel. The vehicle is prepared for driving on up to
100% biodiesel EN 14 214. Scania recommends
switching to diesel that complies with the EN 590
standard if temperatures start falling to around +/- 0°C.
See the Fuel, biodiesel section for more information.
Check the brake system for leakages

The brake system must be checked for leakages in order to
detect any leakages that require action.
Proceed as follows to check for leakages:
1. Switch off the engine when the brake pressure has
reached normal working pressure.
2. Wait for one minute until the hissing stops.
492 Complete
Checks
3. Press the brake pedal and hold it hard in the depressed

position.
If the pressure falls markedly within one minute, there is
a leakage present which must be rectified.
If you notice that it is taking longer for the system to reach the
correct pressure, take the vehicle to a Scania workshop to be
examined.
Checking brake chamber stroke length
WARNING!
Check and adjust the function and piston stroke regularly,
in accordance with the maintenance programme. Brake
action can otherwise be affected significantly.
1. Adjust the piston stroke by hand as the brake linings

wear down.
Complete
493
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance programme
The maintenance programme for your vehicle depends on the
specification of your vehicle and how you use it.
Contact a Scania workshop to obtain the correct maintenance
programme for your particular vehicle.
Tool kit
Tool kit for changing wheels

The contents of the tool kit may vary according to the vehicle
specification.
The tool kit for changing wheels is normally located in the
right-hand storage compartment on the rear wall of the cab,
seen in the vehicle’s direction of travel.
The hose assembly to pump up tyres is placed in a bag with
loose objects that accompanies the vehicle.
494 Complete
Maintenance
b375551
Hose assembly.
The hose assembly to pump up tyres and the crank for the spare
wheel carrier are placed in a bag with loose objects that
accompanies the vehicle. b376739
Hose assembly and crank.
Bulb and tool kit

The bulb and tool kit is usually placed on the roof shelf in front
of the passenger seat.
Depending on the vehicle specification, it may instead be placed
in a bag with loose objects that accompany the vehicle.
The bulb and tool kit contains a set

b213134
of screwdrivers, fuses and bulbs.
Complete
495
Maintenance
The tool hatch symbol lights up yellow
b374108
The tool hatch is open.

1. Close the tool hatch.
Front grille panel
Opening the front grille panel
Handle to open the front grille

b362364
panel.
The front grille panel is opened using a handle in the door

pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
1. Grasp the handle and pull towards you until the lock
releases.
496 Complete
Maintenance
Cab tilting
WARNING!
Secure the cab with the cab strut when it is tilted.
WARNING!
The pump valve must be in the tilting mode when driving.
Otherwise the hydraulics may pump up the cab and cause
injury or damage.
WARNING!
When the cab is tilted, the engine should be switched off,
the parking brake should be applied and the gearbox should
be in neutral.
WARNING!
Do not work under a cab tilted to the intermediate
position. Always tilt the cab fully.
Complete
497
Maintenance
WARNING!
Do not stand in front of or behind the cab during tilting.
WARNING!
The vehicle should be standing level when the cab is tilted.
Never tilt the cab if the vehicle is standing on an incline
greater than 10%.
WARNING!
Use a cab strut. The cab is not tilted past its state of
equilibrium.
High risk of crush injuries when the cab is tilted back.
Make sure that no one is in front of or behind the cab when
it is being tilted or tilted back.
498 Complete
Maintenance
WARNING!
equilibrium.
High risk of crush injuries when the cab is tilted back.
Make sure that no one is in front of or behind the cab when
it is being tilted or tilted back.
WARNING!
Risk of crushing injuries when the cab is tilted back. The
cab falls freely during the final stage of tilting the cab back.
IMPORTANT!
The side panels of the front grille panel must be open when
the cab is tilted.
Securing the cab when cab tilting

Securing the tilted cab to prevent personal injury.
Complete
499
Maintenance
3 1
b390628
1. Fold up the cab strut.

2. Extend the cab strut so that it reaches the holder in the
underside of the cab.
3. Secure the cab strut with the pin.
Location of the cab tilting device
1 1. Cab tilt pump

b361238
2
2. Pump valve
500 Complete
Maintenance
Location of the cab tilting device
1
1. Cab tilt pump
2
b361239
2. Pump valve
Tilting the cab

2. Put the gear lever in the neutral position.
3. Empty the cab of loose parts and heavy equipment.
4. Close the doors.
5. Open the upper front grille panel and the side panels of
the front grille panel.
The handle bar consists of 2 parts which are assembled
using an adapter. The 2 parts of the handle bar are
located in the side panels. The adapter is kept in the tool
box.
Complete
501
Maintenance
Setting the pump valve for tilting and tilting back the
cab. The upper illustration shows the valve position
when the cab is tilted forward. The lower illustration
shows the valve position when the cab is tilted back.
Use the handle bar or adapter to set the pump valve to
b373613
the correct position.
6. Set the pump valve in the tilt position. Use the adapter
or the handle bar.
7. Put the adapter on the pump pin. Assemble the handle
bar and the adapter.
8. Pump using the handle bar and the cable lock will open
automatically.
9. Pump until the cab has tilted forward from its own
weight. Continue pumping until a counterpressure can
be felt in the pump lever and the cab has reached its full
opening angle.
Tilting the cab

4. Close the doors.
The handle bar consists of 2 parts which are assembled
using an adapter. The 2 parts of the handle bar are
502 Complete
Maintenance
located in the side panels. The adapter is kept in the tool

box.
Setting the pump valve for tilting and tilting back the
cab. The upper illustration shows the valve position
when the cab is tilted forward. The lower illustration
shows the valve position when the cab is tilted back.
Use the handle bar or adapter to set the pump valve to
b373613
6. Set the pump valve in the tilt position. Use the adapter
or the handle bar.
7. Put the adapter on the pump pin. Assemble the handle
bar and the adapter.
8. Pump using the handle bar and the cable lock will open
automatically.
9. Pump up the cab until it reaches the full opening angle.
Continue pumping until counterpressure can be felt in
the pump lever.
10. Fold up the cab strut to the holder in the lower part of
the cab. Secure with the pin. Exercise great care!
Tilting the cab

Make sure that no one is in front of or behind the cab when it is
being tilted.
3. Press the cab tilt switch.
Complete
503
Maintenance
b361808
Cab tilting

5. Close the doors.
7. Take out the remote control for cab tilting.
b361807
Remote control for cab tilting.
The remote control is located under the front grille

panel.
8. Hold in the activation button on the rear of the remote
control. Press the button for tilting and keep it pressed
504 Complete
Maintenance
until the cab has tilted forward under its own weight.
Keep the activation button and the button for tilting
depressed until the cab has reached its full opening
angle.
Make sure that no unauthorised person has access to the remote

control for cab tilting.
Tilting the cab

equilibrium.
Make sure that no one is in front of or behind the cab when it is
being tilted.
3. Press the cab tilt switch.
b361808
Cab tilting

5. Close the doors.
Complete
505
Maintenance

panel.
control. Press the button for tilting and keep it pressed
in until the cab has fully tilted.
Note that the cab is lifted to a flatter angle than other
types of cab.
9. Fold up the cab strut to the holder in the lower part of
the cab.
Make sure that no unauthorised person has access to the remote

control for cab tilting.
Tilting the cab back into normal position

Risk of crushing injuries when the cab is tilted back. The cab
falls freely during the final stage of tilting the cab back.
1. Close the doors.
2. Set the pump valve to the position to tilt the cab back
into position.
3. Pump the cab back using the handle bar until the cab
falls back in place in the drive position movement area.
Let the pump valve remain in the position for tilting back.
506 Complete
Maintenance
Tilting the cab back into normal position

Risk of crushing injuries when the cab is tilted back. The cab
falls freely during the final stage of tilting the cab back.
1. Close the doors.
b361807
Remote control for cab tilting.

panel.
control. Hold the button for tilting the cab back and
keep pressed in until the cab has tilted back to its drive
mode movement area.
4. Reset the switch for cab tilting.
Complete
507
Maintenance
b361808
Cab tilting
5. Close the front grille panel’s side panels and the upper
front grille panel.
The symbol for electric cab tilting lights up

red
b373651
Electric cab tilting is still activated.

1. Deactivate before starting off.
508 Complete
Maintenance
External ladder
The location of the rubber straps on the external ladder. b401510
The vehicle is fitted with an external ladder that is attached with

rubber straps to the cab.
Lift off the external ladder

Proceed as follows to lift the ladder off the cab.
1. Detach the rubber straps.
2. Lift up the ladder and then towards you.
Complete
509
Maintenance
Fasten the external ladder

Do as follows to fasten the ladder to the cab.
1. Make sure the lower end of the ladder (hooks) point
downwards.
2. Hook on the lower bracket between the third pair of
ladder rungs from the bottom.
3. Hook the upper bracket on the third pair of ladder rungs
from the top.
4. Pull the rubber straps over the ladder rungs and hook
them to the hooks on each bracket.
Lamps
WARNING!
Always turn off the power before renewing bulbs.
Do not touch the headlamp reflectors with your fingers.
Wear clean gloves.
510 Complete
Maintenance
Tilt out the headlamp unit for the front

lamps
b355067
The screws holding the headlamp
unit.
1. Open the hatch by the footstep.

2. Loosen the two screws holding the headlamp unit.
Use a T40 screwdriver.
3. Tilt out the headlamp unit.
Renewing the headlamp bulb

1. Unscrew the cover.
b355066
2. Turn the bulbs anticlockwise and pull them out

Leave the electrical cable in place.
Complete
511
Maintenance
b411691
3. Pull the bulb out of the bracket.

b411701
4. Press the new bulb in.

b411700
Renewing the direction indicator bulb

1. Unscrew the cover.
512 Complete
Maintenance
b355065
2. Pull the bulb straight out.

Leave the electrical cable in place.
b411699
3. Pull the bulb out of the bracket.

b411698
4. Press the new bulb in.

b411697
Complete
513
Maintenance
Adjusting main and dipped beam
2 1. Sideways adjustment, dipped

beam
2. Height adjustment main and

b362843
dipped beam
1. Adjust the main and dipped beams using a T25

screwdriver.
Adjusting main and dipped beam

1. Height adjustment, main
beam
3
2 2. Sideways adjustment, main
beam
3. Sideways adjustment, dipped

beam
1 4
4. Height adjustment, dipped
b387486
beam
1. Adjust the main and dipped beams using a T20

screwdriver.
Renewing LED bulbs

1. Contact a Scania workshop to renew the LED bulbs.
514 Complete
Maintenance
Renew the tail lamp bulb

1. Undo the retaining screws on the lens.
Use a T20 screwdriver.
2. Press in the bulb, turn anticlockwise and remove it.
3. Make sure the lens seals tightly when fitting.
Adjusting spotlamps on the roof
1
2
b364724
1. Height adjustment of spotlamps.
2. Sideways adjustment of spotlamps.
1. Adjust the spotlamps using a T25 screwdriver.
Complete
515
Maintenance
Adjusting spotlamps on the roof
b394861
Height adjustment of spotlamps.
1. Adjust the spotlamps vertically using a T25 screwdriver.

Contact a Scania workshop to have the spotlamps
adjusted horizontally.
Adjusting spotlamps on auxiliary lamp bar
1. Sideways adjustment of
2 spotlamps.
1 2. Height adjustment of
b394862
spotlamps.
The nuts must be torque tightened to 20 Nm.

Contact a Scania workshop for checking the action, if you do
not have the correct tool available.
516 Complete
Maintenance
Adjusting spotlamps in the front grille panel
b362842
Height adjustment of spotlamps.
1. Adjust the spotlamps using a T25 screwdriver.
Bulb types for headlamps
Function Type of bulb Power Adjustable
Headlamps H7 70 W Yes
Direction H21 21 W No
indicator
Bulb types for headlamps
Headlamps LED - Yes
Direction LED - No
indicator
Complete
517
Maintenance
Bulb types for tail lamp
Position, R5W 5W No
end-outline
marker, side
marker and
registration
plate lamps.
Stop and P21W 21 W No

reversing
lamp
Direction PY21W 21 W No
indicator
Bulb types for tail lamp
Position, LED - No
end-outline
marker, side
marker and
registration
plate lamps.
518 Complete
Maintenance
Stop and LED - No

reversing
lamp
Direction LED - No
indicator
Bulb types for work light
Work light, H3 70 W Yes

fifth wheel
Working LED 33.6 W Yes

lamp, rear
Working LED 33.6 W Yes

lamp, upper
rear cab wall
Bulb types for other lighting
Front LED - Yes

foglamp
Complete
519
Maintenance
Position LED - No
lamp/parking
light
Spotlamp, LED - Yes

roof
Spotlamp, LED - Yes

front grille
panel
Roof sign LED - No

lamp on roof
Roof sign LED - No

lamp above
windscreen
End-outline LED - No
marker lamp
Identification LED - No
lamp
Side marker LED - No

lamp
Direction LED - No
indicator, side
520 Complete
Maintenance
Bulb types for other lighting
Front H11 - Yes

foglamp
Position LED - No
lamp/parking
light
Spotlamp, LED - Yes

roof
Spotlamp, LED - Yes

front grille
panel
Roof sign LED - No

lamp on roof
Roof sign LED - No

lamp above
windscreen
End-outline LED - No
marker lamp
Identification LED - No
lamp
Complete
521
Maintenance
Side marker LED - No

lamp
Direction LED - No
indicator, side
Bulb type for rotating beacon
Rotating H1, P14.5s 70 W No

beacon
Wiper blade
IMPORTANT!
Renew damaged or uneven wiper blades. Wiper blades in
poor condition can scratch the glass.
The wiper blade is a rubber blade for windscreen or headlamp

wipers.
522 Complete
Maintenance
Cleaning or renewing the wiper blade

The wiper blade should be cleaned or renewed to avoid
damaging the glass.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with the same type of
alcohol as used for the washer fluid.
• Remove the washer nozzles when renewing wiper blades.
The washer nozzles are attached to the wiper blades.
Water separating fuel filter
Note!
Exercise care to avoid getting fuel splashes on you. Wear
protective gloves and goggles.
ENVIRONMENT
Help protect the environment! Avoid spillage and use a
suitable container.
Complete
523
Maintenance
1. Shut-off cock.
b342918
2 2. Valve for draining.
1. Replaceable filter.
b208702
2 2. Valve for draining.
524 Complete
Maintenance
1
1. Replaceable filter.
2. Valve for draining. The valve is connected to the

filter by a safety string that prevents it from falling
b344370
2
away when unscrewed.
The water separating fuel filter is located on the front part of

the chassis behind the cab.
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, there is a water
separating fuel filter located on the right- or left-hand side. The
same change intervals apply as those for an ordinary fuel filter.
Drain the water separating fuel filter regularly. The amount of
water collected is dependent on climate and fuel quality. Under
certain circumstances it may therefore be necessary to drain the
filter every day.
The symbol for the water separating fuel

filter lights up yellow.
b385437
Complete
525
Maintenance
The water separating fuel filter needs to be emptied.

1. Empty the water separating fuel filter.
Empty the water separating fuel filter

Proceed as follows to empty the fuel filter.
Exercise care to avoid getting fuel splashes on you. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection.
1. Switch off the engine and position a container under the
valve.
2. Clean around the dump valve and open it by carefully
screwing it.
3. Release water until fuel comes out.
4. Screw in the valve again and clean around it.
5. Start the engine and check that no fluid leaks out.
6. Dispose of the liquid that has been drained in an
environmentally responsible manner.
If there is water in the filter. See the section Check
whether there is water in the fuel filter.
Check whether there is water in the fuel tank

If there is water in the water separating fuel filter, it is
important to check whether there is water in the fuel tank.
1. Open the cover to the fuel tank and shine a flash light
down into the tank.
526 Complete
Maintenance
The water in the fuel will appear like silvery bubbles or

floe. For more information, see the Impurities in fuel
section.
Snow protection air intake
Note!
The swirling snow position on the air intake should only be
used when driving in strongly swirling snow, such as during
snow ploughing.
Blizzard mode prevents snow from blocking the air filter when
driving in heavily swirling snow.
When driving in heavily swirling snow, you should change the
air intake position for the engine. Change this using the manual
control which is located under the front grille panel adjacent to
the engine air intake.
b408728
• Outer position: Blizzard mode.

• Inner position: Normal mode.
Complete
527
Maintenance
When the air intake is in its normal position, the air is taken
into the engine from the front of the vehicle. In blizzard mode,
the air is taken from the zone by the turbocharger. When this
mode is activated, the maximum airflow to the engine is limited
and will be lower than in normal mode. Do not, therefore, drive
with the air intake in the swirling snow position unless you have
to.
If you drive with the swirling snow position under normal
winter conditions and at temperatures above +5°C, this could
cause the engine power to be reduced and the fuel consumption
to be increased. Prolonged driving in the swirling snow
position, when this is not necessary, could damage the engine.
Particulate filter regeneration
WARNING!
The vehicle's exhaust gases can become very hot during
regeneration. Make sure that people and property are kept
well away from the exhaust gas outlet.
The particle filter cleans the vehicle exhaust gases from soot
particles and sometimes need cleaning.
The vehicle is equipped with a particulate filter which cleans
soot particles from the vehicle’s exhaust gases. The particulate
filter is automatically regenerated, i.e. it is cleaned, but it can
become full. If it becomes full, it needs to be manually
528 Complete
Maintenance
regenerated. If the particulate filter becomes excessively full, the

vehicle must be taken to a Scania workshop for repair.
Symbol for regeneration of the particulate

filter lights up white
The warning is shown in the instrument cluster display.
b374138
The particulate filter is starting to become full.

Motorway driving is recommended in order to improve
automatic regeneration of the particulate filter. You can also
manually regenerate the particulate filter.

filter lights up yellow
b374138
The particulate filter is full.

1. Carry out manual regeneration of the particulate filter as
soon as possible.
Complete
529
Maintenance

filter lights up red
b374138
The symbol lights up red
The particulate filter is excessively full and engine power is

limited.
Starting manual regeneration of the

particulate filter
Manual regeneration is carried out with the engine running and
the vehicle parked in a suitable location.
Manual regeneration is started in the instrument cluster.
For manual regeneration the following is required:
• The parking brake is applied.

• The gearbox is in neutral.
• Any power take-offs are deactivated.
• The temperature of the engine and catalytic converter is
adequate.
530 Complete
Maintenance
• The particulate filter needs to be regenerated.

• The particulate filter is not excessively full.
1. Use the OK button to navigate the display menu. You
can find the option under Settings > Functions >
Particulate filter regeneration.
For more information, refer to the Menus in the display
section.
2. Keep the vehicle stationary until regeneration is
completed.
Information is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Manual regeneration of the particulate filter

cancelled
Particulate filter regeneration is cancelled if:
• You depress the accelerator pedal.

• A fault occurs in the regeneration system.
The particle filter when idling

If the engine is run with a low load for an extended period of
time (such as several hours at idling speed) the filter is warmed
up, which in turns increases idling speed. This is required to
prevent damage to the particulate filter and oxidation catalytic
converter.
Complete
531
Maintenance
Draining the compressed air tanks

The compressed air tanks are drained to check for the presence
of water in the compressed air tanks
b204646
1. Drain the compressed air tanks and check if water runs
out.
Small amounts of water may be present. Larger amounts
of water indicate that the air dryer is not working or that
the desiccant should be renewed.
− Contact a Scania workshop if necessary.
− Stretch a cable between the holes on the drain

valves to make it easier to empty the compressed air
tanks.
Symbols on compressed air tanks

Compressed air tanks can be marked with the following
symbols to indicate which compressed air circuit they belong to.
532 Complete
Maintenance
b374089
Front circuit
b374088
Rear circuit
b374067
Parking brake circuit
Disc brake
Checking brake discs

b204051
Measuring brake disc thickness.
1. Measure the brake disc thickness.
Complete
533
Maintenance
Minimum permissible thickness is 37 mm. A new brake

disc is 45 mm.
A wear edge may have formed on the outer
circumference of the discs. Measure inside the wear edge
using spacers, e.g. two nuts as illustrated.
Remember to subtract the thickness of the nuts from the
measurement.
2. Check the brake discs for cracks.
Cracks must not be wider than 1.5 mm or longer than 40
mm.
No cracks may run out to the edge of the brake discs
irrespective of their length.
3. If the checks of the brake discs show they do not meet
the requirements, grind or renew the brake discs.
Contact a Scania workshop.
Checking brake linings
IMPORTANT!
Look carefully for any uneven wear as this can be caused by
the brake calliper sticking.
1. Measure the thickness of the brake lining between the

brake disc and the brake lining backing plate.
534 Complete
Maintenance
b204052
Measuring brake lining thickness.
It is important to look carefully for any uneven wear.

This may be caused by the brake caliper sticking.
2. Measure any wear edges on the brake disc and add them
to the brake lining thickness.
b204068
Measuring brake disc wear edge.
If the brake lining wear surface is under 2 mm, they must

be renewed.
If the brake disc thickness is less than 40 mm, the brake
linings must be at least 4 mm.
Complete
535
Maintenance
Checking the brake system
IMPORTANT!
Check the brake system for leaks regularly. If you notice
that it is taking longer for the brake system to reach the
correct pressure, take the vehicle to a Scania workshop to
be examined.
1. Stop the engine when the brake pressure is about 8 bar.

2. Press the brake pedal and hold it in the depressed
position.
3. Read off the brake pressure in the instrument cluster.
If the pressure falls markedly within one minute, there is
probably a leakage which must be rectified. Contact a
Scania workshop.
Fifth wheel
IMPORTANT!
The fifth wheel top plate must be lubricated with grease
that can withstand high pressure, e.g. EP with MoS2 or
grease with added graphite. Fifth wheels with teflon-coated
top plates must be lubricated with a very thin layer after
cleaning.
536 Complete
Maintenance
Note!
Always check the trailer kingpin and the semi-trailer sliding
surface when connecting a semi-trailer. A damaged and
dirty trailer kingpin and semi-trailer sliding surface may
damage the fifth wheel and cause accidents.
Fifth wheel maintenance

Maintenance of the fifth wheel is important. A well lubricated
and clean top plate and locking device are important for
ensuring that the fifth wheel can be locked properly. If the fifth
wheel cannot be locked properly, this may cause an accident.
Maintenance items for the fifth wheel

Clean, check and lubricate the fifth wheel parts.
1. Clean the top plate, locking device, wear ring and trailer
kingpin.
2
1
1. Top plate
3 2. Wear ring
b403575
3. Locking device
2. Check that there are no cracks or other damage to the

fifth wheel or the fifth wheel attachment to the chassis.
Complete
537
Maintenance
3. Then check that the locking device locks and that there
is no free play in the lock.
Contact a Scania workshop for more information about
the minimum permitted dimensions for wear and other
checks of the fifth wheel.
4. Lubricate the fifth wheel’s parts at the intervals shown in
the table.
Lubrication of the fifth wheel’s parts

Table for lubrication intervals.
Top plate Every three weeks or 50,000

km
Locking device Every three weeks or 50,000

km
Wear ring Every three weeks or 50,000

km
Trailer kingpin on semi- Every three weeks or 50,000

trailer km

538 Complete
Maintenance

km

km

km

trailer km
If a semi-trailer is connected, locking device maintenance is

performed every month or 10,000 km. Maintenance is
performed on all parts every 25,000 km when driving in dirty
environments.


km

km

km
Complete
539
Maintenance

trailer km

Top plate Every month or 10,000 km
Locking device Every month or 10,000 km
Wear ring Every month or 10,000 km
Trailer kingpin on semi- Every month or 10,000 km

trailer

Top plate Every month or 10,000 km
Locking device Every month or 10,000 km
Wear ring Every month or 10,000 km
Trailer kingpin on semi- Every month or 10,000 km

trailer
540 Complete
Maintenance
Checking the automatic chassis lubrication

(ACL)
1. Checking the level and function of ACL.
2. Clean and check the lubrication points on the fifth wheel
that are lubricated via ACL.
ACL checks are performed at the same time as
maintenance of the fifth wheel.
For more information on filling and checking ACL, see the

Automatic chassis lubrication section.
Internal cleaning
Note!
Never use chemical solvents since they damage the vinyl.
Cleaning the cab

Clean the cab’s internal surfaces and interior regularly as
follows.
Use a vacuum cleaner with protective grounding and connect it
to an grounded electrical socket.
1. Vacuum textile floor coverings and clean them with
carpet shampoo and a brush or sponge. Also vacuum the
seat upholstery to remove dust and other loose particles.
Complete
541
Maintenance
2. Wipe the floor surfaces of the cab clean with a damp

cleaning cloth and use lukewarm water and a mild
detergent.
Cleaning stains on upholstery

Clean stains as follows.
For oil stains on the seat upholstery, it is important to clean in
the right way using the correct detergent.
• Stains left by liquids such as carbonated drinks or light
oil must be removed immediately.
1. Remove as much as possible of the liquid with a clean
cleaning cloth or other material that absorbs the liquid.
2. Then use a detergent which is suitable for the type of
upholstery, leather or vinyl.
When removing dirt or stains, it is important to work
from the outer edges of the stain and in towards the
centre to avoid ring marks.
If cleaning does however leave a ring, or if there is any
remaining dirt, it will usually disappear after washing
with a lukewarm soap solution or water.
Oiling leather upholstery

Leather upholstery should be oiled at least twice a year and
always after cleaning.
Never use chemical solvents since they damage the leather.
542 Complete
Maintenance
• Use a wax-based product intended for oiling leather

upholstery.
• Use soap or leather cleaner for cleaning.
• Remember to oil the leather after cleaning.
Do not forget the steering wheel.
Cleaning vinyl upholstery

Never use chemical solvents since they damage the vinyl.
1. Vinyl upholstery should be cleaned with water and a
soap solution.
2. You can also use a mixture of one part isopropyl alcohol
to two parts water (1:2).
External cleaning
IMPORTANT!
Do not carry out high pressure cleaning or walk on the
silencer heat shield under the vehicle since this may damage
the material.
Complete
543
Maintenance
IMPORTANT!
If large tears occur on the heat shield, the material must be
renewed. Inadequate heat insulation capacity can cause
overheating of adjacent components and there is a risk of
personal injury.
ENVIRONMENT
Protect the environment. As far as possible, use detergents
that have been environmentally adapted.
IMPORTANT!
High pressure wash the rest cooler module at a distance of
at least 50 cm to avoid the risk of damage and impaired
performance. The rest cooler module is located on the left-
hand side of the cab, near the battery box.
Cleaning the cab

The cab must be cleaned often; it is important to consider the
following.
When new, the cab should be cleaned by hand with only cold
water and a clean soft brush through which the water can flow.
544 Complete
Maintenance
Avoid machine washers for the first 5-6 months until the
paintwork has had time to harden. Fold in the front view mirror
and the external mirrors in automatic washers.
You can add a special vehicle detergent to lukewarm water to
make washing easier. Avoid washing and leaving the vehicle to
dry in the sun.
Clean windows inside and out using window cleaner.
You can remove traces of asphalt with a cleaning cloth
dampened with white spirit. Do not use strong detergents.
They could make the paintwork dry out.
Cleaning the chassis

The chassis must be cleaned often; it is important to consider
the following.
• Keep the chassis as clean as the cab. You should use eco-
friendly detergents.
• Take care not to remove grease from spring brackets, etc.
when using high-pressure jets. If this does happen, they
must be re-greased.
Complete
545
Maintenance
Important when using high pressure cleaning

equipment
Clean the vehicle under high pressure carefully and take the
instructions into account.
Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment on e.g. the
universal joint cross, support bearings and slip joint, so as not to
damage the seals. Do not direct the jet towards seals. Water
may enter the seals and cause damage.
Cleaning the exhaust system

Clean the exhaust system carefully and take the following
IMPORTANT!
Do not flush water into the exhaust pipe when the engine is
running. When the NOxsensor has started, it will be
damaged if in contact with water. Flush out any remaining
water by revving up the engine to 1,500 rpm for a few
seconds as quickly as possible after starting the engine.
546 Complete
Maintenance
Cleaning the engine compartment

Clean the engine compartment carefully and take the following
Clean the engine and engine compartment with warm water.
Use high-pressure jets with caution. Avoid spraying electrical
components such as the starter motor, alternator, etc.
Tyres and rims
WARNING!
Never pump up the tyre on a wheel that is not fitted to the
vehicle. The wheel may be flung out if the tyre bursts.
The vehicle’s pneumatic system can be used when pumping
up tyres. To reduce the risk of a puncture, only use the
parking brake circuit, which supplies a maximum pressure
of 8.5 bar.
Only pump up tyres which are undamaged and which have
a satisfactory tread depth.
Always adjust the air pressure to the load. Incorrect air
pressure can affect roadholding.
Complete
547
Maintenance
WARNING!
Never replace tyres on rims if you do not have the suitable
equipment and necessary experience.
It is important that you follow the Driver's Manual instructions

to avoid vibrations in the front axle caused by the wheels.
The vehicle's front axles are designed to give quick and
responsive steering, provide a good feel for the road and are
easy to steer. This requires the roundness of wheels and the
flatness of rims to meet strict standards.
When renewing tyres

Consider the following instructions when renewing tyres.
Mark the rim’s position in relation

to the hub so that it is refitted in
b201768
the same position.
548 Complete
Maintenance
• Front axle rims should be used for the front axle, rear
axle rims for the rear axle. Avoid mixing the two.
• Check that the rim complies with Scania standards for
flatness. Only use rims which meet these requirements.
Consult a Scania workshop regarding marking.
• When renewing a tyre on the front axle, the same rim
should be used. Fit rims back in the same position they
were in before removal.
• Front wheels should be balanced before fitting. If
vibration still occurs, the wheel should be balanced
whilst fitted to the front axle. The wheels are usually
balanced by tyre workshops.
• Renew both tyres at the same time on a twin mounting.
Choice of tyre
Depending on the choice of tyre, devices including the
tachograph need to be reset.
The vehicle and tyres are correctly matched on delivery.
Changing to a different tyre dimension can alter the overall
gear ratio of the vehicle. This means that the tachograph must
be reset. Contact a Scania workshop for help in resetting the
tachograph.
For information on, e.g. load index and axle weight, see the Tyre
pressures section in the Technical data chapter.
Do not exceed the maximum rated speed for the tyres. Refer to
the table for the speed index and the maximum permitted speed.
Complete
549
Maintenance
Speed index Maximum permitted speed

in km/h
D 65
E 70
F 80
G 90
J 100
K 110
L 120
M 130
Type of tyre
There are two different types of tyres: radial tyres and cross-ply
tyres.
Scania advises against use of cross-ply tyres since they have
much poorer properties than radial tyres.
Radial tyres:
• Generate less heat

• Are more efficient at thermal dissipation
• Are more resistant to punctures
550 Complete
Maintenance
• Have less rolling resistance, which leads to lower fuel

consumption
• Improve comfort
• Have a larger contact surface against the ground, which
improves brake performance, drive capability, directional
stability, roadholding and produces less wear.
Checking the tyres

Check that tyre wear is evenly distributed across the entire
width of the tread. When wear is uneven, it must be
investigated and the cause rectified.
Check tread depth. Different countries have different legal
requirements regarding tread depth. Comply with the
legislation of the country in question.
• If air pressure is too high, tyre wear increases and
comfort may be reduced.
• If air pressure is too low, fuel consumption increases and
tyre wear may increase.
Wheel change
WARNING!
Switch off the power and switch off the battery master
switch before renewing wheels on the tag axle.
Complete
551
Maintenance
WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Both
the chassis and moving axle suspension components must
be secured to ensure absolute safety when working under a
raised vehicle. There is a high risk of crush injuries.
WARNING!
You must chock the vehicle wheels to prevent the vehicle
from rolling whilst work is being carried out.
WARNING!
Ensure that the jack is stable on level ground.
WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle with air suspension which is
not fully secured against falling in case there is a change of
pressure in the air bellows. There is a high risk of crush
injuries.
Removing wheels
Proceed as follows to remove a wheel from the vehicle.
552 Complete
Maintenance
IMPORTANT!
Only position the jack at the specified lifting points. If it is
positioned differently, serious damage to the vehicle could
result.
1. Engage a low gear and turn the key to the lock position.
Put the drive mode selector in neutral for automatic
gearboxes.
2. Block in front of and behind the wheels remaining on
the ground.
Lock the vehicle’s wheels with

wheel chocks to prevent the
vehicle from moving while work is
b201769
being carried out.
3. Release the parking brake on the wheels to be renewed.

This is to ensure that the wheel and the brake drum are
in contact with the hub when tightening.
4. Mark the position of the rim on the hub.
Complete
553
Maintenance
b201768
5. Slacken off the wheel nuts without removing them.

6. Raise the vehicle using the jack.
7. Ensure that the jack is stable on level ground.
Only position the jack at the specified lifting points. If it
is positioned differently, serious damage to the vehicle
could result.
For more information, see the Chassis lifting points
section.
8. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.
Fitting wheels
Proceed as follows to fit a wheel to the vehicle.
554 Complete
Maintenance
IMPORTANT!
Check-tighten the wheel nuts to 650 Nm after driving
approx. 100 km.
IMPORTANT!
A Scania workshop should tighten the wheel nuts to the
correct torque. Too high or too low a torque can cause the
wheels to come loose or make the brake drum oval.
1. Thoroughly clean the contact surfaces. Use a wire brush.
b204648
Spacing rings are fitted on some rims. Clean these as

well.
Thick coats of paint, rust and dirt can lead to loosening
of the wheel nuts and consequently, the stud holes in the
rim and the brake drum becoming oval.
Complete
555
Maintenance
2. Clean the threads of the wheel studs.

Check that the parking brake is released on the axle in
question.
b201771
3. Refit the wheel as it was positioned before removal.

Compare with the mark.
b201768
4. Tighten the wheel nuts in the correct sequence as shown

in the figure.
556 Complete
Maintenance
Never use a flywheel type nut runner. Tighten the nuts

to 650 Nm.
b339546
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the wheel chocks.
Scania recommends that a line is drawn above the

wheel stud and the wheel nuts so that any deviations
are easier to detect. Use a marker pen. If a wheel nut
b338216
deviates, remove the wheel nut completely and refit it.
6. Check-tighten the wheel nuts to 650 Nm after driving

approx. 100 km.
Complete
557
Maintenance
Paintwork damage
Scania cabs are manufactured in galvanised steel plate. You
should treat paintwork damage as soon as it is detected to
reduce the risk of rust forming.
A professional paint shop should be used for more extensive
damage to obtain satisfactory results. However, you can repair
minor damage such as chips caused by flying stones and
individual scratches yourself.
Repairing paintwork damage

If the damage has not gone through to the metal and there is a
coat of protective paint remaining, you can clean thoroughly
and apply the touch-up paint directly.
Repairing paintwork damage

If there is a chip in the metal and rust has appeared, you can
repair damage to the paintwork as follows:
1. Scrape away all superficial rust.
2. Rub the damaged surface down to the metal.
3. Afterwards, apply a zinc-based primer as a reinforcing
layer to maintain corrosion protection.
The primer must be suitable for use on galvanised sheet
metal.
4. Then, apply one coat of primer.
Shake the primer well before use.
558 Complete
Maintenance
5. Finally, apply the finishing coat in several thin layers so

that the damaged area attains the same height as the
surrounding paintwork.
Shake the finishing coat well before use.
Allow the paint to dry between coats.
Waxing and polishing

The paintwork must be thoroughly clean before you start
waxing and polishing.
A new vehicle should not be waxed until after 5-6 months.
Polishing is not required until the paintwork has oxidised and
become dull. Polish and abrasives may be used only in
exceptional cases on a new vehicle. Contact your Scania
workshop for advice.
Wheel chocks
WARNING!
When parked the vehicle must have the brakes applied and
be secured so that it cannot move.
The wheel chocks are used when there is a risk that the vehicle
may move unintentionally.
On the vehicle there are one or two wheel chocks on the side of
the vehicle or on the back of the frame.
Complete
559
Maintenance
Loosening and fastening wheel chocks

How to loosen and fasten wheel chocks on the frame.
When you remove the wheel chocks:
• Fasten the rubber strap to the holder.
After use:
• Attach the wheel chock with the rubber strap and latch
clamp, see figure.
1. Pull the rubber strap through

the slots in the wheel chock
and hook firmly onto the
brackets on either side of the
wheel chock. The appearance
of the bracket varies from
vehicle to vehicle.
2. Make sure the spring-loaded

latch clamp is in the correct
b210784
position, see illustration.
560 Complete
Emergencies
Emergencies
Emergency exit
WARNING!
The vehicle is equipped with unbreakable windows and
another exit must be used in the event of an emergency.
If an emergency situation arises, it may be necessary to evacuate

the vehicle.
The door must always be used first as emergency exits.
Depending on the situation and the vehicle specification,
windows or roof hatch may also be used as emergency exits.
Emergency hammer
In an emergency in which the door cannot be opened, you can
break the door window using the emergency hammer to enable
evacuation.
The emergency hammer is located behind the door on the
driver’s side in the cab. Use the emergency hammer to break
the window in the door so that you can get out in an
emergency.
Complete
561
Emergencies
b380814
Emergency hammer location.
Emergency kit
The emergency kit contains items that can be used for
assistance in an emergency.
From left to right: first-aid kit, sign,

reflecting waistcoat, flash light and
b213137
flash light bracket.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle alerts others to the presence of a
stationary vehicle.
The warning triangle is located by the cab’s rear wall, either in
the storage compartment or behind the passenger seat.
562 Complete
Emergencies
Towing and recovery
WARNING!
It is common for several of the vehicle functions to be
disengaged or out of order during recovery and towing.
IMPORTANT!
If towing or recovering the vehicle farther than 500 metres,
detach the propeller shaft. If you do not detach the
propeller shaft, the gearbox could be damaged. Refer to the
section Detaching the propeller shaft.
IMPORTANT!
If the vehicle is without power or without compressed air,
the propeller shafts on both the front and rear axle must be
detached before towing. This must be done when towing
both with and without a raised front axle.
WARNING!
It is not permitted to tow if the towed vehicle does not have
functioning brakes.
Complete
563
Emergencies
IMPORTANT!
Never tow with the clutch pedal depressed. The gearbox
can be damaged.
IMPORTANT!
Tow-starting must not be done for stretches longer than
500 metres. Otherwise, the gearbox could be damaged
through insufficient lubrication.
WARNING!
functioning brakes.
Recovery is always preferable to towing. All towing must be

done using a drawbar.
Recovery should be entrusted to a recovery company authorised
for heavy vehicles.
Filling the brake system with air

If it is not possible to start the engine, the brake system must be
filled with air using an alternative method.
564 Complete
Emergencies
Recovery vehicles usually have connections for compressed air

which can supply the vehicle to be towed/recovered with air.
Your vehicle has a connection for compressed air positioned
behind the cab on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Location of compressed air

b360489
connection.
Preparatory operations for towing and

recovery
• When recovering with axles in contact with the ground,
the propeller shaft must be removed from the driving
axle in contact with the ground.
• Before recovering from a ditch, unload the vehicle and
clear the ditch of stones etc. that may damage or get
caught in the vehicle when pulling.
• Check that no damage has occurred to the vehicle that
may cause a short circuit in the electrical system. If this
is the case, disconnect the batteries to prevent fire.
Complete
565
Emergencies
• When carrying out a recovery on a road, the vehicle

should always be lifted without a load. Alternatively, the
front axle weight can be reduced as much as possible.
These preparations also need to be made for all-wheel drive

vehicles.
If the vehicle is without power or without compressed air, the
propeller shafts on both the front and rear axle must be
detached before towing. This must be carried out when towing
with or without the front axle raised.
b390487
Drive wheel disengagement switch.
• Disengage the driving wheels to prevent damage to the

propeller shaft and transfer gearbox.
There are two ways of disengaging the gearbox when

recovering or towing all-wheel drive vehicles.
• Through the disengagement of driving wheels function.
For more information on disengaging driving wheels,
refer to the Disengagement section in the Drive wheel
disengagement section.
• By removing the propeller shaft from the front and rear
axles. For more information, refer to the Detaching the
propeller shaft section.
• If possible, raise the tag axle. If this cannot be done,
centre the tag axle.
• Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the current
position.
566 Complete
Emergencies
The symbol for EST lights up yellow during

recovery
The actions apply during recovery of the vehicle.
b200356
There is a fault in the EST system.

The tag axle is centred automatically when a yellow fault
occurs. Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the centred
position.
The symbol for EST lights up red during

recovery
The actions apply during recovery of the vehicle.
b200356
There is a serious fault in the EST system.

1. Centre the tag axle manually or tow the vehicle straight
ahead until the tag axle is centred. The ignition must be
switched on when the centring is being done.
2. Switch off the power to lock the tag axle in the centred
position.
See the EST section for more information.
Complete
567
Emergencies
Centring the tag axle in the event of low

battery voltage
If the battery voltage of the towed vehicle is low, there is a risk
that EST cannot lock the tag axle.
Proceed as follows to centre the tag axle:
1. Connecting jump start
2. Start the voltage.
3. If necessary: centre the tag axle manually.
4. Switch off the voltage.
5. Disconnect jump start.
Recovery from a ditch
Vehicle with leaf spring

b201304
suspension, front
When recovering from a ditch, the spring attachment on the

front axle beam is a suitable towing point.
568 Complete
Emergencies
Recovery from a ditch
b360487
When recovering from a ditch, the front axle at the air bellows
attachment is a suitable towing point.
Recovery from a ditch – from the rear and

from the side
1. Attach the recovery equipment to the body frame when
the vehicle is pulled backwards or sideways.
Recovery tool
When carrying out recovery of a vehicle standing on level
ground, Scania recommends using the recovery tool.
b360811
Recovery tool
Complete
569
Emergencies
The recovery tool has been designed for lifting the vehicle. The
recovery tools can be attached to both sides of the vehicle. The
recovery tool must not be used if the vehicle to be recovered has
a front axle weight that exceeds 10 ton.
Do not lift directly by the towing brackets without using the
tool. The towing brackets will break as the distribution of forces
is incorrect.
Securing the recovery tool
Attachment point for the recovery

tool. The recovery tools can be
attached to both sides of the
b360810
vehicle.
Towing the vehicle

When towing, the tow pin should be used together with a
drawbar.
570 Complete
Emergencies
b360490
The tow pin can be positioned on both sides of the vehicle.
1. Pull away the rubber protection and attach the tow pin
to one of the attachment points.
It is not permitted to tow if the towed vehicle does not
have functioning brakes.
Towing
The vehicle is fitted with a heavy-duty front.
Complete
571
Emergencies
b402571
1. Tow pin
When towing, the tow pin should be used together with a

drawbar.
functioning brakes.
Towing connection
Depending on the vehicle’s specification, the vehicle may be
fitted with:
• Tow pin that is used during towing. Maximum load for

the tow pin is 25 tonnes.
• Recovery lugs at the front and back of the vehicle which
can be used for recovery and to secure the vehicle during
transport.
• Connections for compressed air. First connect the yellow
line (control line) and then the red line (supply line).
572 Complete
Emergencies
• 12-pin trailer socket for connection to towed or towing

vehicle.

functioning brakes.
2 1. Recovery lugs
4
3
2. 12-pin trailer socket
3. Tow pin
b400393
1
4. Connection for compressed air
4
1 1. Tow pin
2. Recovery lugs
2
3. Compressed air connection
3
2
b400394
4. 12-pin trailer socket
When towing
The vehicle should preferably be unladen when towing. If
possible, run the engine at idle speed to obtain power steering
and air pressure in the brake system. The parking brake may be
applied automatically at a pressure drop in the brake system if it
has been released by air supplied to the brake system.
Therefore, if air is not continuously supplied from the towing
vehicle, stop at regular intervals and charge the air system.
Complete
573
Emergencies
90 kN
30°
240 kN
30°
b396233
90 kN
In cases of recovery, consideration must be given to the

maximum load of the tow pin which is 240 kN straight forwards
and dropping to 90 kN at a 30° angle.
b360488
High demands are placed on the person steering the towed
vehicle. The drawbar can turn in relation to the attachment. It
can result in the vehicles colliding. The illustration shows how
the vehicles should be in relation to each other while towing.
When towing
The vehicle should preferably be unladen when towing. If
possible, run the engine at idle speed to obtain power steering
and air pressure in the brake system. The parking brake may be
applied automatically at a pressure drop in the brake system if it
has been released by air supplied to the brake system.
Therefore, if air is not continuously supplied from the towing
vehicle, stop at regular intervals and charge the air system.
574 Complete
Emergencies
150 kN
30°
400 kN
30°
b396232
150 kN
In cases of recovery, consideration must be given to the

maximum load of the tow pin which is 400 kN straight forwards
and dropping to 150 kN at a 30° angle.
b376335
High demands are placed on the person steering the towed
vehicle. The drawbar can turn in relation to the attachment. It
can result in the vehicles colliding. The illustration shows how
the vehicles should be in relation to each other while towing.
Tow starting the vehicle

Proceed as follows to tow start the vehicle.
1. Use a drawbar.
2. Fill the vehicle with air.
3. Put the drive mode selector in high range in the vehicle
that is to be tow started.
Complete
575
Emergencies
GRS GR
H H
b201789
Tow starting the vehicle

Proceed as follows to tow start the vehicle.
1. Select manual and engage a suitable gear.
Shunting
IMPORTANT!
Shunting with the engine switched off must not be carried
out for more than 500 metres unless the propeller shaft is
disconnected from the rear axle central gear. This is to
avoid damage to the gearbox.
Shunting involves the towing or pushing of a vehicle at low

speed in a restricted area in order to move the vehicle into the
correct position.
576 Complete
Emergencies
GRS GR
H H
N N
b201405
Drive mode selector.
The drive mode selector must be in high range and the gearbox
in neutral.
Shunting involves the towing or pushing of a vehicle at low
speed in a restricted area in order to move the vehicle into the
correct position.
2. Turn the drive mode selector to Drive.
3. Add high range gears by pulling the Opticruise lever
towards you.
4. Turn the drive mode selector to neutral position (D).
Complete
577
Emergencies
Detaching the propeller shaft
IMPORTANT!
The gearbox oil pump is not driven during towing and
recovery. To avoid damage to the gearbox, the propeller
shaft should therefore be detached from the rear axle
central gear and secured to the frame.
If the propeller shaft comes loose by the gearbox, there is a
risk that it will rotate and strike and damage the cables in
the chassis frame. There is also a risk that even the
propeller shaft will be damaged.
IMPORTANT!
If any of the bearing retainers fall off a new universal joint
cross with bearing retainer must be fitted. This is because
dirt may have penetrated.
Disconnect the propeller shaft, P400-P500

2. Undo the screws in the central gear end yoke.
578 Complete
Emergencies
b201955
3. Screw in M16 screws (4 off) in the two bearing retainers.

Tighten the screws alternately towards the end yoke
until both bearing retainers are loose.
b201956
4. Hold the shaft and remove the screws.
Complete
579
Emergencies
b366875
5. Attach the shaft to the chassis and cover the universal

joint and bearing retainer with a plastic bag.
b209493
If the spring is broken or missing, tie the bearing

retainers to the universal joint cross so the bearing
retainers do not fall off. Then secure the shaft to the
chassis.
580 Complete
Emergencies
b201957
Disconnect the propeller shaft, P604, P644

2. Undo the screws at the rear axle central gear.
b412108
3. Screw in the M12 screws in the two bearing retainers.

Tighten the screws alternately towards the end yoke
until both bearing retainers are loose.
Complete
581
Emergencies
b412107
IMPORTANT!
Do not use a nut runner.
4. Hold the shaft and remove the screws.

5. Secure the axle to the chassis.
If the propeller shaft is at risk of exposure to dirt or
water, cover the cross slots on the propeller shaft flange.
582 Complete
Emergencies
b201986
Release the parking brake without
compressed air
WARNING!
When the parking brake is disabled and the compressed air
system of the vehicle is empty, the vehicle will not have any
working brakes.
To release the parking brake without compressed air, proceed as

follows.
Be aware that the vehicle is completely without brakes when
you carry out the following actions.
Complete
583
Emergencies
1. Lock the wheels with wheel chocks or connect a drawbar

to another vehicle to prevent the vehicle from moving.
b201312
Location of wheel chocks.
2. Undo the release bolts in the spring brake chambers.

Slacken a release bolt by turning it until it gets
resistance, see the following illustration.
The release bolt will come out a

little from the cylinder when it is
b201852
undone.
Do not use a nut runner to loosen or apply the release

bolt in the spring brake chamber as the release bolt can
break.
The release bolt may protrude by about 35 or 60
millimetres, depending on whether it is a disc brake or a
drum brake.
3. Affix a label on the steering wheel to warn that the
vehicle is without brakes.
584 Complete
Emergencies
Label on the steering wheel to

ES
BR NO
warn that the vehicle has no

AK
b211673
brakes.
Chassis lifting points
WARNING!
To ensure maximum safety when working under a raised
vehicle, both the chassis and axles must be supported with
axle stands.
WARNING!
Never work under a vehicle supported only with a jack.
Lifting with a jack

1. Apply the parking brake and block the wheels before
lifting the vehicle with a jack. Ensure that the jack is
stable on level ground.
Use the vehicle’s lifting points.
Complete
585
Emergencies
Lifting points on the front axle
Use the adapter found in the tool

b399495
kit.
Lifting points on the rear axle

b201244
By the spring mounting.
586 Complete
Emergencies
b201746
By the intended jack point.
Lifting points on the rear axle

b201243
By the spring mounting.
Complete
587
Emergencies
Spare wheel
Note!
Always screw the lifting yoke to the holder using the nuts,
even if the holder is empty.
Only wind up the lifting yoke far enough to screw the nuts
into place. Do not tighten the lifting yoke against the spare
wheel carrier.
Lowering the spare wheel

In order to access the spare wheel, you must lower it.
To lower the spare wheel you use a crank and the cab tilting
handle bar. The crank is placed in a bag with loose objects that
accompanies the vehicle. The handle bar consists of 2 parts that
are assembled. They are placed in the front grille side panels.
1. Remove the nuts securing the wheel to the holder.
588 Complete
Emergencies
b347039
2. Assemble the crank and the cab tilting handle bar.

3. Fit the handle bar to the spare wheel carrier and lower
the wheel to the ground.
b347040
Complete
589
Emergencies
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit
WARNING!
The parking brake is released as soon as air starts to fill.
Make sure the vehicle cannot move.
The filler nipple is used to fill the parking brake circuit with air,
when e.g. towing short distances.
Filling the parking brake circuit with air

b356971
Filler nipple for parking brake circuit
1. Chock the wheels so that the vehicle cannot move.

2. Remove the cover over the filler nipple using a
screwdriver, for example.
3. Fill the parking brake circuit with air, e.g. with a hose
from a tyre or from another vehicle.
4. Loosen the interlock valve, if the vehicle is fitted with
such.
590 Complete
Emergencies
5. Release the parking brake lever.
The parking brake can now be applied normally, but only once.
Location of filler nipple for parking brake

circuit
b383387
Filler nipple and its location.
The filler nipple is located on the chassis frame. The filler

nipple can be accessed from below, which is suitable when the
vehicle has a bodywork or a coupled trailer.
Filling the parking brake circuit with air via

the filler nipple
1. Lock the wheels with wheel chocks so that the vehicle
cannot move.
Complete
591
Emergencies
2. Remove the protection from the filler nipple.

3. Fill air in the parking brake circuit, e.g. with a hose from
a tyre or from another vehicle.
592 Complete
Electrical system
Electrical system
Fuses and relays
WARNING!
When renewing a fuse, disconnect the power by using the
battery master switch or remove the battery minus
terminal.
IMPORTANT!
Always fit a fuse of the rating specified in the list and of a
type that is equivalent to the original fuse.
Opening the central electric unit

The central electric unit with fuses is located in the cab.
Proceed as follows to remove the panel when replacing a fuse.
1 1. Remove the side panel.
2. Turn the locking device.

Remove the panel by carefully
2
loosening the clips, starting
from the right-hand corner.
Then remove the panel from
b364640
the hook.
Complete
593
Electrical system
Opening the central electric unit

The central electric unit with fuses is located in the cab.
Proceed as follows to remove the panel when replacing a fuse.
1 1. Remove the side panel.
2. Turn the locking device.

Remove the panel by carefully
2
loosening the clips, starting
from the left-hand corner.
Then remove the panel from
b369448
the hook.
Symbols for fuses and relays
Fuses
b206546
Relays
b206545
594 Complete
Electrical system
Fuses
Position Symbol Explanation
1 Relay for electrical

equipment that is
b374117
not activated until
the engine has
started.
2 Door node,
driver’s side
b364585
3 Door node,
passenger side
b364584
4 Coordinator
b206487
5 Starter key
b364583
6 Diagnostic socket
b396012
Complete
595
Electrical system
7 CAN node
b206487
8 24 V socket
b206509
9 RTC
(Communication
b373782
unit)
10 Fuse for distance

sensor
b364581
11 Tachograph
b206489
12 External lighting
b364580
13 Fan
b364579
596 Complete
Electrical system
14 Instrument cluster
b206488
15 short-range
communication
system
b206489
16 LIN remote
control
b206487
17 Coffee maker
b206541
18 FLC (Forward
looking camera)
b364578
19 CTS (Clock and

timer system)
b364577
20 Internal lighting
b206455
Complete
597
Electrical system
21 Fuel heater
22
b206474
23 Rotating beacon
b206453
24 BCI (bodywork
communication
b364576
interface)
25 Bodywork
b374153
equipment
26 Alarm
b206498
27 Short-stop heater
b364577
28 Refrigerator
b206508
598 Complete
Electrical system
29 Cab tilting
b373783
30 ERA GLONASS
b396011
31 Alcolock
b364589
32 WTA (Auxiliary
water heater)
b364577
33 Roof hatch
b373611
35 Road toll unit
36
b206535
37 Locking steered
rear axle on trailer
b206460
Complete
599
Electrical system
40 Supply to gas
engine
b396010
41 Tipper body
b396009
43 Internal lighting
b206455
44 FLC (Forward
looking camera)
b364578
45 Fuel cooler
46
b213896
47 Automatic chassis
lubrication
b206517
48 Telephone
b364596
600 Complete
Electrical system
49 Fold-out step
b206540
50 Subwoofer
b364595
51 Parking cooler
b364594
52 Cab tilting
b373783
53 Work light
b373656
54 Parking brake
b364592
55 APS (Air
processing system)
b206468
Complete
601
Electrical system
56 Allison gearbox
b206469
57 Auxiliary cab
cooler
b373669
59 ABS on trailer
b374086
60 Trailer lighting.
b364591
63 All-purpose
b406708
communication
system for vehicles.
602 Complete
Electrical system
69 Driver assistance
system (lane
departure warning,
b396008
adaptive cruise
control, advanced
emergency braking
and alert signal)
70 Hazard warning
LED lamp control
system
b396007
101 Side marker lamp

b364588
102 Roof sign lamp

and rear position
lamp, right-hand
b364609
side, green ID
lamp
103 Position and side

marker lamps, left-
hand side
b364608
Complete
603
Electrical system
104 Position and side

marker lamps,
right-hand side
b364607
105 Position lamps on
trailer, left-hand
side
b364606
106 Position lamps on

trailer, right-hand
side
b364605
107 Spotlights and rear

position lamp, left-
hand side
b364604
108 BWE (Bodywork

electrical system)
b364603
109 Position lamp, box

truck bodywork
b366639
604 Complete
Electrical system
121 15 voltage
b364602
122 Window winders,
driver’s side
b364601
123 Window winder,

passenger side
b364600
124 Tachograph
b206489
125 Seat heating

b364619
126 Airbag
b206514
Complete
605
Electrical system
127 Alcolock
b364589
128 Rear view mirror
heating
b206493
129 Electrically
adjustable air
deflector
b396030
136 Cigarette lighter

b206515
137 Tag axle lift

b206459
138 ERA GLONASS

b396011
139 HVF
b206535
606 Complete
Electrical system
140 BWE (Bodywork

electrical system)
b364618
142 ABS on trailer
b206476
144 Tipper body

heating
b373653
145 Road toll unit

b206535
146 UFS (Unlocking of

Fifth Wheel
b373670
Slider)
151 Radio
b206499
Complete
607
Electrical system
153 12 volt electrical

socket
b206497
154 Climate control
b206542
155 Radio
b206499
156 CBR (Two-way

radio)
b364615
157 TV
b364614
159 Rain sensor

b364613
608 Complete
Electrical system
160 12 volt electrical

socket
b206497
161 A/C compressor
for hybrid vehicle,
b406707
battery charger
165 LIN remote

control
b206487
181 BWE (Bodywork

b374153
electrical system)
182 Microwave oven

b206541
183 Electrically heated

windscreen
b215841
191 COO
(Coordinator)
b206487
Complete
609
Electrical system
192 BWE (Bodywork

electrical system)
b364612
193 POW
(Distribution of
electrical power in
b364611 the vehicle)
194 COO
(Coordinator)
b364610
Fuses
34 Converter 2 for
A/C fan
b395923
38 Window winder,
driver’s side
b366642
39 Window winder,
passenger side
b366641
610 Complete
Electrical system
42 Converter 1 for fan

heater
b395923
58 Converter 3 for
A/C fan heater
b395923
158 b400698
Climate control
Relays
R8 Brake lights, trailer

b364591
R14 15 relay
b374115
R19 61 relay
b374117
Complete
611
Electrical system
R20 15 relay
b374115
R21 58 relay
b374116
R39 Internal lighting
b206455
R43 Water separating

fuel filter
b206474
R46 Fuel heater

b206474
R86 Locking steered

rear axle on trailer
b206460
R88A Fold-out step
R88B
b206540
612 Complete
Electrical system
R89A Reverse alarm

switched off
b373610
R103 Fuel cooling
R104
b213896
R106 Electrically heated
windscreen
R107
b215841
R110 Automatic chassis

lubrication
b206517
R112 Radio
b206499
R115 Work light

b373656
R120 Supply to gas

engine
b396010
Complete
613
Electrical system
R121 Cab tilting
b373783
R122 A/C compressor
R124 b396013 AHS, pump for

auxiliary heater
b364577
E53 Signal amplifier for

tachograph
b201938
E21 Tag axle lift

b206459
614 Complete
Electrical system
Central electric unit on chassis
b365992
Location of central electric unit on chassis
Position Symbol System
301 COO
b395921
302 EEC
b206473
303 GMS
b374109
Complete
615
Electrical system
304 BMS, EBS
b374080
305 BMS
306 b374080
b374109 GMS (Allison)
307 - Not connected
308 GMS (Allison)

b374109
309 EMS
EMS
b395934
310 EMS (throttle)

b395933
311 TPM
b395932
616 Complete
Electrical system
312 AWD
b395931
313 EPB
b374067
314 CMS
b395949
315 ELC
b373615
316 EST
b395947
317 EPB
b374067
318 EMS, GAS, OCS

OCS
b395945
319 Equaliser
b395944
Complete
617
Electrical system
320 EMS, variable

EMS geometry
b395934
turbocharger
322 EMS
EMS
b395934
324 Battery charger
b395941
Batteries
WARNING!
The vehicle batteries contain corrosive diluted sulphuric
acid and the toxic metal lead. Lead is harmful to humans
and the environment. Wash your hands after contact with
the battery. The batteries should be handled in accordance
with national regulations on environmentally hazardous
substances.
618 Complete
Electrical system
WARNING!
In case of acid splashes in your eyes: rinse immediately with
running water for at least 15 minutes. Always seek medical
attention if you get acid in your eyes.
If you splash acid on other parts of your body: rinse
immediately with water. Then wash your clothes in a
normal water wash.
WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries while jump starting the
vehicle. A battery can explode as there is a risk of
oxyhydrogen gas being formed in the battery during
charging.
WARNING!
Explosive gas is formed when batteries are being charged.
Smoking is forbidden and any apparatus that can cause
sparks must not be in the vicinity.
WARNING!
Short circuits can cause burns and fire.
Complete
619
Electrical system
WARNING!
Wear eye protection to protect the eyes from battery acid
and sparks.
Wear gloves to avoid burns and short-circuiting due to
rings or other jewellery.
IMPORTANT!
Use only original Scania batteries when the batteries need
to be renewed. They are designed for the demands placed
on batteries fitted at the rear end of the frame.
Risks involved when handling batteries

Handling batteries always involves risks for you and your
surroundings.
Read the warnings and instructions carefully before handling
batteries. Use protective equipment, gloves and eye protection.
Charging the batteries

The battery’s service life can be extended by continuous
charging.
620 Complete
Electrical system
Note!
Always remove the ground connection (negative) before
charging.
Never connect 12 V equipment, e.g. a radio, to only one of
the batteries. The other battery can then be overloaded.
Note!
the batteries when using e.g. rest cooler or other equipment
that affects the lighting or climate.
Charge the batteries with a battery charger. Follow the

instructions supplied with the battery charger. Check that the
terminals are clean and that the cable harness for the battery
charger is undamaged before charging.
The positive and negative terminals are differentiated by the
positive terminal having a red protector. On some vehicles the
minus terminal is located outside the battery box.
Consider the following when charging the batteries:
• If you use power from the batteries you must recharge

them within a day or two.
Complete
621
Electrical system
• Repeated starts and extended periods of idling provide

less effective charging than long runs. Recharge the
batteries if they have not charged through driving.
• It is more difficult to charge a battery at low
temperatures.
• Avoid boost charging the batteries. Boost charging may
shorten the service life of the batteries.
Slow charging
Slow charging is always preferable except in real emergencies.
The current level should be approximately 10% of the battery
capacity. A battery with a capacity of 180 Ah should be charged
with approx. 20 A.
Trickle charging
Continuous charging of the vehicle’s batteries during storage
and parking for a longer time.
If the vehicle is not to be used for a long period, Scania
recommends trickle charging in order to avoid damaging the
batteries.
Boost charging
Boost charging may be used in emergencies when the battery
needs to be charged quickly.
622 Complete
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
One cable terminal must be disconnected before boost
charging. Otherwise, there is a significant risk of damage to
the vehicle’s electronic control units.
Boost charging means that the battery is charged in a shorter

time by using higher power or voltage values than normal.
Avoid boost charging if it is not necessary. The load on the
batteries is very high when boost charging and may impair their
service life.
The symbol for the battery’s charging circuit

lights up red
b374078
Fault in the battery’s charging circuit.

Complete
623
Electrical system
Battery maintenance
The exterior condition of the batteries must be inspected
regularly. Oxide, dirt and moisture can generate leakage
currents and discharge the batteries. The oxide can also result
in poor connections and voltage drop.
• Check that the battery connections are intact.
• Make sure that the batteries, battery terminals, electrical
cables and battery box are clean. Clean with water.
• Grease battery terminals and cable terminals with
Vaseline. Corroded battery cable terminals lead to poor
connection with a reduced current capacity as a result.
Renewing batteries
Renew both batteries at the same time.
IMPORTANT!
Do not disconnect the batteries while the engine is
running. The alternator and other electrical components
can be damaged.
IMPORTANT!
Do not mix up the battery connections. The alternator or
other electrical components can be damaged.
624 Complete
Electrical system
1. Disconnect the ground connection (negative terminal)

first and then the other connections.
Do not knock on the battery cable terminals. Pole
connections and cell plates may come loose.
+ +
The location of the ground

b204328
connection (negative terminal).
2. Remove the old batteries and insert the new batteries.

3. First connect the positive cable (1) and then the ground
connection (2) to the battery’s negative terminal.
Tighten the cable terminals well.
2 1
+ +
b204327
4. Take the batteries to be scrapped to Scania dealers or

workshops.
Complete
625
Electrical system
They will dispose of the batteries in accordance with

national legislation and make sure that they go for
environmentally appropriate recycling. Battery disposal
is a free service.
The batteries contain lead and

b202806
must be recycled.
Batteries
WARNING!
The vehicle batteries contain corrosive diluted sulphuric
acid and the toxic metal lead. Lead is harmful to humans
and the environment. Wash your hands after contact with
the battery. The batteries should be handled in accordance
with national regulations on environmentally hazardous
substances.
626 Complete
Electrical system
WARNING!
In case of acid splashes in your eyes: rinse immediately with
running water for at least 15 minutes. Always seek medical
attention if you get acid in your eyes.
If you splash acid on other parts of your body: rinse
immediately with water. Then wash your clothes in a
normal water wash.
WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries while jump starting the
vehicle. A battery can explode as there is a risk of
oxyhydrogen gas being formed in the battery during
charging.
WARNING!
Explosive gas is formed when batteries are being charged.
Smoking is forbidden and any apparatus that can cause
sparks must not be in the vicinity.
WARNING!
Short circuits can cause burns and fire.
Complete
627
Electrical system
WARNING!
Wear eye protection to protect the eyes from battery acid
and sparks.
Wear gloves to avoid burns and short-circuiting due to
rings or other jewellery.
Note!
The starter batteries have sufficient power to start the
engine, even if the other service batteries in the vehicle
seem discharged.
If the engine does not start, in rare cases the batteries may
be completely discharged. Check that all current consumers
in the cab are switched off. Wait for a few minutes and try
to start the engine again.
the service batteries when using e.g. short-stop cooler or
other equipment that affects the lighting or climate.
The vehicle is fitted with a dual battery system, a couple of

service batteries and a couple of starter batteries.
The service batteries take care of the electric power supply
when the engine is not running and the starter batteries are
628 Complete
Electrical system
only used to start the engine. Other electric power consumption

is normally handled by the alternator.
Risks involved when handling batteries

Handling batteries always involves risks for you and your
surroundings.
Read the warnings and instructions carefully before handling
batteries. Use protective equipment, gloves and eye protection.
Charging the batteries

The battery’s service life can be extended by continuous
charging.
Note!
Always remove the ground connection (negative) before
charging.
Never connect 12 V equipment, e.g. a radio, to only one of
the batteries. The other battery can then be overloaded.
Note!
the batteries when using e.g. rest cooler or other equipment
that affects the lighting or climate.
Complete
629
Electrical system
Charge the batteries with a battery charger. Follow the

instructions supplied with the battery charger. Check that the
terminals are clean and that the cable harness for the battery
charger is undamaged before charging.
The positive and negative terminals are differentiated by the
positive terminal having a red protector. On some vehicles the
minus terminal is located outside the battery box.
Consider the following when charging the batteries:
• If you use power from the batteries you must recharge

them within a day or two.
• Repeated starts and extended periods of idling provide
less effective charging than long runs. Recharge the
batteries if they have not charged through driving.
• It is more difficult to charge a battery at low
temperatures.
• Avoid boost charging the batteries. Boost charging may
shorten the service life of the batteries.
Slow charging
Slow charging is always preferable except in real emergencies.
The current level should be approximately 10% of the battery
capacity. A battery with a capacity of 180 Ah should be charged
with approx. 20 A.
630 Complete
Electrical system
Trickle charging
Continuous charging of the vehicle’s batteries during storage
and parking for a longer time.
If the vehicle is not to be used for a long period, Scania
recommends trickle charging in order to avoid damaging the
batteries.
Boost charging
Boost charging may be used in emergencies when the battery
needs to be charged quickly.
IMPORTANT!
One cable terminal must be disconnected before boost
charging. Otherwise, there is a significant risk of damage to
the vehicle’s electronic control units.
Boost charging means that the battery is charged in a shorter

time by using higher power or voltage values than normal.
Avoid boost charging if it is not necessary. The load on the
batteries is very high when boost charging and may impair their
service life.
Complete
631
Electrical system
The symbol for the battery’s charging circuit

lights up red
b374078
Fault in the battery’s charging circuit.

Battery maintenance
The exterior condition of the batteries must be inspected
regularly. Oxide, dirt and moisture can generate leakage
currents and discharge the batteries. The oxide can also result
in poor connections and voltage drop.
• Check that the battery connections are intact.
• Make sure that the batteries, battery terminals, electrical
cables and battery box are clean. Clean with water.
• Grease battery terminals and cable terminals with
Vaseline. Corroded battery cable terminals lead to poor
connection with a reduced current capacity as a result.
632 Complete
Electrical system
Recycle scrapped batteries
The batteries contain lead and

b202806
must be recycled.
Take scrapped batteries to Scania dealers or workshops. They

will dispose of the batteries in accordance with national
legislation and make sure that they go for environmentally
appropriate recycling. Battery disposal is a free service.
Battery master switch
WARNING!
When the battery master switch cuts off the power, the
engine stops. The vehicle becomes difficult to control if
this occurs when moving. Stop the vehicle, if possible,
before cutting off the power.
Complete
633
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Wait for at least 1.5 minutes after switching off the power
before activating the battery master switch. Otherwise the
SCR system will not have had time to be purged of
reductant residue, which could damage the system.
IMPORTANT!
Do not switch off the battery master switch if the symbol
for the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is displayed.
The battery master switch is a master switch for disengaging the

batteries from the electrical system.
Use the battery master switch to quickly disconnect the power
in an emergency, when loading and unloading the vehicle or to
save energy in the batteries at prolonged breaks in driving.
Wait for at least 10 seconds after switching off the voltage
before activating the battery master switch. Some systems may
require you to wait longer.
Rotary control for battery master switch.

Disconnect the batteries using the rotary control.
634 Complete
Electrical system
b363506
Rotary control for battery master switch.
Switch for battery master switch

Disconnect the batteries using the switch.
b363507
Switch for battery master switch.
Activated battery master switch

Some systems in the vehicle have an electric power supply even
though the battery master switch is activated.
When the battery master switch is activated, the power is always
supplied to the tachograph. Depending on the vehicle’s
Complete
635
Electrical system
specification, the alarm and immobiliser may also have an

electric power supply.
When the battery master switch is activated, the central locking
does not have an electric power supply and therefore it is
impossible to lock the vehicle with e.g. the remote control.
The switch for battery master switch is

flashing yellow
b363507
The diode in the switch flashes yellow.
The battery master switch failed to switch off the current or

switched it off incorrectly.
1. Press the switch again.
636 Complete
Electrical system
The switch for battery master switch lights

up yellow
b363507
The diode in the switch lights up yellow.
Only one electric circuit has been switched off.

Battery charger
Note!
Do not switch off the power with the battery master switch
during charging as the battery will not be charged then.
b376396
Electrical input for the battery charger.
Complete
637
Electrical system
Electrical input for the battery charger and the electrical

b376395
engine heater.
The battery charger supplies the vehicle’s batteries with

charging from a standard grounded electrical socket.
The voltage is connected via a switch above the vehicle’s
batteries and provides voltage to the battery charger, and also to
the vehicle’s engine heater, if fitted.
The electrical input for the battery charger and the electrical
engine heater can be positioned in the front of the vehicle or
behind the cab.
When the electrical cable is connected between the vehicle and
the electrical socket, battery charging is started immediately.
The charging voltage is displayed in the instrument cluster. The
value varies between 26 V and 28.8 V provided the vehicle’s
engine is not running.
Adaptive battery charging

The adaptive battery charging function means that the charging
voltage from the alternator is adjusted to the battery
temperature.
638 Complete
Electrical system
The ability of the battery to charge is dependent on the

temperature of the battery. A cold battery is less able to accept
the charge than a warm battery. Cold batteries therefore reach a
better state of charge if they are charged at a high charging
voltage.
The charging voltage therefore increases when the battery is
cold and reduces when the battery is warm. The charging
voltage is set automatically and cannot be controlled manually.
You can see how high the charging voltage is on the instrument
cluster. The value may vary between 26 V och 30 V.
Jump starting
WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries when using jump leads.
A battery can explode causing severe injuries.
WARNING!
Do not connect batteries in an environment where there
are flammable gases or fluids such as petrol and ethanol.
Complete
639
Electrical system
WARNING!
Follow the instructions exactly to ensure that injuries and
damage do not occur.
IMPORTANT!
Jump starting is only permitted using batteries or Scania
jump starter unit Eurotec 2024 L20.
A different jump starter unit can cause serious damage to
the vehicle’s electrical systems.
IMPORTANT!
Do not run the starter motor for more than 30 seconds
during each start attempt. If the engine has not started after
2 attempts, troubleshoot for a fault. The starter motor must
rest for at least 5 minutes before the next start attempt. The
starter motor is automatically blocked after 35 seconds.
640 Complete
Electrical system
Note!
If the protective paint on the frame is damaged it needs to
be touched up immediately.
Using a jump start, a vehicle with a discharged battery can be

started using a charged battery and jump leads.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged and cannot provide enough
current to start the engine you can connect it to other batteries.
Both systems must have the same battery voltage, i.e. 24 V.
Use heavy-duty jump leads – at least 25 mm² – with insulated
clamps.
Connecting batteries for jump start

Follow the instructions to jump start a discharged battery.
Preparations:
• Start the engine on the vehicle which has charged

batteries.
• All connections (+) should be made on the vehicle
battery which has its positive cable connected directly to
the electrical system.
Complete
641
Electrical system
b390870
The order for connecting the batteries for a jump start.
1. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the fully

charged vehicle.
2. Connect to the battery positive terminal (+) on the
vehicle with a low battery voltage.
3. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the
vehicle with low battery voltage. Select the negative
terminal (-) which is connected to the chassis.
4. Connect to an electrical ground point (e.g. using the
battery cable bracket in the frame) a short distance from
the battery of the fully charged vehicle.
This last electrical cable may produce a spark when
connected.
If the protective paint on the frame is damaged it needs
to be touched up immediately.
642 Complete
Electrical system
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with low battery voltage.

Do not stand close to the batteries.
6. When the engine has started, detach the electrical cable
from the frame first and then the other electrical cables.
Jump starting
WARNING!
Do not stand close to the batteries when using a jump lead.
A battery can explode causing severe injuries.
WARNING!
Do not connect batteries in an environment where there
are flammable gases or fluids such as petrol and ethanol.
WARNING!
Follow the instructions exactly to ensure that injuries and
damage do not occur.
Complete
643
Electrical system
IMPORTANT!
Jump starting is only permitted using batteries or Scania
jump starter unit Eurotec 2024 L20.
A different jump starter unit can cause serious damage to
the vehicle’s electrical systems.
IMPORTANT!
The starter motor is automatically blocked after
35 seconds.
Run the starter motor for a maximum of 30 seconds. If the
engine does not start at the first attempt: return the key to
the radio position and wait for approx. 30 seconds to allow
the starter motor to recover.
If the engine has not started after 2 attempts, the starter
motor must rest for at least 5 minutes before 2 new
attempts are made. Inspect for any other fault, e.g. a fuel
system fault.
644 Complete
Electrical system
Note!
If the protective paint on the frame is damaged it needs to
be touched up immediately.
Using a jump start, a vehicle with a discharged battery can be

started using a charged battery and jump leads.
If the vehicle’s batteries are discharged and cannot provide
enough current to start the engine you can connect them to
other batteries.
Both systems must have the same battery voltage, i.e. 24 V.
Use heavy-duty jump leads – at least 25 mm² – with insulated
clamps.
Connecting the batteries when the vehicle

requires a jump start
How to connect the batteries when your vehicle has low battery
voltage.
Preparations: Start the engine on the vehicle which has charged
batteries.
Complete
645
Electrical system
1
4
2
b364038

charged vehicle.
2. Connect to the service battery positive terminal (+) on
the vehicle with a low battery voltage.
3. Connect to the starter battery negative terminal (-) on
the vehicle with low battery voltage.
4. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the fully
charged vehicle.
connected.
646 Complete
Electrical system
6. Once the engine has started, first disconnect the

electrical cable to the battery’s negative terminal (-) on
the fully charged vehicle and then the other electrical
cables.
Connecting the batteries when the vehicle is

providing a jump start
How to connect the batteries so your vehicle can provide a
jump start to another vehicle.
Preparations: Start the engine on the vehicle which has charged
batteries.
2
3
1
4
b364039

charged vehicle.
Complete
647
Electrical system
2. Connect to the service battery positive terminal (+) on

the vehicle with a low battery voltage.
3. Connect to the starter battery negative terminal (-) on
the vehicle with low battery voltage.
4. Connect to the battery negative terminal (-) on the fully
charged vehicle.
connected.
6. Once the engine has started, first disconnect the
electrical cable to the starter battery’s negative terminal
(-) on the fully charged vehicle, and then the other
electrical cables.
Jump socket
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged and cannot provide enough
power to start the engine, you can use the jump socket to start
the engine. The jump socket can also be used to jump start
other vehicles.
There is a jump socket located at the rear end of the chassis.
648 Complete
Electrical system
b364037
Jump socket.
Complete
649
Bodywork
Bodywork
EG power take-off
IMPORTANT!
Run the engine at idling speed for approximately 1 minute
after driving before switching off the engine. Otherwise
there is a risk of the turbocharger being damaged.
IMPORTANT!
When using the high-speed EG power take-off, the vehicle
should be as level as possible. It can only be on a downhill
slope for a short time.
IMPORTANT!
Only engage or disengage the power take-off when it is not
under load. Only change gear when the power take-off is
not under load; otherwise the gearbox may be damaged.
650 Complete
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
If there is an unusual noise from the gearbox press the
switch immediately. The power take-off is then disengaged
automatically.
b361445
EG power take-off
The gearbox-driven power take-off, EG, transfers power from

the gearbox to external equipment.
It is located on the gearbox, driven by the gearbox layshaft and
is not normally engaged. Before you activate the EG power
take-off, the starter key must be in the drive position and the air
pressure above 5 bar.
The bodybuilder can choose to make different conditions
applicable.
The vehicle may be equipped with several power take-offs.
You can control the engine speed to the EG power take-off by
pressing + or - on the cruise control switch.
Complete
651
Bodywork
EG power take-off for gearboxes with

splitter gear
For gearboxes with a splitter gear, 2 different power take-off
speeds may be supplied at the same engine speed depending on
whether low or high split mode is engaged when the gearbox is
in neutral.
You change splitter mode manually by pressing the auxiliary
brake lever towards or away from you.
When the EG power take-off is engaged, all gear changing is
inhibited when driving. You can, however, change gear when
stationary. If the vehicle is driven away with an EG power take-
off activated, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Engaging the EG power take-off

2. Engage neutral.
4. Wait until the power take-off symbol appears in the
instrument cluster.
If the power take-off symbol has not come on in the instrument

cluster after 20 to 30 seconds, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Disengaging the EG power take-off

652 Complete
Bodywork
2. Engage neutral.
3. Press the power take-off switch.
4. Wait until the power take-off symbol goes off in the
instrument cluster.
Engaging the EG power take-off using the

clutch pedal
To get more control of the engagement of the EG power take-
off you can use the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal if the engine is running.
3. Engage neutral.
5. Wait until the power take-off symbol appears in the
instrument cluster.
6. Gently release the clutch if the engine is running.
If no symbol is displayed after 10 seconds, gently release the

clutch so that the gear teeth end up in the right position. Do
not press the switch again.
Disengaging the EG power take-off using the

clutch pedal
2. Depress the clutch pedal if the engine is running.
Complete
653
Bodywork
3. Engage neutral.
4. Press the power take-off switch.
5. Wait until the power take-off symbol goes out.
6. Gently release the clutch if the engine is running.
The symbol for power take-off lights up

yellow
b374037
One or more power take-offs are engaged.
EK power take-off
IMPORTANT!
The engine must be switched off before the power take-off
is engaged.
654 Complete
Bodywork
b361447
EK power take-off
The EK power take-off transfers power from the engine to

external accessories.
The EK power take-off is located between the engine and the
gearbox, and is driven by the engine. The power take-off is not
engaged when the switch is in its normal position.
Engaging EK power take-off

The EK power take-off is engaged via the switch.
2. Put the gear in neutral.
4. Activate EK power take-off via the switch.
Disengaging EK power take-off

The EK power take-off is disengaged via the switch.
1. Make sure the power take-off is not under load.
2. Deactivate EK power take-off via the switch.
Complete
655
Bodywork
Controlling the engine speed for EK power

take-off
You can control the engine speed for the EK power take-off.
b412018
Cruise control
1. Press + or - on the cruise control switch.

yellow
b374037
656 Complete
Bodywork
ED power take-off
b375415
ED power take-off
The ED power take-off transfers power from the engine to

external accessories.
ED power take-off is driven directly by the timing gear and
rotates when the engine is started. The switch activates the
hydraulics and supplies pressure to the system.
The bodybuilder can choose to make different conditions
applicable.
Engaging ED power take-off

The ED power take-off is engaged via the switch.
1. Activate the switch.
Disengaging ED power take-off

The ED power take-off is disengaged via the switch.
1. Deactivate the switch.
Complete
657
Bodywork
Controlling engine speed for ED power take-

off
You can control the engine speed for the ED power take-off.
b412018
Cruise control
1. Press + or - on the cruise control switch.

yellow
b374037
Bodybuilding and conversions
IMPORTANT!
The bodybuilder homepage and its instructions must be
applied to all bodywork and conversion projects. You find
the bodybuilder homepage at truckbodybuilder.scania.com.
658 Complete
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
Changes to the vehicle, particularly the retrofitting of
electrical equipment or changes to electrical components
and their software, must be carried out in a professional
manner. The illegal copying of software may, therefore,
make you liable for infringement of copyright. Scania
cannot be held responsible for the consequences of work
not carried out professionally.
IMPORTANT!
Direct connection with the vehicle’s CAN buses or via the
diagnostics socket to retrieve data or other reason is not
permitted. This could be extremely dangerous since it
could affect the functionality of the vehicle’s systems, e.g.
engine or brake. The SCANIA FMS and SCANIA BCI
interfaces must be used in these cases.
IMPORTANT!
The 66-pin connectors in the bulkhead are only intended
for Scania-fitted equipment and may only be used for
conversion of the vehicle with original equipment.
Complete
659
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
Direct connection to the battery's positive and negative
terminals is not permitted.
Always contact a Scania workshop when carrying out bodywork

and conversion projects, or in case of any queries (concerning
bodywork and conversion projects), to gain access to this
technical information.
Vehicles lacking in equipment or functions which consequently
do not meet the technical requirements may constitute a hazard
and it may be unlawful to drive them on public highways.
Wet kit
IMPORTANT!
Before connecting, always check that the system pressure
set does not exceed the maximum stated pressure of the
hydraulic equipment, to avoid damaging the equipment.
The hydraulic system which supplies power to the bodywork.
Setting the pressure in the hydraulic system

The pressure in the hydraulic system can be set to 150 or 220
bar using two fixed positions.
660 Complete
Bodywork
bar
150
ar
0b
22
b361122
Set the pressure in the hydraulic system using the rotary control.
1. Check which pressure is required for the hydraulic

equipment to be connected to the system.
2. Set the pressure using the rotary control.
The rotary control clicks into the end positions and
cannot be set to an intermediate position.
EXT switch
The EXT switch is a safety function which allows some of the
vehicle functions to be controlled from outside the vehicle.
Which functions you can control depend on the vehicle’s
equipment and which logic has been created in the vehicle’s
bodywork system.
Activate the EXT switch.

Activate the switch when you need to control some of the
vehicle’s functions from outside the vehicle.
Complete
661
Bodywork
b361448
EXT switch
1. Press the EXT switch.

The EXT symbol comes on in the instrument cluster.
Operating the platform
WARNING!
Before tipping, check that there are no people in the
working area.
IMPORTANT!
High engine speeds can cause damage to the hydraulic
cylinder and oil pump.
If the vehicle is driven when the platform is in the tipping
position, it should be driven with great care. Otherwise the
vehicle, platform and hydraulics can easily be damaged, e.g.
when braking.
Note!
In order to operate the platform, the vehicle's power take-
off must be activated, see the section Power take-offs.
662 Complete
Bodywork
Note!
Deactivate the power take-off and restart the vehicle after
an emergency stop to reset the tipper functions.
Platform operation switch

The platform’s functions are controlled with a number of
switches.
1 2 3 4 5
b361443
1. Emergency stop for tilt functions.
2. Platform tipping, up/down.
3. Tailboard spreader, open/close.
4. Platform tipping on trailer, up/down.
5. Tailboard spreader on trailer, open/close.
Complete
663
Bodywork
Adjusting the tag axle on the trailer

1 2
1. Tag axle lift of first axle on

trailer.
2. Tag axle lift of last axle on
b361442
trailer.
• Make a short press on the top part of the switch.

The tag axle will rise.
• Make a short press on the bottom part of the switch.
The tag axle will fall.
Tipper body heating switch

You can warm up the tipper body to prevent the vehicle’s load
from freezing. When the tipper body heating is on, the fuel
consumption may increase.
b361441
Platform heating.
Platform vibrator
The platform is equipped with a platform vibrator.
664 Complete
Bodywork
The platform vibrator shakes loose a frozen load. Only use the
platform vibrator for a few seconds at a time. The switch is
spring-loaded. b361440
Platform heating.
The symbol for unlocked trailer coupling

lights up red
b209611
The remote controlled trailer coupling is unlocked.
The symbol for axle on trailer lights up

yellow
b327113
The first axle on the trailer’s tri-axle bogie is lifted.
Complete
665
Bodywork
The symbol for axle on trailer lights up

yellow
b327114
Third axle on the vehicle’s tri-axle bogie lifted.
The symbol for platform heating lights up

yellow
b373653
Platform heating is activated.
Operating the platform
WARNING!
Before tipping, check that there are no people in the
working area.
666 Complete
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
High engine speeds can cause damage to the hydraulic
cylinder and oil pump.
If the vehicle is driven when the platform is in the tipping
position, it should be driven with great care. Otherwise the
vehicle, platform and hydraulics can easily be damaged, e.g.
when braking.
Note!
In order to operate the platform, the vehicle's power take-
off must be activated, see the section Power take-offs.
Switch for operating the platform

The platform’s functions are controlled with a number of
switches.
1 2 3 4 5
b361443
1. Emergency stop for tipper functions
2. Platform tilting up/down
3. Tailboard spreader open/closed
Complete
667
Bodywork
4. Platform tilting on trailer up/down
5. Tailboard spreader on trailer open/closed
Note!
Deactivate the power take-off and restart the vehicle after
an emergency stop to reset the tipper functions.
Lever for activating the platform hydraulics

The lever for controlling the hydraulics is located by the
boarding grab handle on the driver’s side.
b379268
Activating the platform hydraulics.
The lever can be locked in the end position to keep the

hydraulics activated.
Switch for heating the platform

You can warm up the tipper body to prevent the vehicle’s load
from freezing. When the tipper body heating is on, the fuel
668 Complete
Bodywork
b361441
Platform heating.
Platform vibrator switch.

The platform is equipped with a platform vibrator.
The platform vibrator shakes loose a frozen load. Only use the
platform vibrator for a few seconds at a time. The switch is
spring-loaded.
b361440
Platform vibrator.
Box truck bodywork
WARNING!
There is a risk of trapping your hand when securing the
door assembly.
Complete
669
Bodywork
IMPORTANT!
Rails in the walls may only be loaded lengthwise.
Expander supports must not be used for securing loads.
Checking the box body

Before driving each day, check the following.
• The load is secured correctly.
• That the load securing eyes are in good condition.
• The tilt gate and all doors are closed.
Opening side doors

Open the side doors in the following order.
3
2
1
4
5
6
b365208
670 Complete
Bodywork
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2
b209504
Sequence for opening side doors.
1. Unlock and open door leaf 1; position it against door leaf

2.
2. Secure it by fastening the loop in the hook.
3. Unlock door leaf 3.
4. Open door leaves 3 and 2.
5. Move the front door assembly completely to the side.
6. Secure the door assembly with the front side door
bracket.
7. Proceed in the same way with doors 4, 5 and 6.
Closing side doors

Proceed as follows to close the side doors.
1. Undo the catch on the rear side door bracket.
Complete
671
Bodywork
2. Lock door leaf 6. Undo the loop from the hook.

3. Close and lock door leaves 5 and 4.
4. Proceed in the same way with doors 1, 2 and 3.
Opening and closing the tilt gate

• Pull the pull strap to open and close the top hinged flap
door.
The gate held open by the gas springs and secured in the
closed position by the tail lift’s loading platform.
Securing loads
Secure all types of load according to the applicable regulations
to prevent the load from moving during transport.
Expander supports must not be used for securing loads.
Secure the load by lashing it securely at the approved
attachment points:
• Rails in the walls.
Rails in the walls may only be loaded lengthwise.
• The floor's external edges on the longitudes.
Secure the load by the box body

Use the tools that accompany your load lashing kit to secure the
load for transport.
672 Complete
Bodywork
The load lashing kit includes:
• 2 retaining straps
• 2 winches
• 1 ratchet handle
• 4 wheel chocks for floor rails.
• Secure the load with the side doors open.
b365207
Securing the retaining strap.
Complete
673
Bodywork
b365206
Retaining strap secured with a wheel chock.
Only use a strap tensioner designed for your vehicle.

• Use the ratchet handle to tighten the winches.
b329198
Tighten the winches.
The built-in lashing winches run along the side doors’

edge profile.
• Turn the winch’s support brace outwards and remove the
winch from the edge profile.
674 Complete
Bodywork
1. Rotate the winches' support

brace outward.
1 2. Remove the winch from the
b329199
edge profile.
Complete
675
Oils and fluids
Oils and fluids

Engine oil
IMPORTANT!
Do not mix additives with the oil.
Filling engine oil

Information on filling engine oil in your vehicle.
If you need to fill engine oil in your vehicle:
1. Use the same oil grade as that used in the vehicle.
The type of engine oil in the vehicle is stated on the
label by the filler pipe.
− Contact a Scania workshop for more information
about engine oil and oil change intervals.
Filling a specific engine oil

If you cannot read what is on the label next to the filling pipe.
1. Fill with Scania LDF-4

1. Fill with BEO-2
676 Complete
Oils and fluids

1. Fill with Scania LDF-4
The symbol for engine oil lights up whilst

driving
b374064
Insufficient oil pressure which will quickly damage the vehicle.

3. Check the engine oil level.
The symbol for engine oil lights up yellow

b374064
The oil pressure in the engine is too low or too high. Along
with the symbol there may be a counter which indicates the
time remaining until the situation becomes critical. Risk of
engine damage.
1. Check the engine oil level.
Complete
677
Oils and fluids
The symbol for engine oil level lights up

yellow
b208581
The engine oil level is too high or too low.

1. Check the oil level.
Hydraulic oil
Oil grade
Only fill with oil of the following grades:
• ISO 11158-HV
• DIN 51524-3-HVLP
• ISO 6743-4-HR/HV
• DIN 51502-HVLP
• AFNOR 48-603-HV
678 Complete
Oils and fluids
Checking and filling engine oil
Note!
The vehicle should be on a level surface to display the oil
level correctly.
The warning symbol for high or low oil level only comes
on during start-up, not during driving.
Note!
If you top up with too little oil, the system cannot detect
the filling. Do not top up with oil until the oil level gets
close to the minimum oil level mark.
The symbol for high or low oil level lights up

yellow
If the engine’s oil level is too high or too low, the warning
symbol lights up yellow in the instrument cluster.
b208581
The oil level is too high or too low
Complete
679
Oils and fluids
1. Check the oil level and fill with oil if the level is too low.
* The difference between max. and min. on the oil dipstick.

* The difference between max. and min. on the oil dipstick and
in the instrument cluster.
Prioritisation for different oil level displays

The instrument cluster and oil dipstick can display different oil
levels.
Prioritise the information as follows:
1. Display in the instrument cluster.
2. The oil dipstick.
Displaying the oil level in the instrument

cluster
The current oil level is shown in the instrument cluster after
you switch on the voltage.
Note!
If there is a fault in the oil level sensor, an error message is
displayed in the instrument cluster informing that the
sensor is defect.
680 Complete
Oils and fluids
The engine oil level is only shown correctly if all the oil is in
the oil sump. It is therefore best to read the oil level in the
instrument cluster before starting the engine and driving off.
2. Press the OK button and select Setting > Start-up check >
Display oil level in the menu.
The oil level is indicated by a horizontal bar.
b358626
Displaying the oil level.
If the oil needs to be topped-up, the amount to be filled is

shown in the instrument cluster.
The oil level is shown as long as the vehicle is stationary, but for
a maximum of 30 minutes after the engine has been started.
Display of oil level is not available

The oil level cannot be displayed if the vehicle has been driven
or if the engine has been running for more than 30 minutes.
A message is then displayed in the instrument cluster. Switch off
the engine and wait until the oil has drained into the oil sump.
The waiting time depends on the temperature of the engine
Complete
681
Oils and fluids
when it was switched off. If the waiting time is more than

12 minutes, the instrument cluster shows: Wait > 12 min
In certain conditions, the waiting time can be long. For
example, if the engine has been started cold, run for a short
time and therefore has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Checking the oil level with the oil dipstick

The oil dipstick is located at the front of the vehicle or in the
fuel filter, and is used to manually check the oil level.
• Wait for at least 1 hour after the engine has stopped
before checking the oil level.
• Rotate the oil dipstick so that it reaches the bottom in
During the check, the oil level must not fall below the lower
line and must not go past the upper line on the oil dipstick.
Filling engine oil in the front of the vehicle

Move the side casing to one side to gain access to the oil
dipstick and filler pipe.
682 Complete
Oils and fluids
Oil dipstick and filler pipe at the
b376007
front of the vehicle.
Filling engine oil via the cylinder head

b376009
Oil filler via the cylinder head.
Power steering oil
IMPORTANT!
Only use recommended oil types.
Complete
683
Oils and fluids
Note!
Observe the utmost cleanliness. The power steering gear is
very sensitive to dirt.
The oil dipstick is located under the

b353253
power steering oil cap.
Oil for the power steering gear.

Observe the utmost cleanliness. The power steering gear is very
sensitive to dirt.
The power steering oil level is checked using an oil dipstick.
The oil level should be between the lines on the oil dipstick
when the cover is pressed down as far as it will go on the
reservoir. The engine may be running or switched off.
Symbol for low power steering oil level

lights up yellow
Action in the event of low power steering oil level.
684 Complete
Oils and fluids
b353252
The power steering oil level is too low.

1. Fill with power steering oil if the symbol is displayed in
Only use recommended oil types.
To access the fluid reservoir, the cab needs to be tilted.
Automatic chassis lubrication

The vehicle is fitted with automatic chassis lubrication, which
applies lubricant to the lubrication points on the chassis.
Driving conditions determine the amount of lubricant to be
distributed. Difficult driving conditions require more
lubrication, i.e. the lubricating pump will run more often on
such a vehicle than on other vehicles e.g. long distance haulage.
Lubrication and pause times are factory settings and should not
be changed.
If the engine is switched off during a lubricating period, the
lubricating pump will stop and lubrication will be interrupted.
When you start the engine again, the lubricating period will be
completed.
If a much greater amount of lubricant is temporarily required,
you can start the pump manually; refer to step 8 under “Testing
Complete
685
Oils and fluids
the lubrication system”. The normal pause time is not affected

when started manually.
Testing the lubrication system

Steps 1-4 apply if the system is completely empty.
1. Fill the system by undoing the hose to the pump outlet
union; refer to arrow in illustration. Connect a grease
gun to the hose and fill the system.
b203090
2. Check that the indicator pin is moving. The indicator

pin is located on the right-hand side of the main
distributor block.
b203091
3. Fill until the lubricant exudes from the various

lubrication points in the chassis.
4. Stop filling.
686 Complete
Oils and fluids
5. Connect the grease gun to the filler nipple on the

lubricant reservoir.
b203092
6. Fill the reservoir with lubricant.

7. Disconnect the grease gun.
8. Start the pump manually by turning the starter key to
the drive position and pressing the button behind the
plastic cover on the housing under the reservoir.
b203093
9. The pump will start. Walk around the chassis and check
for leaks.
Complete
687
Oils and fluids
10. Conduct a road test and check none of the hoses are
damaged at their end positions for the moving parts.
Lubricate the universal joint and slip joint with a grease
gun.
Reductant
IMPORTANT!
The SCR system will stop working if diesel gets into the
AdBlue tank.
The diesel fuel system will stop working if AdBlue gets into
the diesel tank.
Clean the tanks immediately if AdBlue and diesel have
become mixed.
Note!
When AdBlue runs out, the level of nitrogen oxides will be
higher than intended. This may violate national legislation
which could mean that the requirements for national tax
and duty relief will not be met. Comply with national
legislation.
Reductant is a substance that is necessary for functioning

emission control.
688 Complete
Oils and fluids
The brand name of AdBlue may be different in your region.

The following brand names correspond to AdBlue reductant:
AUS 32, ARLA 32, Air1 and DEF.
Follow the instructions in this section carefully. If you make a
mistake when refuelling, important parts of the fuel system or
emission control system will be damaged.
The vehicle is equipped with emission control technology,
SCR, which reduces the amount of nitrogen oxides in the
exhaust gases. Ensure that the SCR system remains functional
by regularly topping up reductant.
Vehicles fitted with SCR produce a cloud of white steam when
they are started. This happens most often when starting a cold
engine in cold conditions, but can also occur under other
conditions. The steam cloud consists of water vapour and is
formed because the catalytic converter absorbs water. This is
normal, and the steam disappears when the engine is under
load. The steam cloud is no more harmful to health than
normal exhaust gases, but bear in mind that it could reduce
visibility for other road users.
Normal reductant consumption is 2-12% of the fuel
consumption. However, higher consumption is not abnormal.
When using e.g. a power take-off, the consumption is higher
than when driving on public roads.
For more information on emission control, refer to the Checking
nitrogen oxides section.
Complete
689
Oils and fluids
Filling with reductant

Reductant is filled in the reductant tank.
Always check the amount of reductant when you fill up with
fuel. You can check the amount of reductant under the
Instantaneous datain the instrument cluster.
Bear in mind the following when filling reductant:
• Clean around the filler cap before you open it so that

water and dirt do not get into the reductant tank.
• The reductant fluid must comply with standard DIN
70070 or ISO 22241.
• Reductant must not be diluted with water. The SCR
system will stop working if this happens and fuel
• Reductant freezes at -11°C. Do not fill the reductant
tank to the top because it may then crack.
• The filler nozzle for filling with reductant only fits the
reductant tank.
• Help protect the environment! Avoid spillage and use a
suitable container.
The symbol for reductant lights up yellow

b374072
690 Complete
Oils and fluids
Low level of reductant in the reductant tank.

1. Fill with reductant as soon as possible.
Pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster
display.
The symbol for emission control lights up

white
Information on emission control, the SCR system.
b374137
SCR system is being evaluated. This may take place if you have
e.g. filled with reductant after a warning of low reductant level.
The symbol for emission control lights up

yellow
There is a risk that the level of contaminants in the exhaust
gases emitted by the vehicle will be too high if the reductant
level is too low. Contact a Scania workshop if the error message
persists.
b374137
Complete
691
Oils and fluids
The symbol may be displayed due to three reasons.

Low level of reductant in the reductant tank.
There is a risk that the level of contaminants in the exhaust
gases emitted by the vehicle will be too high if the reductant
level is too low. In some cases, engine power is limited and in
some cases vehicle speed is also limited.
1. Fill with reductant.
Problem with the reductant solution.

1. Contact a Scania workshop to check the reductant
solution.
SCR system fault.

1. Repair the SCR system to prevent power and speed
limitations. Contact a Scania workshop.
The symbol for the aftertreatment system

lights up yellow
Do not switch off the battery master switch if the symbol for
the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is displayed.
b374136
Always wait for at least 1.5 minutes after switching off the
ignition with the starter key before switching off the battery
master switch.
692 Complete
Oils and fluids
The aftertreatment system is working.

When you switch off the engine, the SCR system is cleaned.
The aftertreatment continues even if you switch off the power
with the starter key. Aftertreatment is necessary to protect the
SCR system.
1. Do not switch off the battery master switch until the
symbol has gone out.
The SCR system could be damaged if you switch off the
battery master switch while the aftertreatment system is
shown.
The symbol for the aftertreatment system

lights up yellow
Do not switch off the battery master switch if the symbol for
the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is displayed.
b374136
The aftertreatment system is working.

When you switch off the engine, the SCR system is cleaned.
The aftertreatment continues even if you switch off the power
with the starter key. Aftertreatment is necessary to protect the
SCR system.
1. Do not switch off the battery master switch until the
symbol has gone out.
Complete
693
Oils and fluids
The SCR system could be damaged if you switch off the

battery master switch while the aftertreatment system is
shown.
Handling reductant
Reductant is non-toxic, but you should bear in mind a few
things when handling reductant.
• In case of contact with skin and eyes. Wash your skin
with soap and water and rinse your eyes with a large
amount of water.
• At temperatures above 55°C, reductant emits ammonia
gas at levels that are hazardous to health. Do not breathe
in ammonia gas.
• Avoid spillages. Rinse off or flush with water if you spill
reductant. If spilled, reductant can form white deposits
and could cause corrosion if it comes into contact with
certain metals and material.
• Cleanliness when handling reductant is extremely
important since the SCR catalytic converter could be
seriously damaged if there are contaminants in the
reductant.
• Avoid exposing reductant to sunlight as this could cause
algae growth in the reductant tank.
General reductant properties:

• Reductant freezes at -11°C.
• Reductant has a shelf life of 12 months from the date of
manufacture if stored at temperatures below 30°C.
694 Complete
Oils and fluids
Filling clutch fluid
WARNING!
The fluid is harmful if ingested. Avoid contact with the
skin. Wear protective gloves and goggles.
IMPORTANT!
Clean the reservoir externally before topping it up. Do not
remove the strainer when topping up. Risk of leaks due to
contamination.
IMPORTANT!
Wipe off any spillage on the paintwork immediately.
Otherwise there is a risk of permanent damage.
Note!
When the panel is put back, make sure all the panel clamps
hook in properly before refitting the hexagon screw.
Complete
695
Oils and fluids
ENVIRONMENT
suitable container.
The symbol for clutch fluid lights up yellow

b374142
Low fluid level in clutch.

1. Fill with clutch fluid.
Filling the clutch fluid

To access the clutch fluid reservoirs and fill them with clutch
fluid, the service mode must be activated.
Activate service mode and remove the front panel.
1. Switch off the power in the vehicle.
2. Hold in the button on the end of the windscreen wiper
lever and switch on the power again.
The wiper blades are then angled upwards. Service mode
is activated.
3. Loosen the hexagon screw holding the front panel in
place using an Allen key.
696 Complete
Oils and fluids
4. Grip the panel with both hands, push it upwards and

place it to one side.
b374917
The panel.
5. Fold the reservoir out.

b202105
The clutch fluid reservoir.
Complete
697
Oils and fluids
6. Clean the reservoir externally before topping it up. Do

not remove the strainer when filling.
Risk of leakages due to contamination.
7. Fill the reservoir with clutch fluid.
8. Check that the fluid level is between the marks on the
reservoir.
b202106
The selections on the reservoir.
9. Wipe off any spillage immediately.

Otherwise there is a risk of permanent damage to the
paintwork.
10. Fold the reservoir away once the clutch fluid has been
topped up.
11. Refit the panel. Make sure all the panel clamps hook in
properly before refitting the hexagon screw.
12. Refit the hexagon screw.
13. Press the end of the windscreen wiper lever again.
698 Complete
Oils and fluids
Service mode is deactivated.
Clutch fluid grade

SAE J 1 703 (DOT 3 or 4 Brake Fluid).
The fluid is harmful if ingested. Avoid contact with the skin.
Wear protective gloves and goggles.
Coolant
WARNING!
Use protective gloves as coolant can cause irritation if it
comes in contact with the skin.
IMPORTANT!
Check that the coolant level is above the lowest level when
the coolant is cold.
ENVIRONMENT
Coolant is hazardous to the environment. Comply with
national legislation for handling left over and discarded
coolant.
Complete
699
Oils and fluids
b356886
Location of expansion tank
The purpose of the coolant is to cool the engine so that it does

not overheat.
Only the product Scania antifreeze or other products tested to
provide proper antifreeze and corrosion protection for Scania
may be used in Scania engines.
A correct mixture of coolant has the following properties which
are important for the functioning of the cooling system.
• Corrosion protection
• Antifreeze protection
• High boiling point.
The coolant should consist of:

• 35-60% of Scania antifreeze glycol
• Water
Even if the antifreeze glycol content is sufficiently high to

prevent the buildup of ice in the coolant, circulation problems
700 Complete
Oils and fluids
may arise. This is because the coolant becomes more viscous

when the temperature falls below the coolant freezing point.
In order to avoid circulation problems in the cooling system,
the content of antifreeze glycol in the coolant must be adjusted
according to the current temperature.
Filling the coolant
WARNING!
The cooling system is always pressurised even if the engine
is switched off. Remember to open the cover slowly because
the coolant might overflow due to the system pressure.
IMPORTANT!
Only the product Scania antifreeze glycol, or other
products tested to provide proper antifreeze and protection
against corrosion for Scania, may be used in Scania engines.
Products that do not satisfy the requirements for use in a
Scania engine can result in faults in and damage to the
cooling system. This can lead to the invalidation of Scania's
warranty for faults and damage caused by the use of
inappropriate coolant.
Use protective gloves as coolant can cause irritation if it comes

in contact with the skin.
Complete
701
Oils and fluids
If you discover the expansion tank is empty while driving. Fill

the expansion tank with coolant and have a check done at a
Scania workshop.
1. Always mix the coolant before filling the cooling system.
Lowest -16°C -25°C -38°C -55°C

temperatu
re
Percentag 35% 40% 50% 60%

e by
volume of
antifreeze
glycol
Changing the coolant

The coolant should be changed at a Scania workshop.
The symbol for coolant temperature lights up

red
b374063
The symbol and gauge for coolant temperature in the

instrument cluster light up red.
702 Complete
Oils and fluids
The coolant temperature is too high.

2. Set full heating in the vehicle, set maximum speed for
the fan and run the engine at idling.
3. Once the coolant temperature has dropped, the vehicle
should be driven with care to the nearest Scania
workshop.
Meanwhile, keep an eye on the coolant temperature to
avoid overheating the engine.
The symbol for coolant lights up yellow

b374060
Engine coolant level low in the expansion tank.

1. Fill the expansion tank with coolant.
Washer fluid
Use washer fluid to clean the windscreen and headlamps.
Complete
703
Oils and fluids
b353984
Filling washer fluid
The symbol for low level washer fluid lights

up white
b374087
Level of washer fluid is low.

1. Top up washer fluid.
704 Complete
Fuels
Fuels
Biodiesel
WARNING!
Biodiesel is harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear protective
gloves and goggles when handling diesel.
WARNING!
At temperatures above +38°C biodiesel can auto-ignite if it
is mixed with flammable materials.
IMPORTANT!
Clean around the filler cap before opening it so that no
water or dirt can enter the fuel tank. The fuel system can
suffer serious damage if dirt enters it.
Complete
705
Fuels
IMPORTANT!
Special measures are necessary when changing to biodiesel
after use of diesel. Contact a Scania workshop. When
changing from diesel to biodiesel, special measures are
required. Contact a Scania workshop.
IMPORTANT!
Mixing kerosene or the like with fuel is not permitted as the
injection equipment may fail.
Note!
If the vehicle has two tanks, fill the tank with the fuel pick-
up unit first. It is this tank which the pump draws from. Fill
the tank completely to keep air out of the connecting line
to the other tank.
Quality requirements for biodiesel

The quality of the fuel is important to engine operation, service
life and performance. Biodiesel must comply with the
requirements of standard EN 14214.
Your vehicle is prepared for driving on up to 100% biodiesel
EN 14214.
706 Complete
Fuels
For a number of reasons, it is not possible to use 100% of the

fuel in the tank. For example, the fuel pick-up unit must never
suck air into the engine. For this reason, there must always be
fuel left in the tank, even if the gauge shows 0%. The shape of
the fuel tank, the location of the filler flap and equipment in the
tank also affect the amount of fuel that can be used. This means
that it is not possible to fill with the maximum volume of the
tank.
There must also be room for the fuel to expand, e.g. due to
temperature differences.
During extended stoppages, the fuel tank should be drained of
biodiesel and completely filled with diesel since this reduces the
risk of condensation forming in the fuel tank. This also prevents
the biodiesel from becoming too old.
The maximum storage period for biodiesel is 6 months from
the date of manufacture.
Biodiesel at low temperatures

Biodiesel is adapted for use in the specific climate of each
country. If you intend to drive the vehicle into an area that is
colder than the one in which you refuelled, ensure that the fuel
is able to withstand the lower temperature.
At low temperatures, wax-like precipitation occurs in the
biodiesel. When this occurs, there is a risk of the fuel filter
becoming blocked and the engine losing power, stopping or
being unable to start. The wax-like precipitation normally lies
Complete
707
Fuels
at the bottom of the fuel tank and remains even if the biodiesel
is heated.
Problems with wax-like precipitation can start occurring at
around +5°C. Ask your fuel supplier for more information
about the fuel you are using. Scania recommends switching to
diesel that complies with standard EN 590 when temperatures
are about +/- 0°C. Use a fuel heater to improve start properties.
Mixing in diesel EN 590 also improves cold-start properties.
If you are suddenly caught up in the cold and are uncertain
whether the fuel in your tank can handle the climate, you
should park in a warm garage. An emergency solution is to
avoid turning off the engine.
Always use a fuel heater if you are unsure about the fuel's
properties in the temperature in question.
Mixing kerosene or the like with fuel is not permitted as the
injection equipment may fail.
The low fuel level symbol lights up yellow

b374110
Low fuel level.

1. Fill with fuel.
708 Complete
Fuels
Vehicle gas (CNG)
WARNING!
The gas is highly flammable and can be ignited by sparks
from a fire or the like.
Smoking while refuelling is prohibited.
IMPORTANT!
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter. If the
engine misfires under load, the catalytic converter can be
damaged. In the event of a misfire under load, stop the
vehicle and switch off the engine. Have the vehicle
transported or towed to a Scania workshop.
Note!
As a driver of a vehicle powered by vehicle gas, you should
have some basic knowledge with regard to safety and the
handling of vehicle gas. Comply with local regulations.
Quality requirements for vehicle gas

The quality of the vehicle gas is important to engine operation,
service life and performance.
Complete
709
Fuels
In order for the engine to attain its stated performance

characteristics and comply with the emission requirements, the
following fuel requirements must be met:
• Methane number, at least 70 (according to the MWM
method)
• Wobbe index, 41-58 MJ/m3 (H & L group, reference
temperature 0°C.
Other fuel parameters must follow the EN16723-2standard.

The vehicle is equipped with automatic lambda value control.
Vehicle gas of the types natural gas and biogas can therefore be
mixed in all proportions. The engine automatically adapts to
the gas mixture.
General information on vehicle gas

Vehicle gases such as natural gas and biogas are mainly
composed of methane, 85-98%.
The gas is basically colourless and odourless. Odorants are
added so that any gas leakages can be detected. If there is
leakage, the methane in the gas can contribute to the
greenhouse effect.
Start and switch off the engine that is driven

by vehicle gas
It is normal to run the starter motor for a few seconds to start
the engine.
710 Complete
Fuels
Engine output is limited for the first few minutes after starting.
When the engine is warm, the limitation is switched off and the
engine can be fully loaded.
When you switch off the engine, a procedure takes place
automatically to drain the engine of gas. This causes the engine
to run on for a few revolutions after you switch it off.
Refuelling vehicle gas

The gas is highly flammable and can be ignited by sparks from a
fire or the like. Smoking while refuelling is prohibited.
The vehicle is fitted with two different filler nozzles: one small,
NGV1, and one large, NGV2. Use the filler nozzle that fits the
filling station’s nozzle.
Do not use a filler nozzle adapter.
• Follow the filling station’s refuelling instructions.
• The maximum pressure in the gas tanks is 200 bar. The
vehicle should be refuelled when the pressure drops
below 30 bar. The fuel quantity remaining at 30 bar is
enough to drive about 50 km. Engine output may drop
when the pressure is low.
• Vehicle gas of the types natural gas and biogas can be
mixed in all proportions.
• For the flow into the tanks not to be too high, the time
spent filling the tank should not be less than 4 minutes.
Complete
711
Fuels
• During filling, a phenomenon can occur that causes the

pipes to become cold and frost to form on their outside.
This is completely normal and does not affect filling.
• Do not refuel the vehicle before a workshop visit. It is
not necessary to have a large amount of fuel in the
vehicle when it is at the workshop.
1. NGV2
2
b397059
2. NGV1
The pressure in newly refuelled tanks falls

during the night
When completely refuelled vehicles are left unused overnight,
the fuel pressure falls slightly below the full tank level.
The fuel pressure falls because the temperature in the gas tanks
falls and therefore the pressure falls. The pressure in the gas
tanks changes by approximately 1.5 bar per 1°C. The refuelled
gas lasts as long as when it was refuelled even though the fuel
gauge does not indicate the same quantity as when it was
refuelled. A top-up increases the range.
712 Complete
Fuels
Manual tap and pressure gauge

A manual tap and a pressure gauge are located by the gas panel.
The manual tap is used to cut off or open the fuel flow to the
engine. The manual tap should normally be in the open
position.
1. Pressure gauge that shows the

pressure in the gas tanks.
2
b412312
2. Manual tap for fuel flow.
Open the manual tap (2) slowly. If you open the tap too quickly,
the gas leakage warning could be activated. For more
information, see Vehicle gas and safety in the Safety section.
Manual taps on gas tanks

Each gas tank has a manual tap. The manual tap is used to cut
off or open the fuel flow from the gas tank to the rest of the fuel
system. The manual taps should normally be in the open
position.
Complete
713
Fuels
1
b397061
1. Manual taps on the gas tanks.
Draining the fuel filter

Check daily if the fuel filter needs to be drained.
The frequency and amount can vary depending on how much
impurities there are in the fuel at filling stations.
1. Place a vessel under the fuel filter to collect any
impurities.
2. Turn the draining nipple anticlockwise to drain the fuel
filter.
b385244
Draining the fuel filter.
3. Turn the draining nipple clockwise to close it.
714 Complete
Fuels
Vehicle gas (LNG)
WARNING!
The gas is highly flammable and can be ignited by sparks
from a fire or the like.
Smoking while refuelling is prohibited.
WARNING!
Risk of personal injuries. Be extremely careful around the
vehicle in case of faults in the secondary safety valve. Park
the vehicle safely in case of a tank explosion. The gas tank
must be attended to as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Always wear protective goggles and insulated gloves that
can tolerate low temperatures when refuelling. Cover
exposed skin and ensure your trousers are on the outside of
your shoes or boots.
Complete
715
Fuels
IMPORTANT!
The vehicle is fitted with catalytic converter. If the engine
misfires under load the catalytic converter may be damaged.
In the event of misfiring, stop the vehicle and switch off the
engine. Recover with a recovery truck or tow the vehicle to
a Scania workshop.
IMPORTANT!
The vehicle is subject to a driving ban if the cap for the
secondary safety valve is missing.
IMPORTANT!
In the event that the controls and valves on the rear end of
the gas tank are covered in ice, the ice may be removed by
flushing with water. It is not permitted to cut the ice with
tools or to wash with high pressure cleaning equipment.
IMPORTANT!
Refuelling may only be restarted if you are certain that the
tank is not full. Otherwise there is a risk of overfilling, with
subsequent material damage.
716 Complete
Fuels
IMPORTANT!
The tank may not be vented at the same time as it is being
filled. There is a risk of overfilling, with subsequent
material damage.
Note!
As a driver of a vehicle powered by vehicle gas, you should
have some basic knowledge with regard to safety and the
handling of vehicle gas. Comply with local regulations.
Vehicle gas (LNG) is natural gas or biogas that is cooled down

to be converted to liquid form.
The temperature is -130°C, which means that LNG causes
frostbite damage if it comes into contact with the skin.
Vehicle gas mainly consists of methane, 85-98%. If there is
leakage, methane in the gas contributes to the greenhouse
effect. The gas is colourless and odourless. It is a light gas that
rises.
Refuelling the gas tank normally

Follow the filling station’s refuelling instructions.
Filling is automatically ended when the gas tank is full.
Complete
717
Fuels
Points to consider when refuelling:
• For the engine to run at full output, the tank pressure

must be at least 10 bar. Check which pressure the filling
station provides.
• Always blow the vehicle’s filler nozzle and the filling
station’s nozzle with compressed air before and after
refuelling. There must not be ice or snow in the nozzles
when they are connected.
Filling a warm tank

If the vehicle has been stationary a while and still has fuel in the
tank, the tank will be hot.
There is an overpressure of evaporated gas in the tank that must
be vented before refuelling. Follow the filling station’s
instructions on how to vent the tank using the vapour recovery
nozzle. Then refuel normally.
Example of refuelling with vapour

recovery connected and JC Carter
b367271
nozzle.
718 Complete
Fuels
Filling an empty tank

If the gas tank is empty or if it is filled for the first time, the
pressure can increase quickly and the primary safety valve
opens.
When the safety valve opens, it emits a high flowing sound.
Connect the vapour recovery nozzle before the next refuelling
to vent the gas tank. Then a minimum of gas is released
through the safety valve and the sound ceases.
Quality requirements for vehicle gas

The quality of the vehicle gas is important to engine operation,
service life and performance.
In order for the engine to attain its stated performance
characteristics and comply with the emission requirements, the
following fuel requirements must be met:
• Methane number, at least 70 (according to the MWM
method)
Other fuel parameters must follow the EN16723-2standard.

The vehicle is equipped with automatic lambda value control.
Vehicle gas of the types natural gas and biogas can therefore be
mixed in all proportions. The engine automatically adapts to
the gas mixture.
Complete
719
Fuels
Controls and valves for vehicle gas

The manual fuel shut-off cock closes or opens the flow of fuel
to the engine. It should normally be in the open position.
On the tank used for refuelling vehicle gas, the manual vapour
recovery shut-off cock must be closed during operation. Only
open the tank’s manual shut-off cock for venting the gas tank
when using the vapour recovery nozzle. On the gas tank on the
opposite side of the vehicle, the manual shut-off cock for vapour
recovery must remain open at all times.
The pressure in the gas tank can be read on the tank
manometer.
720 Complete
Fuels
5
7
3
6
1
b396231
1. Filler nozzle
2. Vapour recovery connection
3. Tank manometer
4. Manual vapour recovery shut-off valve
5. Manual fuel shut-off valve
6. Primary safety valve (16 bar)
7. Secondary safety valve – red cap (24 bar)
Complete
721
Fuels
Controls and valves for vehicle gas

The manual fuel shut-off cock closes or opens the flow of fuel
to the engine. It should normally be in the open position.
On the tank used for refuelling vehicle gas, the manual vapour
recovery shut-off cock must be closed during operation. Only
open the tank’s manual shut-off cock for venting the gas tank
when using the vapour recovery nozzle. On the gas tank on the
opposite side of the vehicle, the manual shut-off cock for vapour
recovery must remain open at all times.
The pressure in the gas tank can be read on the tank
manometer.
3 4
2
5
6
b367195
1. Filler nozzle
2. Vapour recovery connection
722 Complete
Fuels
3. Tank manometer
4. Manual vapour recovery shut-off valve
5. Manual fuel shut-off valve
7. Secondary safety valve – orange cap (24 bar)
Safety valve function

There are 2 safety valves to prevent over-pressure from forming
in the system.
The primary safety valve opens at 16 bar and evacuates gas from
the gas tank via an evacuation pipe behind the cab. This is
normal behaviour when the gas tank and gas heat up. Should
this happen, it is important that the gas can be vented out in a
safe way.
If the primary safety valve does not work, or if the evacuation
pipe with associated gas pipe is blocked, the secondary safety
valve will open at 24 bar. If the secondary safety valve opens, the
cap fitted on the valve will fly off.
Actions if the safety valves do not open

b200352
One of the safety valves does not open at 16 or 24 bar.
Complete
723
Fuels
• Primary (16 bar) – The vehicle can still be driven. If the

primary safety valve does not release at 17.5 bar, contact
a Scania workshop for maintenance immediately.
• Secondary (24 bar) – The vehicle is banned from being
driven. Contact a Scania workshop immediately.
Risk of personal injuries. Be extremely careful around the

vehicle in case of faults in the secondary safety valve. Park the
vehicle safely in case of a tank explosion. The gas tank must be
attended to as soon as possible.
It is possible to check the secondary safety valve’s cap through
an inspection hole in the tank’s outer cover.
There are 2 safety valves to prevent over-pressure from forming
in the system.
3
1. Secondary safety valve – red
cap (24 bar)
b407969
724 Complete
Fuels
3 1. Primary safety valve (16 bar)
2. Secondary safety valve –

b407968 orange cap (24 bar)
The filler nozzle

The filling station may have two different types of filler nozzle,
JC Carter or Parker Kodiak. Both types can be used for the
vehicle as it is only the usage that differs between them.
JC Carter
b367274
• Press the handles forwards to lock the nozzle in place on the vehicle filler
nozzle. Pull the handles back after refuelling to remove the nozzle.
Complete
725
Fuels
Parker Kodiak
b367273
• Turn the handle to the right to lock the nozzle in place on the vehicle filler
nozzle. Turn the handle to the left to remove the nozzle.
Parking an LNG vehicle

When an LNG vehicle is stationary for a long period with the
engine shut off, the pressure in the gas tank increases.
This is due to the temperature in the gas tank increasing and
the liquid vehicle gas evaporating. However, evaporation does
not take place immediately. A new tank which is full of LNG
and has 10 bar pressure does not release evaporated LNG until
about 5 days have passed.
Tank pressure Hold time
10 bar 5 days
11 bar 4 days
12 bar 3 days
13 bar 2 days
726 Complete
Fuels
Tank pressure Hold time
14 bar 1 day
Note that these times are approximate and apply to a full tank.
The holding times will decrease over time due to deterioration
of the vacuum that exists between the tank walls.
The pressure also increases faster in a gas tank that is not
completely full.
Contact a Scania workshop if the pressure increases by more
than 2 bar per day.
Complete
727
Fuels
b367638
Gas vehicles with a hose connected to the evacuation pipe.
If the vehicle is to be parked indoors for a longer period, it must

be possible to vent any evaporated LNG outside.
Ethanol fuel
WARNING!
A spark can ignite ethanol fumes in the presence of air in
the fuel tank. Smoking while refuelling is strictly
prohibited!
728 Complete
Fuels
IMPORTANT!
Ethanol fuel is extremely flammable and must be handled
with great care. Ethanol fuel fumes can form an explosive
mixture with air even below room temperature.
If ethanol fuel gets into your eyes or onto your skin, flush
immediately with water. Moisturise your skin after flushing
off the ethanol fuel because it is extremely dehydrating.
Breathing in the vapour can cause drowsiness and dizziness.
Quality requirements for ethanol fuel

The fuel shall be of the type SEKAB Etamax D. Other types of
ethanol fuel are not recommended for technical and
environmental reasons.
SEKAB Etamax D ethanol fuel consists of approx. 95%
denatured ethanol and 5% ignition improver.
Handling ethanol fuel

Ethanol fuel is extremely flammable and must be handled with
great care.
• Only handle ethanol fuel away from sources of ignition.
• Prevent arcing due to static electricity.
• Ventilate properly.
• Avoid free-falling jets.
Complete
729
Fuels
• Impermeable, ethanol resistant gloves are recommended

when working with ethanol fuel.
Ethanol fuel in hot climates

There may be problems starting in hot climates.
Starting problems are caused by the ethanol fuel boiling in the
fuel system when the engine is switched off.
Wait until the temperature has dropped before attempting to
start again.
Ethanol fuel in cold climates

Starting problems may arise in cold climates. Always use the
engine heater in cold conditions.
Starting the vehicle from cold, below -20°C, increases the
amount of white smoke and condensed moisture significantly.
The engine heater counteracts engine wear when starting the
vehicle from cold and therefore increases the engine service life.
Filling the vehicle with ethanol fuel

To note when filling the vehicle.
• Clean around the filler cap before you open it so that
water or dirt cannot enter the fuel tank.
• The pressurising hose and associated apparatus must be
properly grounded.
730 Complete
Fuels
• Use a ground clamp unless otherwise specified in the

instructions for specific refuelling equipment. The
ground clamp must connect the refuelling equipment
with the fuel tank and vehicle. The ground clamp
prevents static electricity and sparks.
b211465
1. Fit the ground clamp in the ring on the fuel tank.

Fit the ground clamp before opening the filler cap.
2. Open the filler cap.
3. Refuel.
4. Close the filler cap.
5. Remove the ground clamp.
For a number of reasons, it is not possible to use 100% of the

ethanol fuel in the tank. For example, the fuel pick-up unit must
never suck air into the engine. For this reason, there must
always be some fuel left in the fuel tank, even if the gauge
displays 0%. The shape of the fuel tank, the location of the
filler flap and equipment in the fuel tank also affect the amount
Complete
731
Fuels
of fuel that can be used. This means that it is not possible to fill
with the maximum volume of the tank. There must also be
room for the ethanol fuel to expand, e.g. due to temperature
differences.
The low fuel level symbol lights up yellow

b374110
Low fuel level.

1. Fill with fuel.
Fuel heater
The fuel heater heats the fuel to make starting the engine easier
in cold weather.
Fuel heaters prevent the fuel filter from becoming blocked by
paraffin wax at low temperatures.
The risk occurs if you use fuel designated for higher
temperatures than where you are. The fuel heater can increase
the fuel temperature by around 5°C. This will not be sufficient
if the tank is full of fuel classified for higher temperatures than
your location. The fuel heater cannot dissolve paraffin that has
already formed on the filter. If the filter is blocked with paraffin,
it must be renewed in order to start the engine.
732 Complete
Fuels
Thermostat-controlled fuel heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a thermostat-controlled fuel heater.
The fuel heater is started and switched off when required. It is
not possible to control the fuel heater manually.
temperatures than where you are. The fuel heater cannot
dissolve paraffin that has already formed on the filter. If the
filter is blocked with paraffin, it must be renewed in order to
start the engine.
The fuel heater heats the fuel to make starting the engine easier
in cold weather.
Fuel heaters prevent the fuel filter from becoming blocked by
paraffin wax at low temperatures.
temperatures than where you are. The fuel heater can increase
the fuel temperature by around 5°C. This will not be sufficient
if the tank is full of fuel classified for higher temperatures than
your location. The fuel heater cannot dissolve paraffin that has
already formed on the filter. If the filter is blocked with paraffin,
it must be renewed in order to start the engine.
Switch for fuel heater

The switch for the fuel heater has three positions.
• In the upper position, the fuel heater is completely
switched off.
Complete
733
Fuels
• In the centre position, the fuel heater is activated, as long

as the engine is running and the alternator is providing
charge.
• In the lower position, the fuel heater only runs on the
batteries. This position is spring-loaded.
b358727
The fuel heater
Activating the fuel heater

Proceed as follows before starting the engine.
1. Activate the main power supply.
2. Keep the lower part of the switch depressed for about 60
seconds.
b358727
The fuel heater
The fuel is heated.

3. Starting the engine
4. Press the upper part of the switch to continue heating
the fuel
734 Complete
Fuels
Action in the event of loss of power from the

engine
1. Set the switch to the centre position.
b358727
The fuel heater
Fuel system
The fuel system supplies the engine with fuel.
The fuel system works under high fuel pressure. The fuel
system is therefore sensitive to damage, as this can lead to fuel
leakage.
Poor-quality fuel may contain particles that cause problems in
the fuel system and shorten the lifetime of e.g. the fuel filter.
Poor fuel may also contain water, which can cause corrosion.
Since the fuel system is also extremely sensitive to
contamination, all actions on the system, such as fuel filter
replacement, should be carried out by a Scania workshop.
Complete
735
Fuels
Bleed the fuel system
IMPORTANT!
To move the vehicle a short distance in an emergency, the
starter motor can be run for a maximum of 35 seconds.
This is only possible for a vehicle with a manual gearbox
which also includes fully automated Opticruise.
IMPORTANT!
When venting is complete: Do not run the starter motor
for more than 30 seconds during each start attempt. If the
engine has not started after 2 attempts, troubleshoot for a
fault. The starter motor must rest for at least 5 minutes
before the next start attempt.
ENVIRONMENT
suitable container.
736 Complete
Fuels
WARNING!
The fuel system has a very high pressure, up to 3,000 bar.
Do not go near an engine that is running as a jet of fuel that
comes into contact with the skin can cause life-threatening
injuries!
The fuel system needs to be bled when the tank has been run
dry or when work is being carried out on the fuel system.
b201170
1. Attach a clear plastic hose to the bleed nipple on the fuel

filter housing.
Complete
737
Fuels
2. Open the bleed nipple and pump with the hand pump
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles
(approx. 100 pump strokes).
3. Close the bleed nipple and remove the hose.
b201169
4. Transfer the plastic hose to the fuel manifold bleed

nipple.
5. Open the fuel manifold ventilating valve.
6. Pump with the hand pump until fuel comes out without
air bubbles (approximately 50 strokes).
7. Close the bleed nipple on the fuel manifold and remove
the plastic hose.
8. Pump until the overflow valve opens (a hissing sound
will be heard).
738 Complete
Fuels
9. Start the engine. The engine should be easy to start.
b201170

filter housing.
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles
(approx. 200 pump strokes).
will be heard).
Complete
739
Fuels
5. Start the engine. The engine should be easy to start.
b201170

filter housing.
2. Open the bleed nipple and crank with the starter motor
until the fuel system is purged free of air. The pumping
takes a maximum of 20 seconds.
4. Start the engine and check for leakages.
740 Complete
Fuels
5. Leave the engine idling for 2 minutes. While the engine

is still running, bleed the system again by opening and
closing the bleed nipple.
b201171

filter housing.
until fuel comes out of the hose without air bubbles.
This may take around 100 pump strokes.
will be heard).
5. Start the engine and check for leakages.
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat steps 2-5 a few times.
Complete
741
Fuels
Bleed nipple
b392454
1. Bleed nipple
2. Hand pump
742 Complete
Fuels
Bleed nipple
b392455
1. Bleed nipple
2. Hand pump
Complete
743
Fuels
Bleed nipple
b170167
1. Bleed nipple
2. Hand pump
1. Attach a clear plastic hose to the bleed nipple. Place the
end of the plastic hose in a container that holds at least 3
litres.
2. Loosen the hand pump handle.
3. Open the bleed nipple.
4. Hand pump until the fuel comes out of the hose. This
may take 200 strokes of the pump.
5. Close the bleed nipple.
744 Complete
Fuels
6. Start the engine and open the bleed nipple carefully.

7. Check that the fuel coming out contains no air bubbles;
approximately 3 litres may need to go into the container
before the air has gone.
8. Close the bleed nipple, remove the hose and tighten the
hand pump handle.
If the engine is difficult to start, repeat steps 4-7 a few times.

1 2
b384319
1. Hand pump in closed position.
2. Hand pump in open position.
1. Unscrew the hand pump.

2. Pump by hand until you feel a resistance.
3. Press down and tighten the hand pump.
Complete
745
Fuels
Contaminants in the fuel
IMPORTANT!
Fuel additives can contain substances that are dangerous to
the environment and health. Take care to follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for handling and dosing.
Water or micro-organisms in the fuel

Water in the fuel
• Small amounts of water are permitted in fuel. Max.

0.02% is permitted for diesel (EN 590) and max. 0.05%
is permitted for biodiesel (EN 14214). These amounts of
water do not affect engine function.
• Prolonged and improper fuel storage can result in more
water collecting. Large amounts of water entering the
engine can damage the engine.
Micro-organisms in the fuel
• Micro-organisms can grow in the interface between

water and fuel. They can create a brown or black slimy
film that discolours the fuel.
• Water and micro-organisms can block the fuel filter so
that the engine runs unevenly or stops. They can also
pass the fuel filter and form harmful deposits on
different parts of the injection system.
746 Complete
Fuels
• Micro-organisms can also pass the fuel filter and form

harmful deposits on different parts of the injection
system.
Checking the water content in the fuel

Large amounts of water in the fuel can damage the engine.
1. To check if there is water in the fuel, shine a light into
the fuel tank using a flash light.
Since water is heavier than diesel, the water collects at
the bottom of the tank.
The water in the fuel will appear like silvery bubbles or
floe.
− If you have so much water in the tank that floe
forms, you should visit the workshop for
decontamination.
− If water is so high that it is close to the fuel pick-up

unit’s inlet, request recovery to a Scania workshop
for decontamination.
Rectifying the cause of the contaminants in

the fuel system
If the vehicle fuel system is contaminated by water or micro-
organisms, it must be completely cleaned of fuel and water.
1. Drain and clean the tanks.
Mechanically and with steam/high pressure washer
2. Dry the tanks.
Complete
747
Fuels
It is important that no liquid is left in the tanks after

cleaning.
3. Flush lines and other components in the fuel system.
Blow dry.
It is important that no fluid is left in the system after
cleaning.
4. Always renew fuel filters.
In the event of serious or long term infection the
components of the fuel system may also need to be
renewed.
5. Locate the source of the contamination.
It is usually fuel that has been stored for a long time,
with little movement and without draining of the
condensation. For example in a container, barrel or
auxiliary tank.
6. Rectify the cause of the contamination so that the
infection does not recur.
7. When the fuel system has been thoroughly cleaned, an
anti-bacterial agent can be added at the first refuelling in
order to ensure successful cleaning.
Continuous use of germicidal substances can damage the
fuel system and is therefore not recommended.
748 Complete
Technical data
Technical data
Type plate
The type plate shows information on the vehicle.
1 2 3
b363697
4 5 6 7
1. VIN code
2. Cab type
3. Cab serial number
4. Permitted legal weights
5. Permitted technical weights
6. Chassis serial number
7. Chassis type designation
Complete
749
Technical data
2 1
b388155
1. VIN code
2. Emission class and chassis type designation
1
2 m 3 m
4
2325454
b391160
1. VIN code
2. Vehicle length
3. Vehicle width
4. Coupling device dimensions
750 Complete
Technical data
2
3
1
4
6
2394092
b391161
1. VIN code
2. Production location
3. Year of manufacture
4. Vehicle’s total weight
5. Maximum permitted weight on the axles
6. Vehicle type
Engine type plate

The engine type plate shows information on the vehicle’s
engine.
Complete
751
Technical data
1 Made by 2
123 45XX
Typ/Type DC 13 06
Variant
Motor/Engine No
1. Engine type and engine serial

4 number
Valve clearance cold engine
2. Stamped engine serial number
3 Inlet
Outlet
: 0.45 mm
: 0.70 mm
3. Smoke values
o
Pump timing :
after T.D.C.
b208295
B: 0.75
A : DC 1306
4. Valve clearance
752 Complete
Technical data
Materials with extremely hazardous

substances
ENVIRONMENT
Follow the instructions in the driver’s manual, workshop
manual and dismantling manual for safe use of the vehicle
and component parts.
A number of integral parts of the vehicle contain materials with

extremely hazardous substances.
These substances have properties that have serious and lasting
effects on human health and the environment.
Register of parts with extremely hazardous

substances
If a part or integral parts contain more than 0.1 percent by
weight of a substance that is listed on the candidate register, the
supplier of the part must supply information about the
substance.
https://echa.europa.eu/candidate-list-table
This requirement is pursuant to article 33 of the REACH
regulation (2006/1907/EU) and applies in the EU,
Liechtenstein, Norway and Iceland.
Complete
753
Technical data
A register of parts in the vehicle covered by the REACH

regulation can be downloaded from Scania Technical Library or
obtained via a Scania workshop if in doubt.
https://tilprod.scania.com
Search by part number LPGRS in product group REACH.
Pressure in brake system

The table shows regular inspection values.
Component or system Pressure
Compressor and pressure Maximum relief pressure is

regulator 1250 kPa
Compressor and pressure Maximum connection

regulator pressure is 900 kPa
Four-circuit protection valve Static closing pressure is

550 kPa
Trailer relay valve Output pressure at control

pressure 150 kPa is 160 kPa*
Brake system Minimum operating pressure

is 900 kPa
*Does not apply to vehicles with EBS.
754 Complete
Technical data
Tyre pressure
IMPORTANT!
The tyre pressure changes approximately 0.2 bar per 10°C.
This should be taken into account when checking tyre
pressure indoors, particularly at low temperatures.
Example: If the indoor temperature is 20°C and the outside
temperature is 0°C, the correct tyre pressure is the specified
air pressure plus 0.4 bar.
Note!
The vehicle and tyres are correctly matched on delivery.
Changing to a different tyre dimension can alter the overall
gear ratio of the vehicle. This means that the tachograph
must be reset. Contact a Scania workshop.
Correct tyre pressure is important for safe and economical

driving.
• Always adjust tyre pressure to the axle weight. Incorrect
tyre pressure leads to greater tyre wear and can cause a
significant deterioration in road handling.
• Higher loads and higher speeds cause an increase in tyre
temperature. This, in turn, increases the tyre pressure.
Complete
755
Technical data
• Too low tyre pressure causes increased fuel consumption,

increased tyre wear, risk of overheating. Too low tyre
pressure may also damage the tyre carcass.
• A tyre that has been overheated and has a damaged tyre
carcass is dangerous to use and can explode.
• Follow local legislation and the instructions of the tyre
manufacturer. The tables should be seen as a guide.
Tyre pressure table for single tyres

The tables show tyre pressure in bar at different axle weights.
Axle weight and max. pressure are given in thousands of kg.
The values in the table apply to cold radial tyres.
756 Complete
Technical data
A B C D
5 6,3 6,5 6,7 7,1 7,5 8 9 9,5 10 10,5 11 11,5
455/45 R 22.5 * 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,25 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 10,5
9,0
495/45 R 22.5 * 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,25 5,75 6,5 7,2 7,7 8,0 8,5 9,0 11,6 9,0
355/50 R 22.5 154 5,5 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
355/50 R 22.5 156 5,5 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 8,0
9,0
375/50 R 22.5 5,0 6,75 7,0 7,25 7,75 8,25 9,0 8,0 9,0
295/55 R 22.5 7,0 9,0 6,1
9,0
295/60 R 22.5 6,5 8,5 8,75 9,0 6,7 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 152 6,25 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 7,1 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 154 6,25 7,5 7,75 5,75 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
275/70 R 22.5 7,0 9,0 6,3 9,0
305/70 R 22.5 6,0 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 7,1 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 154 5,75 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 9,0 7,5 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 156 5,75 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 8,0 9,0
275/80 R 22.5 6,5 8,25 8,5 6,5 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 152 5,75 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 7,1 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 154 5,75 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 7,1 8,5
b341355
315/80 R 22.5 5,0 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 8,0 8,5
A = Tyre type, B = Load index, C = Axle weight, D = Maximum axle weight at

number of bar *Single mounting on half shaft.
Tyre pressure table for twin tyres

The table shows tyre pressure in bar at different axle weights.
Axle weight and max. pressure are given in thousands of kg.
The values in the table apply to cold radial tyres.
Complete
757
Technical data
A B C D
7 8 9 10 11 11,5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
315/45 R 22.5 5,0 5,8 6,6 7,5 8,5 9,0 11,6

9,0
295/55 R 22.5 5,0 5,8 6,6 7,5 8,5 9,0 11,6
9,0
295/60 R 22.5 5,0 5,6 6,5 7,25 8,0 8,5 9,0 12,3 9,0
315/60 R 22.5 148 5,0 5,1 6,0 6,0 7,5 7,75 8,25 12,6 8,5
315/60 R 22.5 150 5,0 5,0 5,75 6,25 6,75 7,5 7,75 8,25 13,4 8,5
275/70 R 22.5 5,1 6,0 6,8 7,65 8,6 9,0 11,6 9,0
305/70 R 22.5 5,0 5,5 6,2 6,9 7,8 8,25 8,7 12,6 9,0
315/70 R 22.5 5,0 5,1 5,8 6,65 7,3 7,75 8,0 8,75 13,4 9,0
275/80 R 22.5 5,0 5,4 6,2 6,9 7,7 8,25 8,6 12,0 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 148 5,0 5,1 5,9 6,75 7,4 7,75 8,1 12,6 8,5
295/80 R 22.5 149 5,0 5,1 5,5 6,0 7,0 7,25 7,75 8,5 13,0 8,5
315/80 R 22.5 5,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 6,5 6,75 7,1 7,75 13,4 8,0
11 R 22.5 5,0 5,3 6,1 6,8 7,7 8,0 11,6 8,0
12 R 22.5 5,0 5,1 5,9 6,7 7,3 7,75 8,2 12,6 8,5
13 R 22.5 5,0 5,0 5,2 5,8 6,5 7,75 7,65 8,25 13,4 8,5
305/75 R 24.5 5,0 5,0 5,5 6,25 7,0 7,4 7,25 8,5 13,0 8,5
11.00 R 22 5,0 5,0 5,4 5,5 6,5 7,0 7,25 12,0 7,25
12.00 R 20 5,0 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,7 7,0 7,6 8,5 13,4 8,5
12.00 R 24 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,5 5,75 6,0 6,6 7,25 7,9 8,5 16,0 8,5
b387318
325/95 R 24 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,1 5,7 6,1 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0 18,0 8,5
A = Tyre type, B= Load index, C = Axle weight, D = Maximum axle weight at

number of bar.
Tyre pressure table for special-purpose

vehicles
Table for single and twin tyres.
758 Complete
Technical data
Table for single tyres
A B
7000 8000 9000
A = Tyre type, B = Axle weight in
b213717
14.00 R 20 4,8 5,8 6,5
kg and air pressure in bar.
Table for twin tyres
A B
5000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000
b213718
14.00 R 20 2,1 4,2 5 5,8 6,7 7,5
A = Tyre type, B = Axle weight in kg and air pressure in bar.
Certifications
Type approval for radio, distance sensor

The distance sensor must be type approved in accordance with
national regulations in each country.
Read more at www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information-dis
and the small print at the start of the manual for further
information.
Brazil
All ANATEL certificates (the Brazilian inspection authority for
telecommunication) are listed in the following tables.
Complete
759
Technical data
b396192
ANATEL log
Certificate Function
00697-07-03837 Tyre pressure monitoring
b397138
(TPM)
(01) 07895851045583
00039-13-08645 Distance sensor (DIS)

b397137
(01) 07897843839057
01771-09-05503 Motion and inclination

b397135
detector (MMS)
(01) 07898936009029
02098-08-04825 Locking and alarm system

b397131
(LAS)
(01) 07897789618631

b397136
(LAS)
(01) 07897789618624

b397133
(LAS)
(01) 07897789618655

b397132
(LAS)
(01) 07897789618648
03526-12-06541 Infotainment system (AUS)
02777-16-06394 Communication unit (Scania

Communicator 300)
760 Complete
Technical data
06235-17-10324 Door control system (DCS)
In addition to the certificates in the previous tables, the

following applies:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem
direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de
estações do mesmo tipo e não pode causar interferência a
sistemas operando em caráter primário.
03646-13-07711 Immobiliser
b397134
(01) 07898936009159
Moldavia
The distance sensor is type approved in Moldavia.
Symbol for type approval of the distance sensor in

b342713
Moldavia.
Taiwan
The door control system is approved by NCC in Taiwan.
Complete
761
Technical data
b398326
Text for approval of the door control system.
Malaysia
The distance sensor is type approved in Malaysia.
Symbol for type approval of the distance sensor in

b400392
Malaysia.
Type approval for radio, tyre pressure

monitoring
Radio, tyre pressure monitoring is approved in Malaysia.
b408909
762 Complete
Technical data
Complete
763
Register
A Biodiesel 705
ABS 372 Bleed the fuel system 736
Acceleration control 170 Bodybuilding and
conversions 658
Accessories 169
Bodywork symbols 59
Adaptive battery charging 638
Box truck bodywork 669
Adaptive cruise control 184
Adaptive idling 226
C
Adjusting the collapsible
gear lever in the cab 103 Cab tilting 497
ADR 25 Calibrating the distance
sensor 200
Advanced emergency
braking (AEB) 178 Camera 447
Airbag in the steering wheel 17 Captions in the driver’s
manual 2
Air suspension 246
Central locking 409
Alternative vehicle levels 248
Central locking and alarm 414
App for the remote
control of auxiliary heater 165 Certifications 759
Attention support 212 Chassis lifting points 585
Automatic chassis Checking and filling
lubrication 685 engine oil 679
Automatic neutral position 372 Checking brake chamber
stroke length 493
Auxiliary heater 155
Checking nitrogen oxides 37
Axle weight regulation,
tag axle 256 Check points 489
Check the brake system
for leakages 492
B
Climate system 132
Batteries 618, 626
Clutch monitoring 297
Battery charger 637
Coffee maker 126
Battery master switch 633
Collapsible gear lever 299
764 Complete
Register
Compressed air, trailer E

connection 461
EBS 376
Compressed air horn 143
Economical driving 31
Contaminants in the fuel 746
Eco-roll 176
Coolant 699
ED power take-off 657
Cruise control 172
EG power take-off 650
Cruise control with
EK power take-off 654
active prediction 174
Electrical engine heater 240
Curtain airbag 18
Electrically heated
windscreen 153
D
Electrical socket in cab 129
Danger of fire and explosion 4
Electric cab heater 166
Detaching the propeller
Electric mode 233
shaft 578
Emergency exit 561
Differential lock 267
Emergency kit 562
Disc brake 533
Engine air cleaner 241
Displaying vehicle weights 253
Engine oil 676
Distance to empty and
remaining engine Ergonomics 104
running time 67 ESP 276
Downhill speed control 343 EST 285
Downhill speed control Ethanol fuel 728
with offset 346 Exhaust brake 334
Draining the compressed Extendable ladder 114
air tanks 532
External cleaning 543
Driver’s Manual in
digital format 3 External ladder 509
Drive wheel disengagement 273 EXT switch 661
Driving time and rest
time support 92
Complete
765
Register
F Hybrid 227
Feedback to Scania 1 Hydraulic oil 678
Fifth wheel, sliding 480, 485
Fifth wheel I
463, 467, 471, 476, 536 ID button 81
Filler nipple for parking Idle stop and start 238
brake circuit 590 Idling speed adjustment 223
Filling air in the trailer’s Immobiliser 429
brake circuit 362
Indicator lamps and symbols 53
Filling clutch fluid 695
Infotainment system 432
Fire extinguisher 20
Instrument cluster 43
Fixed bed 114
Interlock valve 366
Fixed seat 106
Internal cleaning 541
Folding seat 111
Isocyanates 41
Front grille panel 496
IVD 83
Fuel heater 732
Fuel system 735 J
Fuses and relays 593
Jump socket 648
Jump starting 639, 643
G
Gear changing 287 K
Kickdown 170
H
Handling hazardous L
substances 41
Lamps 510
Hand throttle 221
Lane departure warning
Hill hold 368
(LDW) 201
Hill start aid 370
Lighting in the cab 393
Hour counter 97
766 Complete
Register
Low gear in transfer R

gearbox 272
Radiator blind 243
Raised idling speed 226
M
Read this first 1
Main beam, dipped
Rear view mirror heating 148
beam and direction
indicators 383 Reclining seat 112
Maintenance programme 494 Reductant 688
Manual level control 261 Refrigerator 117
Materials with extremely Release the parking
hazardous substances 753 brake without
compressed air 583
Menus in the instrument
cluster display 48 Remote controlled
trailer coupling 454
Microwave oven 122
Retarder 339
Mirrors 145
Roof air deflector 29
O Roof hatch 153, 155
Operating the platform 662, 666 Rotating beacon 407
Operation unit for air

suspension 258 S
Opticruise 300, 316 Safety belt 13
Safety during vehicle
P maintenance 4
Paintwork damage 558 Scania Driver Support 205
Parking brake 348, 354 Seat, Basic 107
Particulate filter Seat, medium 108

regeneration 528 Seat, premium 110
Platooning 194 Seat heating 113
Power steering oil 683 Seats in the crew area 113
Pressure in brake system 754
Complete
767
Register
Securing the vehicle Type plate 749

during transport 488 Tyre pressure 755
Selectable front wheel drive 265 Tyre pressure monitoring 86
Shunting 576 Tyres and rims 547
Smoke detector 23
Snow protection air intake 527 U
Sound level control for Upper bed 115
reverse alarm 144
Spare wheel 588 V
Standard lighting 384
Vehicle gas (CNG) 709
Starter lock 427
Vehicle gas (CNG) and safety 5
Steering wheel 98
Vehicle gas (LNG) 715
Storage compartments 167
Vehicle gas (LNG) and safety 9
Symbols that are not
chapter specific 54
W
Warning triangle 562
T
Washer fluid 703
Tachograph 68, 77
Water separating fuel filter 523
Tachograph Remote
Download 78 Waxing and polishing 559
Tag axle lift 251 Wet kit 660
Tail lift 449 Wheel change 551
Tool kit 494 Wheel chocks 559
Towing and recovery 563 White smoke limiter 40
Towing unit 451 Window winders 149
Traction Control (TC) 278 Windscreen wipers,
windscreen washers and
Trailer brake 362
headlamp washers 101
Trailer socket 457
Wiper blade 522
TV preparation 127
768 Complete
Register
Z
Zone management 215
Complete
769
*00000000ENGB*
Complete 1 en-GB serie6 long

OMM Scania

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OMM Scania

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OMM Scania

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Complete

Open source (Open Source Notice)

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice

RADIO TYPE APPROVAL INFORMATION

Model / FCC ID: L2C0051TR IC: 3432A-0051TR

Refer to www.scania.com/radio-type-approval-information-dis for additional information.

Model / FCC ID: 2AHV8-C31859

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

Model / FCC ID: 2AHV8-C31859

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

About the Driver’s Manual............................................. 1

Vehicle information instruments.................................. 43

Symbols that are not chapter specific......................................... 54

Driver assistance system.............................................. 170

Road holding............................................................... 246

Gear changing and braking........................................ 287

Locks and alarm........................................................... 409

Infotainment system................................................... 432

Loading and unloading............................................... 449

Electrical system........................................................... 593

Battery master switch................................................................ 633

Oils and fluids.............................................................. 676

Vehicle gas (CNG).................................................................... 709

Technical data.............................................................. 749

About the Driver’s Manual

Captions in the driver’s manual

Driver’s Manual in digital format

Driver’s Manual as an app

Danger of fire and explosion

If your load consists of flammable material which can come into

Vehicle gas (CNG) and safety

Action in the event of fire

Each gas tank has 2 safety valves, one temperature controlled

Actions in the event of a damaged gas tank

Actions in the event of gas odour

Symbol for gas leakage lights up red

The symbol lights up red.

A gas leakage warning can also be displayed due to:

If the warning is displayed after any of the operations above

Safety valves for pressure drop in the fuel

Requirements from authorities for vehicle

Vehicle gas (LNG) and safety

Action in the event of fire

Actions in the event of a damaged gas tank

3. Call the local emergency number.

Actions in the event of damaged gas tank

Actions in the event of gas leakage

Tow the vehicle if the vehicle is to be taken to a workshop.

Symbol for gas leakage lights up red

The symbol lights up red.

Safety valves for pressure drop in the fuel

Use the safety belts correctly

The symbol for safety belt lights up red